Vol 1 Op Man 191 Classic Issue 7

DS2000
INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL SYSTEM

OPERATOR MANUAL
for
The Ambulance Trusts
Volume 1 - Operator Functions Preface

Issue 7
SunGard Public Sector Limited reserves the right to change this information without notice. This document does not form part of any contract or licence except as may be expressly agreed.
SunGard Public Sector Limited 2010 No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopied, recorded or otherwise) or stored in any retrieval system of any nature without the written permission of SunGard Public Sector Limited. SunGard Public Sector Limited Marshfield Chippenham Wiltshire SN14 8SR Part No. 809--Amb--0000--25 Telephone : 08456 041999 Fax : 08456 052999
VOLUME 1
PREFACE
Amendment Record
Issue A B C D 1 1a 1b 2 Reason First draft Author SS Date
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Approved
25.04.06 24.06.06 22.08.06 30.08.06 11.12.06 11.06.07 20.09.07 01/11/07
Second draft to incorporate SS latest functionality changes Third draft to incorporate changes post review Third draft to remove non - ARP functionality First Issue Amend referencing and correct type errors Draft Incorporate Changes to reflect V161 Second Issue to Incorporate Changes to reflect V161 Draft to Incorporate Changes to reflect V171 KJL SS JC SS TS SS
2a 2b 3 4
KJL
06/11/07 07/12/07 20/12/07 09/07/08
Second Draft to Incorporate KJL Changes Post Review Third Issue to Incorporate Changes to Reflect V171 Fourth Issue to Incorporate changes to company name and screen shot updates Fifth Issue to Incorporate Inter-Site ACD to Ch 5 and amendments to Ch 6.12 Add Amb Listen password functionality to Ch6 and amend Inter-site Common Call Queue functionality description in Ch5 KJL SS
SS
02/04/09
6 7
Ch 5 and Ch 6 amendments DSW DSW
02/09/09 03/06/10
Preface_
ii
Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
PREFACE Contents
VOLUME 1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5 System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5 User Positions (Terminals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 6 Visual Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7 1.4.1 Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -- 7 1.4.2 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -- 7 1.4.3 Typical Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -- 8 1.5 Audio Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9 1.6 Audible Indications and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10 1.7 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11 1.8 Fallback Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11 1.9 Call Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11 1.10 Internal Intercom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11 1.11 Instant Replay Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11 1.12 Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12 2.1 2.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5 Introduction to DS2000 Log On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6 2.2.1 The Log On screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -- 6 2.2.2 Changeover Log On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -- 8 2.3 The Greeting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9 2.3.1 ID Accepted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -- 9 2.3.2 User Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -- 10 2.3.3 Functional Area at Log On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -- 11 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4.1 4.2 The Preselections Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5 Clean Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6 Calibrate Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7 Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 Terminal Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 New Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 Update Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 Events/Fault Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10 4 4 4 4 4 --5 6 6 6 8
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Major Function Selection Keys - Typical Configuration . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Top Row Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Bottom Row Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 New Logon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iii
Preface_
VOLUME 1 5.1
PREFACE
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Telephone Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5 5.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 5 5.1.2 Active Telephone Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 5 5.1.3 Number of Telephone Pages Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 7 5.1.4 Telephone Key Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 7 5.1.5 Telephone Keys with CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 8 5.1.6 Audible Incoming Call Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 8 5.2 Taking a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10 5.2.1 Integrated Telephone Call Queue View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 10 5.2.1.1 Tetra Call Summary Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.2.2 Integrated Tetra Queue View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 11 5.2.2.1 Telephone Call Summary Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.2.3 PABX Call Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 13 5.2.4 Answering a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 14 5.2.5 Microphone On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 15 5.2.6 Clearing a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 15 5.2.7 Holding a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 16 5.2.8 Releasing a Held Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 17 5.3 Emergency Call - CLI (Calling Line Identity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18 5.3.1 Enhanced CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 18 5.3.1.1 Calls Received from a Fixed Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.3.1.2 Displaying Caller Details for Fixed Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.3.1.3 Calls Received from a Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.3.1.4 Displaying Caller Details for Mobile Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.3.2 Last Caller Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 21 5.3.3 C&C Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 22 5.3.3.1 C&C Server Link (DS2000 Command and Control Interface) 5 -5.4 Making a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23 5.4.1 Telephone Page Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 23 5.4.1.1 Outgoing Line Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.4.2 Telephone Dial Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 25 5.4.2.1 Telephone Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.4.2.2 Tetra SDM Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.4.2.3 Tetra ISSI Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.4.3 Call in Progress Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 27 5.4.4 Redial -- Last Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 29 5.4.5 Dial In/Out List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 29 5.5 Telephone Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 30 5.5.1 Web--Based Telephone Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 30 5.5.1.1 View Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.5.1.2 Regional Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.5.1.3 Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.5.1.4 Pre--defined Category Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.5.1.5 Favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.5.1.6 Sensitivity Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.5.1.7 Telephone Number Results Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.5.1.8 View/Edit/Delete New Favourite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.5.1.9 View/Delete Referenced Favourite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 --
10 12
18 19 19 20 22 24 25 26 26
30 31 32 32 33 33 34 36 37
Preface_
iv
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL 5.6
PREFACE
38
VOLUME 1
5.5.1.10 New Favourite Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40 5.6.1 Normal Call Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 40 5.7 Transferring Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42 5.7.1 Transfer to Another Terminal (TRANS CALL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 42 5.7.2 PABX Transfer (TRANS PABX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 44 5.8 PABX Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 46 5.9 Telephone Eavesdrop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47 5.9.1 How to Use Tele Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 47 5.10 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 49 5.10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 49 5.10.2 Using the ACD Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 49 5.10.3 Wrap Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 50 5.11 Common Call Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 51 5.11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 51 5.11.2 Available Sites and Free Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 51 5.11.3 Handoff Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 52 5.11.3.1 Call Forcing Mode (No Local Operators Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.11.3.2 Parallel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 52 5.11.4 Incoming External Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 52 5.11.5 Incoming Handoff Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 52 5.11.6 Call Hand--off Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 53 5.11.7 Lines and Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 53 5.11.8 Call Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 53 5.11.8.1 Call Forcing Mode (No Local Operators Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.11.8.2 Parallel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.12 Conferencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 57 6.1
52
53 54
Airwave Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9 6.1.1 Talkgroup Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 9 6.1.2 Talkgroup Key Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 9 6.1.3 Caller Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 11 6.1.3.1 Caller Identity Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 11 6.2 Talkgroup Setup and Key States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12 6.2.1 Talkgroup Setup Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 12 6.2.2 Preselecting a Talkgroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 12 6.2.3 Un-preselecting a Talkgroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 13 6.2.4 Rearranging Talkgroup Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 13 6.2.5 Talkgroup Base State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 13 6.2.6 Talkgroup Preselection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 14 6.2.7 Talkgroup Un-Preselection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 14 6.2.8 Talkgroup Event Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 15 6.2.9 Monitoring a Talkgroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 15 6.2.10 Demonitoring a Talkgroup (Preselect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 16 6.2.11 Selecting a Talkgroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 17 6.2.12 Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 18 6.2.13 Deselect Talkgroup (Monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 19 6.2.14 Talkgroup Key States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 20
v
Preface_
VOLUME 1
PREFACE
6.3
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.2.15 Talkgroup Show Subs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 21 Unmonitored Talkgroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 22 6.3.1 Talkgroup not Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 22 6.4 Talkgroup Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 23 6.4.1 Talkgroup List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 23 6.4.2 Associated Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 23 6.5 Last Dispatcher Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 24 6.5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 24 6.5.2 Last Audio Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 24 6.5.2.1 Last Audio Monitored Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.5.3 Last Audio Monitored Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 24 6.5.4 Last Event Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 25 6.5.4.1 Last Event Monitored Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.5.5 Last Event Monitored Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 25 6.5.6 Last Event Monitored On Exit Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 26 6.6 Talkgroup History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 28 6.6.1 Talkgroup History List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 28 6.6.1.1 List Entry Time-Stamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.6.2 Associated Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 29 6.7 Subscriber Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 30 6.7.1 Subscriber Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 31 6.7.2 Radio Status Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 32 6.7.3 Main Tab Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 33 6.7.4 Alias Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 34 6.7.5 DGNA -- Dynamic Group Number Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 35 6.7.6 DGNA -- Add Talkgroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 36 6.7.7 DGNA Remove Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 37 6.7.8 Stun/Enable Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 38 6.7.9 Stunning a Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 38 6.7.10 Enabling a Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 39 6.7.11 Radio Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 39 6.7.12 Ambient Listen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 40 6.7.12.1 Motorola Dimetra Ambient Listen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.8 Subscriber Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 45 6.8.1 Searching for a Subscriber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--45 6.8.2 Using the Search Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--47 6.9 Subcriber Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 49 6.9.1 Subs List Function Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 49 6.9.2 Subscriber List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 49 6.9.3 Associated Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 50 6.9.4 Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 50 6.10 Radio User Identity (RUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 51 6.10.1 RUI Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 51 6.10.2 RUI Profile Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 51 6.10.3 Main -- Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 52 6.10.3.1 Subscriber Profile Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.10.3.2 Rui Query Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.10.4 Book -- Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 53
24 25
29
41
52 52
Preface_
vi
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
PREFACE
VOLUME 1
6.10.5 New Pin -- Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 54 6.11 Call Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 55 6.11.1 Call Event History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 55 6.11.1.1 Associated Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.12 Individual Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 57 6.12.1 Single Point to Point Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 57 6.12.1.1 Individual Call via a List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.12.1.2 Individual Selection by ISSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.12.1.3 Mobile Resource Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.12.1.4 Resource Group Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.12.2 Interupt Priority Individual Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 58 6.12.3 Multi Point Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 58 6.12.4 Individual Call in Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 58 6.12.5 Radio Group Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 59 6.13 Inbound Individual Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 61 6.13.1 CCI Port Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 61 6.13.2 Individual Call Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 61 6.13.3 Individual Tetra Calls List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 63 6.13.3.1 Active Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.13.3.2 List Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.14 In-progress Individual Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 66 6.15 Individual Call Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 67 6.15.1 Placing a Call On Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 67 6.15.2 Taking a Call Off Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 68 6.16 Individual Call History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 69 6.16.1 Individual Call History List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 69 6.16.2 Associated Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 70 6.17 Individual Callback Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 71 6.17.1 Queuing Callback Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 71 6.17.2 Individual Callback Requests Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 71 6.17.3 Restrictions Accepting an Individual Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 72 6.17.4 Individual Callback List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 73 6.17.5 Clearing a Callback Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 73 6.17.6 Automatic Clearing of Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 73 6.17.7 Intersite Notification of Callback Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 73 6.17.8 Callback Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 74 6.18 Group Callback Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 75 6.18.1 Queuing Callback Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 75 6.18.2 Group Callback Requests Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 75 6.18.3 Restrictions Accepting Group Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 76 6.18.4 Group Callback List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 77 6.18.5 Clearing a Callback Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 77 6.18.6 Automatic Clearing of Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 77 6.18.7 Intersite Notification of Callback Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 78 6.18.8 Callback Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 78
56 57 57 58 58
63 63
vii
Preface_
VOLUME 1
PREFACE
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.19 Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 79 6.19.1 Emergency Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 79 6.19.2 Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 81 6.19.3 Emergency Calls List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 82 6.19.4 Clearing Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 83 6.19.5 External Acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 83 6.19.6 Emergency Alarm Flushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 84 6.19.7 Emergency Alarm Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 85 6.19.8 Auto Select on Emergency Acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 86 6.20 Short Data Message Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 88 6.20.1 Accessing SDM Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 89 6.20.2 Sending a Short Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 90 6.20.3 Sent Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 93 6.20.4 Sent Message Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 94 6.20.5 Received Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 95 6.20.6 Received Message Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 96 6.20.7 SDM History List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 97 6.20.8 History Message Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 98 6.21 Predefined Short Data Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 100 6.21.1 Accessing the Predefined SDM Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 100 6.21.2 PREDEF SDM key in the General Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 100 6.21.3 PREDEF SDM key in Main Screen Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 102 6.22 Mute All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 104 6.22.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 104 6.22.2 Muting of Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 104 6.22.3 De--Muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 104 6.23 Alert Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 106 6.23.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 106 6.23.2 Sending An Alert Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 106 6.24 Communication Control Interface (CCI) Port Usage . . . . . . . . . 6 - 108 6.24.1 CCI Summary Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 109 6.24.2 CCI Port Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 109 6.24.3 Threshold Exceeded Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 109 6.25 CCI Port Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 110 6.25.1 CCI Port Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 111 6.25.2 Icon A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 111 6.25.3 Icon B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 112 6.25.4 Reserved for Individual Use Key State -- Icon B . . . . . . . . 6 -- 112 6.25.5 Reserved for Group Use Key State -- Icon B . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 113 6.25.6 Summary Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 113 6.25.7 Help Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 115 6.26 Status Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 116 6.26.1 Status Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 116 6.26.2 Associated Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 117 6.26.3 Refresh List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 117
Preface_
viii
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
PREFACE
VOLUME 1
6.27 Mobile Resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 118 6.27.1 List Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 118 6.27.2 Display Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 119 6.27.2.1 Multi Column List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 119 6.27.2.2 Single Column List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 120 6.27.3 Dropdown Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 120 6.27.3.1 Functional Area Dropdown Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 121 6.27.3.2 List Ordering Dropdown Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 121 6.27.3.3 Resource Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 123 6.27.3.4 List Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 124 6.28 Radio Resource Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 125 6.28.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 125 6.28.2 Resource Group Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 126 6.28.2.1 Primary Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 127 6.28.2.2 Secondary Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 128 6.28.3 Secondary Area -- Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 129 6.28.3.1 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 129 6.28.3.2 Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 129 6.28.3.3 Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 129 6.28.3.4 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 130 6.28.3.5 Auto Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 130 6.28.3.6 Subs Prof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 131 6.28.4 Resource Group Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 132 6.28.4.1 OK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 132 6.28.4.2 Updating and Alias Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 132 6.28.4.3 Updating and Multiple Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 134 6.28.4.4 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 135 6.28.4.5 Multicall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 135 6.28.4.6 Dflt Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 135 6.28.4.7 Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 136 6.29 Group Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 137 6.29.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 137 6.29.2 Group Repeat Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 137 6.29.3 Changing Group Repeat State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 138 6.29.4 External Group Repeat State Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 138 6.30 Radio Revert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 139 6.30.1 Radio Revert Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 139 6.31 Analogue Radio Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 141 6.31.1 Radio Channel Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 141 6.31.2 Radio Key Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 142 6.32 Radio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 143 6.32.1 Radio Setup Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 143 6.32.2 Adding Radio Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 144 6.32.3 Removing Radio Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 145 6.32.4 Rearranging Radio Channel Key Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 146
ix
Preface_
VOLUME 1
PREFACE
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.33 Use of Radio Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 148 6.33.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 148 6.33.2 Radio Key Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 148 6.33.3 Mute Speaker Key (Speaker Mute) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 148 6.34 Talkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 149 6.34.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 149 6.34.2 Setting up Talkthrough (T/T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 149 6.35 Monitoring and Selecting Radio Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 150 6.35.1 Radio Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 150 6.35.2 Radio Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 150 6.35.3 Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 151 6.35.4 Radio Demonitor and Deselect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 152 6.36 Combining Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 153 6.36.1 Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 153 6.36.2 Uncombine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 153 6.36.3 Radio Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 154 6.36.3.1 Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 154 6.36.3.2 Uncombine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 154 6.36.4 Talkgroup Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 154 6.36.4.1 Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 154 6.36.4.2 Uncombine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 154 6.37 Remote Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 155 6.37.1 Preselecting the Remote Radio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 155 6.37.2 Using the Remote Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 155 6.37.3 Leaving (Un--preselecting) the Remote Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 157 7.1 Connect Group Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 5 7.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 5 7.1.2 Connect Conferencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 6 7.1.2.1 Telephone Only Connect Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 6 7.1.2.2 Radio and Telephone Connect Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 7 7.1.2.3 Radio Only Connect Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 8 7.1.2.4 Talkgroup Only Connect Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 8 7.1.2.5 Talkgroup and Telephone Connect Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 9 7.1.2.6 Talkgroup and Radio Connect Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 9 7.1.2.7 Talkgroup, Radio and Telephone Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 10 7.1.2.8 Individual Call and Single Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 10 7.2 Connect Groups - Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11 7.2.1 The Connect Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 11 7.2.2 Opening and Closing Connect Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 11 7.2.2.1 Opening a Connect Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 11 7.2.2.2 Opening a Connect Group (Auto Connect Active Call -- Option) 7 -- 12 7.2.2.3 Closing a Connect Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 13 7.2.3 Adding and Removing Telephones to/from a Connect Group . . . 7 -- 14 7.2.3.1 Adding Telephones to a Group (From held) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 14 7.2.3.2 Adding Telephones to a Group (Auto Connect Dialled Call -- Option) 7 -- 14 7.2.3.3 Removing Telephones from a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 15
Preface_
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
PREFACE
16 17 18 19 19 19 20
VOLUME 1
7.2.4 Adding and Removing Radios to/from a Connect Group . . . . . . . 7 -- 16 7.2.4.1 Adding Radios to a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -7.2.4.2 Removing a Radio from a Connect Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -7.2.5 Adding and Removing Talkgroups to/from a Connect Group . . . . 7 -- 18 7.2.5.1 Adding Talkgroups to a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -7.2.5.2 Removing a Talkgroup from a Connect Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -7.2.6 Select/Deselect and Monitor/Demonitor Radios in Groups . . . . . 7 -- 19 7.2.6.1 Monitor and Select for Closed Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -7.2.6.2 Monitor and Select for Open Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -7.2.6.3 DEMON/DESEL Function Key Operation and Connect . . . . . . . 7 -7.2.7 Select/Deselect and Monitor/Demonitor Talkgroups in Groups . . 7 -- 20 7.2.8 Talkthrough and Connect Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 20 7.2.9 Operator Push-To-Talk Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 21 7.2.10 Open Connect Group Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 21 7.2.11 Individual Call Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 21 7.2.12 Connect Group Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 21 7.3 Operator Intercom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 22 7.3.1 Making an Intercom Call to Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 22 7.3.2 Receiving an Internal Intercom Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 23 7.3.3 Clearing an Internal Intercom Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 23 7.3.4 Setting Up An Operator Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 24 7.4 Operator Intercom (Partitioned) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 25 7.4.1 Internal Intercom Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 25 7.4.2 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 26 7.4.3 Making an Internal Intercom Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 26 7.4.4 Cancelling an Internal Intercom Call Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 27 7.4.5 Taking an Internal Intercom Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 27 7.4.6 Cancelling an Internal Intercom Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 27 8.1
Local Recording - Instant Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5 8.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 5 8.1.2 Replay Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 5 8.1.3 Accessing Another Operator Terminals Recording . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 6 8.1.4 Types of Call Recorded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 7 8.1.5 Recording Precedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 8 8.1.5.1 Recording Start and Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 8 8.1.5.2 Emergency Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 8 8.1.5.3 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 8 8.1.6 Replaying a Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 10 8.1.6.1 Screen Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 10 8.1.6.2 Screen Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 11 8.1.7 Cancelling a Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 14 8.2 Ancillary Controls and Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15 8.2.1 Ancillary Key Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 16 8.3 New PIN or Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17 8.3.1 Changing Your PIN or Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 17 8.4 Headset and Loudspeaker Volume Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 19
xi
Preface_
VOLUME 1 8.5
PREFACE
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Call Supervisor (Console Request) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 21 8.5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 21 8.5.2 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 21 8.5.2.1 Making a Call Supervisor Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 21 8.5.2.2 Confirming a Call Supervisor Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 21
8.6
Area Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 23 8.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 23 8.6.2 Selecting Functional Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 23 8.6.3 Rearranging Functional Area Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 24 8.6.4 Deselecting Functional Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 25 8.7 Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 27 8.7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 27 8.7.2 Accessing the Remote Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 27 8.7.3 Leaving (Logging Off) the Remote Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 29 8.8 Alpha Numeric Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 30 8.8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 30 8.8.2 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 30 8.8.3 Alphanumeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 30 8.8.4 Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 32 8.9 Operator Note Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 33 8.9.1 Operator Note Pad List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 33 8.9.1.1 Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.9.1.2 New Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.10 System Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 37 8.10.1 Operator Groups Overwiew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 37 8.10.1.1 Operator Terminal Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.10.1.2 Legacy Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.10.1.3 Talkgroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.10.1.4 Functional Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.10.1.5 ICCS Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.10.1.6 Telephone Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.10.1.7 Telephone Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.10.1.8 Telephone Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.10.2 Operator Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 39 8.10.3 Call Supervisor Segregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 39 8.10.4 Fault Message Segregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 39 8.10.4.1 Critical Fault Log Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.11 Terminal Select with Group Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 40 8.11.1 Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 40 8.11.1.1 Operator Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.11.1.2 Terminal Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.11.1.3 User Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.11.1.4 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.11.1.5 Other Terminal Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.11.1.6 Activity Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 --
35 35 37 37 37 38 38 38 38 38
39 40 40 40 41 41 41
Preface_
xii
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
PREFACE
VOLUME 1
8.11.2 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 41 8.11.2.1 Refresh Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 41 8.11.2.2 Priming an Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 42 8.12 Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43 8.12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 43 8.12.2 Browser Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 43 9.1 Terminal Eavesdrop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 5 9.1.1 How to Terminal Eavesdrop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 5 9.2 Mimic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 7 9.2.1 Mimic (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 7 9.2.2 Mimic with Group Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 9 9.2.2.1 Cancelling a Mimic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 10 9.3 Terminal Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11 9.4 System Alarms, Faults and Event Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14 9.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 14 9.4.2 Fault Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 14 9.4.3 System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 17 9.5 Call Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 18 9.6 Dynamic Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 19 9.6.1 Accessing the Dynamic Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 19 9.6.2 Dyn Ops Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 20 9.6.3 Icon Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 21 9.6.4 Operator Logged On Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 22 9.6.5 ACD Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 22 9.6.6 Telephone Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 23 9.6.7 Radio Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 23 9.6.8 Tetra Talkgroup Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 24 9.6.9 Tetra Individual Call Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 24 9.6.10 Internal Intercom Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 25 9.6.11 Instant Replay Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 25 9.6.12 Editing the Dyn Op Screen Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 25 9.6.12.1 Adding a New Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 25 9.6.12.2 Editing/Deleting an Existing Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 26 9.7 Critical Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 27 9.7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 27 9.7.2 Operator Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 27 9.7.3 Displaying the Critical Faults List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 27 9.7.4 Acknowledging Critical Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 29 9.7.5 Clearing Critical Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 29 9.7.6 Adding a Reference Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 29 9.7.7 Customised Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 29 9.8 Web Based Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 30 9.8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 30 9.8.2 HTML Based Help Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 30 9.8.3 HTML Edit Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 31 9.8.4 Help Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 32
xiii
Preface_
VOLUME 1 9.8.5
PREFACE
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL HTML Link Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 32 10 10 10 10 10 ---5 6 6 6 6
10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 Enable/Disable Terminal Log On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.2 To Enable Terminal Logon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.3 To Disable Terminal Logon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3 Enable/Disable Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8 10.3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 8 10.3.2 To Disable a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 8 10.3.3 To Enable a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 9 10.4 Enable/Disable Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10 10.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 10 10.4.2 To Disable a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 10 10.4.3 To Enable a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 11 10.5 Route Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12 10.6 Radio Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13 10.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 13 10.6.2 First Level Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 15 10.6.3 Second Level Configuration -- Physical Channels . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 17 10.6.3.1 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -10.6.3.2 Base Station Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -10.6.3.3 Bay and Channel Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -10.6.3.4 Configure Pip Tone Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -10.6.3.5 Configure Talkthrough Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -10.7 Dynamic Operator Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23 10.7.1 To Access the Edit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 23 10.7.2 To Add a Terminal Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 23 10.7.3 To Edit or Delete an Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 23 10.8 Calibrate Screen - Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 25
17 18 18 21 22
Preface_
xiv
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
PREFACE
VOLUME 1
Products and systems from SunGard Public Sector Limited are subject to continuous development and we reserve the right to amend specifications without notice. This document is not part of a contract or licence except as may be expressly agreed.
xv
Preface_
VOLUME 1
PREFACE
WARNING
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
HIGH VOLTAGE
High voltages are generated within the equipment. Before carrying out any maintenance or repair work, ensure that the equipment is isolated from the electrical supply. When the electrical supply cannot be isolated for specific reasons, testing, maintenance and/or repair tasks are to be undertaken only by competent technicians who are aware of the dangers involved, and have taken all the necessary safety precautions.
Installations using VoIP contain media from
Portions Copyright E 2002-2007 Global IP Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved . Global IP Solutions, GIPS, MediaWare, GIPS VoiceEngine, NetEQ, iLBC, iPCM-wb, iSAC, GIPS Enhanced G.711, Remote Extension, Click- -Talk and associated design marks -Toand logos are trademarks of Global IP Solutions, and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Patents and Patents Pending, Global IP Solutions, Inc. www.gipscorp.com
Preface_
xvi
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
PREFACE Customer Functionality
VOLUME 1
The purpose of this table is to give the customer a quick reference to the functionality supplied to their system. The following table should be completed on installiation to reflect the functionality of your system. NOTE: Functionality and screen layout is totally dependent on your system specification.
Yes Chapter 5 - Telephone 5.1 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.3 5.3.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.5 5.6 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 Telephone Page Integrated Telephone Call Queue Integrated Tetra Call Queue PABX Call Capture Calling Line Identity (CLI) Enhanced CLI ( BT EISEC) Call in Progress Dialling Last Number Redial Web--Based Telephone Directory Monitoring Call Transfer to Another Terminal PABX Transfer PABX Key Tele Eavesdrop Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Inter--Site Automatic Call Distribution Conferencing
p
No
Chapter 6 - Radio Tetra Radio Functions 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 Talkgroup Setup Unmonitored Talkgroup Talkgroup Selection Last Dispatcher Warning Talkgroup History Subscriber Profile Subscriber Search Subscriber List RUI Profile Call Events
xvii
Preface_
VOLUME 1
PREFACE
6.12 6.13 6.14 6.15 6.16 6.17 6.18 6.19 6.20 6.21 6.22 6.23 6.24 6.25 6.26 6.27 6.28 6.29 6.30 6.32 6.33 6.34 6.35 6.36 6.37 Individual Calls Inbound Individual Call Clearing Individual Call Individual Call Hold Individual Call History Individual Callback Operation Group Callback Operation Emergency Calls Short Data Message Functions Predefined Short Data Messages All Audio Mute Alert Tone CCI Port Usage CCI Port Summary Status Code List Mobile Resource Radio Resource Group Group Repeat Radio Revert Radio Set Up Use of Radio Keys Talkthrough Monitoring and Selecting Combine Remote Radio
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Analogue Radio Functions
Chapter 7 - Conferencing and Internal Intercom 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 Connect Groups--Options Connect Groups--Connecting Standard Operator Intercom Partitioned Operator Intercom
Chapter 8 - Miscellaneous 8.1 8.2 8.2.3 8.3 Instant Replay (Local Recording) Ancillary Controls and Alarm Indications Ancillary Key Alarms New PIN or Password
Preface_
xviii
DS2000
8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11 8.12
OPERATOR MANUAL Headset and Loudspeaker Volume Levels Call Supervisor (Console Request) Area Set Up Remote Access Alpha Numeric Keypads Operator Note Pad System Partitioning Terminal Select with Group Partitioning Browser
PREFACE
VOLUME 1
Chapter 9 - Support Functions 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 Terminal Eavesdrop Mimic Terminal Override Fault Log Call Logger Dynamic Operator Screen Critical Faults Screen Web Based Help
Chapter 10 - System Maintenance (ENG FNS) 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 Enable/Disable Terminal Log On Enable/Disable Line Enable/Disable Channel Route Tone Radio Configuration Dynamic Operator Screen Configuration Calibrate Screen
xix
Preface_
VOLUME 1
PREFACE
This page is intentionally blank.
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Preface_
xx
Chapter 1 Introduction
VOLUME 1 INTRODUCTION Amendment record

Issue A B 1 Reason Draft to Incorporate Changes to reflect V171 Author KJL Date
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Approved
06/11/07 07/12/07 20/12/07
Second Draft to Incorporate KJL Changes Post Review First Issue to Incorporate Changes to Reflect V171 KJL
Amb_Chapter_1
1 -- 2
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 INTRODUCTION
Contents
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5 System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5 User Positions (Terminals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 6 Visual Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7 1.4.1 Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -- 7 1.4.2 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -- 7 1.4.3 Typical Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -- 8 1.5 Audio Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9 1.6 Audible Indications and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10 1.7 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11 1.8 Fallback Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11 1.9 Call Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11 1.10 Internal Intercom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11 1.11 Instant Replay Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11 1.12 Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12
1 -- 3
Amb_Chapter_1
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Amb_Chapter_1
1 -- 4
DS2000
1.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
Introduction
This manual describes the operation and use of the Sungard Public Sector DS2000 Integrated Communications Control System. The DS2000 description and basic operation is described in the first part of the manual. Day-to-day operations are divided into chapters covering the main functions: Telephone, Radio, Miscellaneous, Support, and System Maintenance. System administration of the database eg Back Up and Restore etc are located in Volume 2. Chapters 2 to 10 describe how to perform tasks or access particular functions. The manual assumes that each sequence flows without interruption. However, to cover situations where problems may occur or if alternatives are available, there is a Helpful Hint box to provide tips on the particular subject. Appendices at the rear of the manual are: Glossary of Terms; Conditions of Approval for Connection to Services Provided by UK Public Telecommunications Operators; Line Groups; Site ID Codes and Legends.
1.2
System Features
The system provides connection of a wide variety of communication devices to other devices, either one-to-one or in conference. The DS2000 controls and receives data from user terminals. The terminals are provided with a touch screen Visual Display Unit (VDU) which ensures fast access to operational functions and eliminates the need for a keyboard. The DS2000 connects to PSTN and PABX lines, Private Circuits and multiple radio systems. Calls pass via the DS2000 over the Local Area Network (LAN) to the Personal Computer (PC) at each user terminal. The PC provides aural and visual presentation of the calls in a form that enables the user to control and respond to inputs from the various types of equipment. Users log on to the system with a User ID and Password. This selects the telephone lines and radio channels etc to which the user has access to. Users can answer and make telephone and radio calls, speak to other operators, have instant playback of recordings, and set up telephone and radio conferences etc. A printer is provided as an administration aid to produce printouts from the system faults/events log. Provision can be made for a call logger if required. The switching equipment is duplicated so that there is always a standby ready to take over should the working system fail. The equipment continually tests itself for malfunction and reports any faults to the Control Room. If a malfunction occurs to the working side, all external calls are switched to the standby without loss of service. In the event of mains failure the DS2000 can be supported by an Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) to maintain service until the standby generator operates or power is restored.
1 -- 5
Amb_Chapter_1
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
1.3
User Positions (Terminals)

Below is an illustration of a typical User Terminal:
Touch-sensitive screen with speakers Mouse (Optional)
Keyboard (Optional)
VAIU comprising: Headset Sockets Headset volume control Loudspeaker volume control P2 Keyboard socket
Bar Foot-switch
Typical Operator Position

A User Terminal comprises: S S S S S A touch-screen VDU A VOIP Audio Interface Unit (VAIU) A handset or headset A radio transmit footswitch A mouse (optional)
A keyboard is provided at all operator positions; however, the keyboard is generally removed once the operator PC has been booted.
Amb_Chapter_1
1 -- 6
DS2000
1.4
1.4.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
Visual Presentation
Touch Screen
The Visual Display Unit (VDU) incorporates a touch screen. By touching the screen, you can select items displayed on the screen such as keys or directory entries. In most cases the touch screen is only activated when you remove your finger from it. This permits you to touch it in one place and drag your finger along until you reach the item you want to select. Some keys (e.g., Transmit) only operate while the key is being touched. In all cases selected items change appearance on the screen. As well as indicating an active or passive state, keys on the screen can incorporate identification codes and can be made to change colour or flash to indicate when an action is required by you. The touch screen comprises a protective layer, across the surface of which harmless high-frequency sound waves are transmitted. When you touch the screen, the sound is damped at the point of contact, sensors around the edge of the screen detect the position and relate it to the key or line of text. A mouse may also be provided; use this in the normal way -- point and click.
1.4.2
Help
On-screen Help can be accessed by the HELP key. The Help facility provides a textual explanation/description for each of the function keys available to you. The operation of this facility is explained in Chapter 9 (Support Functions).
1 -- 7
Amb_Chapter_1
VOLUME 1 INTRODUCTION 1.4.3 Typical Main Screen
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
In the illustration below, the far left of the screen relates to the Mobile Resouce area. The center area is the General Work Area currently displaying the Active Telephone Page. The area to the far right of the screen is the Integrated Call Queue where up to eight queued telephone calls can be shown (i.e., calls waiting to be answered) and the EMERGENCY, INDIVIDUAL CALLBACK REQUEST, TALKGROUP CALLBACK REQUEST, and INDIVIDUAL CALLS keys can be maximised for display. A detailed description of telephone operation and the Integrated Call Queue is given in Chapter 5.
The TAKE CALL key is displayed when the telephone queue is maximised in the Integrated Call Queue area. When touched, incoming telephone calls are taken in priority and longest waiting order. Access to the various operational facilities is provided by three horizontal rows of keys, one row at the top of the screen and two rows at the bottom. The TX key can be used as an alternative to the footswitch when you want to transmit.
Amb_Chapter_1
1 -- 8
DS2000
1.5
OPERATOR MANUAL
Audio Presentation
Each user position has a headset and a loudspeaker to receive speech. A VOIP Audio Interface Unit (VAIU) is provided at each operator position which can be mounted above or below the desk. The VAIU provides the interface between an operators headset/handset and the DS2000 system. The VAIU additionally provides stereo interfaces to the operator position sound device to support instant recording. In some cases the VAIU can be mounted to the rear of the operator desk with the volume controls and headset connections brought to the front on flying leads to facilitate a tidy desk. The headset can be plugged into either of the two sockets, located on the VAIU. A second headset can be plugged in to the other socket as required. Both headsets will hear the same audio and both microphones are live. The VAIU contains: S S S S S Connection for two local headsets A headset volume control A loudspeaker volume control A USB socket A foot--switch connection
An audible incoming call alarm is generated by a wave file which is output to the operators loudspeaker. Two different tones are used to differentiate between Urgent and Normal incoming calls. The maximum volume of the alarms is preset in the factory; however, they can be disabled at each operator position. A second audible tone is generated at the operator terminal, which sounds on incoming faults/alarms. This sounder is also controlled from the operator console and is generated from another wave file resident in the software. Incoming audio signals are routed to the headset and/or to the loudspeaker according to the rules summarised in the following table:
1 -- 9
Amb_Chapter_1
Function Monitor Radio Selected Radio Select + Monitor Radio Telephone Telephone + Monitor Radio Telephone + Select Radio Other (3) Other (3) + Monitor Radio Key: Earpiece Monitored radio Selected radio Selected + Monitored radio(1) Telephone Telephone Telephone Other (3) Other (3) (1) = (2) = (3) =
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Loudspeaker Monitored radios Selected radios Selected + Monitored radios(1) None Monitored radios (1)&(2) Selected radios (2) None Monitored radios (1)&(2)
The audio of Monitored radios is reduced by the value preset in the database, usually 16dB. The Loudspeaker is forced on, if manually turned off. Internal Intercom, Recorder replay Motorway Telephone, Local
Note:
Selecting a radio channel reduces audio levels on the active audio device for the monitored radio channels at your terminal. You can normally only select radio with telephone by the use of the HOLD OVERRIDE key. The System Manager can configure the database to operate both simultaneously for certain types of user, if required. If you are monitoring a channel and a second user selects the same channel, your audio for that channel is reduced by 16dB. (This figure is set during installation in the System Default file.)
Helpful Hint
Your terminal audio may behave differently from the rules listed in the table. Check with your System Manager to see whether these details have been changed in the database.
1.6
Audible Indications and Alarms

Audible incoming call indication is provided by a sounder fitted at the terminal position. Two different tones are used to differentiate between Urgent and Normal incoming calls. The audible indications can be individually disabled at each user position. A further audible alarm in the form of a continuous tone is provided by another sounder at all user positions which operates on incoming faults/alarms and radio alarms for users enabled to receive them.
Amb_Chapter_1
1 -- 10
DS2000
1.7
OPERATOR MANUAL
Keyboard
A keyboard is only required for carrying out the database update and editing functions, and for use with the Facility Sockets. Database editing and updating is performed by designated personnel. A keyboard connection on the VOIP Audio Interface Unit permits a keyboard to be connected at any operator position when required.
1.8
Fallback Facilities
The DS2000 switch equipment is duplicated for high reliability. However, because of regulations that govern communications systems connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), it is also necessary to have alternative equipment available to handle essential telephone traffic in the event of a complete failure of the switch. In the DS2000, besides the essential telephone lines (PSTN), some of the PABX and main radio channels are also routed to the fallback equipment. In the case of telephones, fallback can be to an HTEC key and lamp unit, to another DS2000, or a local arrangement with your telecommunications provider can be made. In the case of analogue radios, fallback is typically to a Cyfas C10 controller. Talkgroup fallback can be to handsets, a fixed mobile radio set located in the control room or to a remote control unit i.e., Zetron. Switching to these fallback units is normally automatic, but it can be initiated manually (by a qualified person). Operation of the fallback units is described in the manufacturers manuals. When the DS2000 switch is restored to service, telephone calls in progress using the fallback equipment are not immediately switched back to it. The individual lines are monitored and switched back to normal operation at the end of the call.
1.9
Call Logger
If a call logger is provided as part of your system, refer to the call logger manufacturers literature for details. The call logger has its own printer -- it does not use the DS2000 system printer.
1.10
Internal Intercom
To reduce noise in the Control Room internal intercom provides direct connection between user positions.
1.11
Instant Replay Recorder

Each terminals voice traffic is recorded digitally and is available to you for instant playback. Each message is labelled with a message number, date, time of starting and duration. The recording is done at the terminal and streamed to an audio server for storeage . Speech is not recorded when using the tannoy. The capacity of the digital recorder is dependent on customer requirements. 1 -- 11
Amb_Chapter_1
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
1.12
Database
DS2000 functionality is determined by the database which is stored in the main and standby servers. Much of this database is configured at the factory to specifications agreed between SunGard Vivista and the customer. However, using the Database editing facilities, specific items can be configured locally by the Engineer or System Manager.
Amb_Chapter_1
1 -- 12
Chapter 2 Start Up and DS2000 Log On
VOLUME 1 START UP AND DS2000 LOG ON Amendment record

DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Approved
06/11/07 07/12/07 20/12/07
Amb_Chapter_2
2 -- 2
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 START UP AND DS2000 LOG ON
Contents
2.1 2.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5 Introduction to DS2000 Log On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6 2.2.1 The Log On screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -- 6 2.2.2 Changeover Log On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -- 8 2.3 The Greeting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9 2.3.1 ID Accepted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -- 9 2.3.2 User Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -- 10 2.3.3 Functional Area at Log On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -- 11
2 -- 3
Amb_Chapter_2

DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Amb_Chapter_2
2 -- 4
DS2000
2.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
Introduction
The Multi--Home Selection screen allows you to connect to and logon to a number of different sites from the same terminal position. On start--up the terminal automatically displays the Site Selection screen as shown below, from which to select a site.
Touching one of the site keys will initiate a connection to that site and a screen displaying the download of the DS2000 operator configuration files as shown below.
When the download is complete the DS2000 Log On screen appears. If you are unable to connect to the selected site the Download Failure screen will be displayed. Touching the Quit key returns the terminal to the Site Selection screen.
Helpful Hint
You will not be able to logon if there are no audio lines available or an audio connection cannot be established. A No audio lines available message will be displayed in the message area if this is detected.
2 -- 5
Amb_Chapter_2
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
2.2
Introduction to DS2000 Log On

The facilities which are available to you are decided by the access rights given to your Log On (User ID and Password) and/or to the terminal used. Each individual User ID and Password is allocated a defined level of authority which provides access to particular facilities. The facilities that can be accessed by you are preset by the System Manager into the database. The database recognises each User ID and Password as it is entered when you log on and releases only the facilities available to you and/or to that terminal postition.
2.2.1
The Log On screen

At the top of the Log On screen you will see -- from left to right: a) b) c) d) e) f) The date and time The Site ID and the number of the terminal A data connection state icon An audio connection state icon A message area Two keys labelled HELP and QUIT
The centre of the screen contains the General Work Area displaying a qwerty keyboard.
Enter your User ID by touching the appropriate characters on the keypad then touch the ENTER key.
Amb_Chapter_2
2 -- 6
DS2000
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
The characters you enter for your password are input to the text area but they are displayed as stars for security reasons. You are then prompted to enter your Password. Touch the appropriate characters then touch the ENTER key.
If you make a mistake when logging on, touch the BACKSPACE key to delete the last number/character entered, or the ERASE key to delete all the numbers/characters entered.
Helpful Hint
If you see the message: LOG ON INVALID; RE-- ENTER displayed in the message area, it is because: a) b) c) The USER ID is not recorded in the database (User Profile file) The USER ID is already being used by another user The USER ID is valid but the Password is incorrect
Three successive Log On failures will cause the terminal to be disabled. When this occurs refer to the System Manager to re-enable the terminal. System failure will also prevent logging on. If you see the message: a)
DATABASE NOT AVAILABLE
it is due to DS2000 Network Server failure. The terminal is unable to access the database to perform Log On checks it is due to DS2000 Common Equipment failure. The DS2000 is unable to inform the switch that a user is logging on
b)
SYSTEM BUSY PLEASE RETRY
c)
LOGON INITIALISATION FAILURE it is due to the DS2000 Server Database being incomplete or corrupted
Likewise system failure can prevent logging off. If you see the message: a)
DATABASE NOT AVAILABLE it is because the terminal cannot access the DS2000 Server to effect logging off SYSTEM NOT AVAILABLE it is due to DS2000 Common Equipment failure and prevents auto Log Off
b)
2 -- 7
Amb_Chapter_2
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
If you want to close down the operator screen touch QUIT.
The HELP key is used when additional information about a particular function key is required. To obtain help, first touch the HELP key and then touch the key corresponding to the function for which you want help. Help information is displayed in the GWA of the screen. The table below shows all the possible states of the Data and Audio Connection Icons on the terminal:
Icon State Data Connection Data Ok SVR Lost The data connection from the OP to the DS2000 system is ok. The DS2000 SVR has been lost. It is still possible to perform certain functions on the OP, however database download and logon/logoff are not available when the system is in this state The DS2000 SNP has been lost the user will be presented with the logon screen; the OP will remain in this state until the system recovers. The audio connection from the OP to the DS2000 system is established ok. The audio connection from the OP to the DS2000 system is not yet established although there are audio connections available. The audio connection from the OP to the DS2000 system is not yet established there are no audio connections available. Description
SNP Lost/Unable to connect to. Audio Connection Audio Ok Audio Not connected No audio lines available.
2.2.2
New Log On
Some systems provide a takeover Log On facility. This can be used to log on at an existing in--use operator position without the need to disrupt facilities currently being serviced at that position. The current user is automatically logged off and you take over that position and its current active main screen. The NEW LOGON key is used to initiate the takeover and invokes the Log On screen in the GWA of the screen. Enter your User ID and Password as normal.
Amb_Chapter_2
2 -- 8
DS2000
2.3
OPERATOR MANUAL
The Greeting Screen

The Greeting screen is displayed when you have successfully logged on. Your name or ID is incorporated into the Greeting screen so that you can confirm that you are recognised by the system. Touch any part of the Greeting screen to display the User Type Selection screen, which gives you your initial set up choice for the task(s) allocated to you.
2.3.1
ID Accepted
Helpful Hint
In situations where someone else has tried to use your ID whilst you are logged on, or has tried to change their User ID to yours, the warning:
**** ID NOT SECURE ***
will be displayed prominently in the Greeting screen. Depending on local circumstances, you should change your ID and/or advise your System Manager.
2 -- 9
Amb_Chapter_2
VOLUME 1 START UP AND DS2000 LOG ON 2.3.2 User Type
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
A screen similar to the one below is displayed after you have touched the GREETING SCREEN.
The User Type last used with your User ID will be highlighted; if this is still satisfactory touch the RESUME key. If you need to change to another User Type, touch the appropriate key. After touching your choice the system advances to display the Functional Area Select screen.
Helpful Hint
Keys that are not valid for your User ID will be displayed in their quiescent (idle) colours. If this is the first time you have logged on using this User ID, the RESUME key will not be displayed. If the User Type last used is valid for the User ID you are now using, or if that User Type is no longer authorised for your User ID, the RESUME key will not be displayed. Refer to your Supervisor or System Manager.
Amb_Chapter_2
2 -- 10
DS2000
2.3.3
OPERATOR MANUAL Functional Area at Log On
A screen similar to the one below is displayed after you have made you choice on the previous User Type Selection screen.
The Functional Area(s) last used with your User Type, will be highlighted. If this arrangement is still satisfactory touch the DONE key. When you need to add or delete Functional Areas, touch the appropriate Functional Area key(s) before touching the DONE key. The Preselection menu will now be displayed. The Preselection Menu screen provides your initial options.
Helpful Hint
Functional Area keys that are not valid for your User Type will be displayed in their quiescent (idle) colours. If you touch QUIT your selection will be abandoned, you will be Logged Off and you are returned to the Log On screen. Refer to Chapter 8, Functional Areas, for further details of Functional Area keys.
2 -- 11
Amb_Chapter_2

DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Amb_Chapter_2
2 -- 12
Chapter 3 Initial Options
VOLUME 1 INITIAL OPTIONS Amendment record

DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Approved
06/11/07 07/12/07 20/12/07
Amb_Chapter_3
3 -- 2
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 INITIAL OPTIONS
Contents
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 The Preselections Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5 Clean Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6 Calibrate Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7 Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 Terminal Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 New Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 Update Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 Events/Fault Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
3 -- 3
Amb_Chapter_3

DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Amb_Chapter_3
3 -- 4
DS2000
3.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
The Preselections Menu

The Preselections menu provides access to the working screens, as well as to the Screen Cleaning and Calibration options. Some of the other keys displayed below may not be available to you. The items displayed are dependent on your User ID authorisation.
3 -- 5
Amb_Chapter_3
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
3.2
Clean Screen
By touching the VDU screen it will become dirty, and so it must be regularly cleaned. However, to avoid malfunction it should only be cleaned whilst the ultrasonic grid is deactivated or the monitor is switched off; the most convenient time to clean the screen is before you call up the main working screens. Touch the CLEAN SCRN key in the Preselections menu. You will see the message:
CLEAN SCREEN NOW
and will then have 14 seconds to clean the screen. Use an anti-static screen cleaning fluid applied to a soft cloth or cleaning pad. Do not put fluid directly onto the screen and do not over-moisten the cloth, excess cleaning fluid may interfere with the action of touch screen sensors located around the edge of the screen. As you clean the screen, the display counts down to show the number of seconds remaining before the screen becomes live again. When there are only three seconds left, the screen display changes to:
STOP CLEANING NOW 3 SECONDS TO GO
At the end of the screen-cleaning time the Preselections menu will reappear.
Amb_Chapter_3
3 -- 6
DS2000
3.3
OPERATOR MANUAL
Calibrate Screen
The Calibrate Screen facility is used to match the screen to your working position. It ensures that when you touch the screen, the facility or the directory line you see is the one you actually touch. Whilst sitting in your normal working position, touch the CALIB SCREEN key. When the display changes to the Calibration screen, touch the target on the screen as prompted without moving from your normal seated position.
You will be asked to touch the targets at different areas on the screen and then asked Does the cursor jump to your fingertip? To confirm this touch the grey area of the screen in several places. If the cursor follows your finger touch the YES key as shown in the following screen.
3 -- 7
Amb_Chapter_3
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
If Yes is chosen the calibration is done successfully. The new calibration data will be saved after a countdown of 30 seconds and then the Preselections menu will reappear. From now on, any keys and directory information lines that you touch will be matched to your personal requirements. Note: The calibration settings that have been saved are applicable only to the terminal at which you are sitting. You will need to recalibrate the screen when you sit at another terminal.
Helpful Hint
Before you can return to the Preselections menu, you must touch all three calibration targets. Touching the screen too far from a target causes problems with the calibration process. If you cannot escape or select the NO key due to calibration problems seek help from your Supervisor. Do not reset or switch off the PC.
Amb_Chapter_3
3 -- 8
DS2000
3.4
OPERATOR MANUAL
Main Screen
Touch the MAIN SCRN key to display the working screen.
3.5
Terminal Override
Touch the TERM OVRD key to take control of a console where an operator is already logged on. (This key is not accessible to all users and may not be displayed on all screens.) The message:
SELECT A TERMINAL POSITION
is displayed and the Terminal Select screen replaces the Preselections menu. To take control of a terminal, touch the appropriate terminal position key entry. The response you get is determined by the state of the terminal you select.
3.6
New Password
The NEW PASSWRD key is used when it is necessary to change your password. Touch this key to replace the Preselections screen with the Change Password screen. Enter the new password, and then re--enter the new password to validate as prompted. When the new password has been accepted, the Preselections menu is displayed again.
3.7
Update Database
Touch the UPDATE DBASE key to display the Update Database Menu screen. The database menu consists of a set of keys which give access to all the database files which you are permitted to edit.
3.8
Events/Fault Log
Touch the FAULT LOG key to display a log of specified events, alarms and system faults. The most recent report is entered at the top of the log. The file typically contains the latest 240 (24 x 10 pages) logged events.
3 -- 9
Amb_Chapter_3
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
3.9
Remote Access
Provided that the Intersite link is available for use, touch the REM ACC key to enable your terminal to become a virtual terminal at a selected remote site. When you touch the key, the Remote Access screen is displayed in the GWA and the message
CHOOSE A SITE TO ACCESS
is displayed in the message area. Refer to Section 8.13 for further details.
Amb_Chapter_3
3 -- 10
Chapter 4 Main Screen
VOLUME 1 MAIN SCREEN Amendment record

DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Approved
06/11/07 07/12/07 20/12/07
Amb_Chapter_4
4 -- 2
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 MAIN SCREEN
Contents
4.1 4.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Major Function Selection Keys - Typical Configuration . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Top Row Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Bottom Row Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 New Logon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4 4 4 4 --5 6 6 6 8
4 -- 3
Amb_Chapter_4

DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Amb_Chapter_4
4 -- 4
DS2000
4.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
Introduction
The Main Screen is accessed from the Preselections screen by touching the MAIN SCREEN key.
The default type of screen is dependent on your User Type. A typical screen is illustrated below.
The Main Screen is divided into groups and panels of Function keys, Operational keys and Queue lists. The exact position of function keys and panels displayed is dependent on the way the system has been configured at the factory. However, there will always be a Date and Time panel, Terminal Identity, a Message Area and the HELP and QUIT keys. The key layout displayed at your terminal may differ from the illustration because your User ID and terminal number ultimately govern the facilities and options displayed. The variations, under the control of the System Manager via the database setup, enable specific positions and/or operators to be designated. In nearly every case however, the major function selection keys listed on the following pages will be present on the operational Main Screen. These keys determine which of the other major function screens can be invoked to replace the screen you are currently using. The General Work Area displays Priority Telephone Pages, Telephone Directory, Dial Pad, etc. The areas at the side of the screen display Mobile Resources, incoming telephone and radio calls etc. These are covered in this manual under their relevant functions.
4 -- 5
Amb_Chapter_4
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
4.2
4.2.1
Major Function Selection Keys - Typical Configuration Top Row Function Keys
Most top row keys are explained later in the manual. The following five top row keys are used to switch between different types of operational screens: Touch the RADIO key to invoke the Radio pages screen in the General Work Area where up to 15 Radio Base Station and/or talkgroup keys can be displayed as default. Touch the MOBIL key to invoke the Mobile Resource screen where up to 51 mobile resource entries can be displayed simultaneously (three scrollable columns of 17 entries per column). Touch the TELE key to invoke the Active Telephone page screen in the General Work Area. Touch the INDIV key to invoke the Individual List screen in the General Work Area where an active point to point call can be displayed and/or a list of these calls waiting to be answered. Touch the BRWSR key to invoke the Browser screen in the General Work Area where Web--based functions can be accessed.
4.2.2
Bottom Row Function Keys

The Function Select tabs located at the bottom of the screen enable you to access specific groups of functions. When a Functions tab is touched, the tab is highlighted and the associated Function keys are displayed in the row below it.
The functions of the keys displayed are described in the appropriate sections of this manual. The keys illustrated here may not all be available to some classes of user. For those users who are excluded, the prohibited keys will either appear in muted colours or will be missing altogether.
The ENG (Engineer Functions) tab provides access to the Radio Configuration, Enable/Disable Terminal, Enable/Disable Channel, Enable/Disable Line, Route Tone and Alert Tone keys. The use of these keys is described in the appropriate sections of this manual.
Amb_Chapter_4
4 -- 6
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The SUPER (Supervisor Functions) tab provides access to the Mimic, Dynamic Operator, Telephone Eavesdrop, Terminal Eavesdrop and CCI Usage keys. The use of these keys is described in the appropriate sections of this manual.
The RADIO (Radio Functions) tab provides access to the Subs Search Talkgroup Setup, Radio Setup, Talkthrough, Combine Radio and Connect 2, keys. Use of these keys is described in the appropriate sections of this manual.
The LISTS (Airwave Lists) tab provides access to the Talkgroup, Emergency, Individual Callback, Status, and Group Callback list keys. The use of these keys is described in Chapter 6.
The LOGS tab provides access to the Last Message, Instant Replay, Individual History and Call Events keys. The use of these keys is described in the appropriate sections of this manual.
The TERM SETUP (Terminal Setup) tab provides access to the Clean Screen, Calibrate screen, Functional Area Setup, Area Revert, New Logon and Ancillary Function keys. The use of these keys is described in the appropriate sections of this manual.
The AUDIO SETUP tab provides access to the Normal Alarm, Urgent Alarm and Headset Volume keys. The use of these keys is described in the appropriate sections of this manual.
4 -- 7
Amb_Chapter_4
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
4.3
New Logon
The New Logon facility is provided to permit a replacement user to log on at an existing user position without the need to disrupt facilities being serviced at that position; the existing user does not have to log off, thus allowing the monitoring and control of radios etc. to continue without interruption. Touch the NEW LOGON key to display the standard Logon screen. Log on in the normal manner. After your User ID and Password have been validated by the system, the original user is automatically logged off, you are logged on, and the Main Screen is redisplayed with TAKE- OVER LOGON O.K in the message area. The original users particulars are stored in the database for reinstatement when that user next logs on. You will have the facilities and functions that were available to the previous user. You may need to recalibrate or clean the screen. Refer to Sections 3.3 and 3.2.
Helpful Hint
If you are already logged on at another terminal, the message

LOGON INVALID
will be displayed and the original user will remain logged on. When you have a User Type that is not valid for the User Type of the user relinquishing the terminal, the message
LOGON INVALID
is displayed and the logon attempt will fail. After three successive Takeover Logon failures, the terminal is disabled until re-enabled (by the Supervisor or other person with access to the E/D TERM key). Any uncompleted Logon or Logon failure is recorded in the Fault/System/ Event log.
Amb_Chapter_4
4 -- 8
Chapter 5 Telephone
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE Amendment Record

Issue A B Reason First draft incorporating Ver 9.11 functionality Amendments to first draft to incorporate Ver 131 functionality Third draft to incorporate changes post review First Issue First draft to incorporate V161 Second Issue to Incorporate Changes to reflect V161 Minor text changes Author SS SS Date 25.04.06 24.06.06
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Approved
C 1 1A 2
KJL JC TS SS
22.08.06 11.12.06 13.09.07 01/11/07
DSW
02/09/09
Amb_5.0_TELEPHONE
5 -- 2
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
Contents
5.1 Telephone Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5 5.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 5 5.1.2 Active Telephone Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 5 5.1.3 Number of Telephone Pages Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 7 5.1.4 Telephone Key Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 7 5.1.5 Telephone Keys with CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 8 5.1.6 Audible Incoming Call Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 8 5.2 Taking a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10 5.2.1 Integrated Telephone Call Queue View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 10 5.2.1.1 Tetra Call Summary Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.2.2 Integrated Tetra Queue View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 11 5.2.2.1 Telephone Call Summary Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.2.3 PABX Call Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 13 5.2.4 Answering a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 14 5.2.5 Microphone On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 15 5.2.6 Clearing a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 15 5.2.7 Holding a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 16 5.2.8 Releasing a Held Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 17 5.3 Emergency Call - CLI (Calling Line Identity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18 5.3.1 Enhanced CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 18 5.3.1.1 Calls Received from a Fixed Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.3.1.2 Displaying Caller Details for Fixed Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.3.1.3 Calls Received from a Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.3.1.4 Displaying Caller Details for Mobile Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.3.2 Last Caller Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 21 5.3.3 C&C Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 22 5.3.3.1 C&C Server Link (DS2000 Command and Control Interface) 5 -5.4 Making a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23 5.4.1 Telephone Page Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 23 5.4.1.1 Outgoing Line Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.4.2 Telephone Dial Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 25 5.4.2.1 Telephone Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.4.2.2 Tetra SDM Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.4.2.3 Tetra ISSI Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.4.3 Call in Progress Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 27 5.4.4 Redial -- Last Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 29 5.4.5 Dial In/Out List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 29 5.5 Telephone Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 30 5.5.1 Web--Based Telephone Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 30 5.5.1.1 View Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.5.1.2 Regional Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.5.1.3 Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.5.1.4 Pre--defined Category Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.5.1.5 Favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.5.1.6 Sensitivity Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.5.1.7 Telephone Number Results Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited
10 12
18 19 19 20 22 24 25 26 26
30 31 32 32 33 33 34
5 -- 3
Amb_5.0_TELEPHONE
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL 36 37 38
5.5.1.8 View/Edit/Delete New Favourite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.5.1.9 View/Delete Referenced Favourite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.5.1.10 New Favourite Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.6 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40 5.6.1 Normal Call Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 40 5.7 Transferring Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42 5.7.1 Transfer to Another Terminal (TRANS CALL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 42 5.7.2 PABX Transfer (TRANS PABX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 44 5.8 PABX Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 46 5.9 Telephone Eavesdrop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47 5.9.1 How to Use Tele Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 47 5.10 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 49 5.10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 49 5.10.2 Using the ACD Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 49 5.10.3 Wrap Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 50 5.11 Common Call Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 51 5.11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 51 5.11.2 Available Sites and Free Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 51 5.11.3 Handoff Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 52 5.11.3.1 Call Forcing Mode (No Local Operators Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.11.3.2 Parallel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 52 5.11.4 Incoming External Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 52 5.11.5 Incoming Handoff Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 52 5.11.6 Call Hand--off Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 53 5.11.7 Lines and Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 53 5.11.8 Call Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -- 53 5.11.8.1 Call Forcing Mode (No Local Operators Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.11.8.2 Parallel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -5.12 Conferencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 57
52
53 54
Amb_5.0_TELEPHONE
5 -- 4
DS2000
5.1
5.1.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
Telephone Page
Introduction
All telephone lines, both analogue and digital, connected to the DS2000 are controlled using telephone keys located on the operator screens. All telephone keys are displayed for use on the Priority Telephone Pages (PTPs) on the main screen. Each telephone page can accommodate up to 25 keys. The Active Telephone Page, when invoked, appears in the General Work Area (GWA) of the screen and can show up to ten telephone keys in two rows of five. It also displays three boxed areas. The large box on the left displays calls in Connect Groups (conference), the large box on the right displays calls on Hold, and the smaller central box displays an active open telephone line.
5.1.2
Active Telephone Page

The Active Telephone Page is displayed in the General Work Area of the Main Screen. It displays the users current call status, function keys and up to ten line keys from a specified Telephone Page.
d e
a)
Active Telephone Area This area displays a telephone line key being used by you. A line displayed in this area can be in the Dialling Out state, Monitored state or Active Call in Progress state.
5 -- 5
Amb_5.1_TELEPHONE PAGE
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
b)
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
In Connect Area This area displays the keys of telephone calls that you have put in Connect Group 1. A maximum of four calls can be displayed. On Hold Area This area displays the telephone calls you have placed on Hold. Up to four calls can be shown here, with the longest Held call displayed first. Touching a Held call removes Hold and moves it back into the Active Telephone Area. d) Telephone Function Keys Area This area displays up to seven telephone function keys. This is a factory-set option; typical configurations could be Hold, Tran Call, Dial Pad etc. Telephone Lines Area This area displays a duplication of the top two rows of telephone keys from the first telephone page. The page which is deemed the first page, and hence the page from which the ten keys are duplicated, is System Manager configurable. Telephone Pages The ACTIVE TELE tab invokes the Active Telephone page. Up to four TELEPHONE PAGE tabs can also be shown and, if the MORE PAGES tab is active, can be used to scroll through up to 12 telephone pages. The number of pages available to you is a System Manager configurable option.
c)
e)
f)
5 -- 6
DS2000
5.1.3
OPERATOR MANUAL Number of Telephone Pages Available
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
Although there are twelve Priority Telephone Pages available for selection using the tabs on the Main Screen, the database has capacity for 60 pages. The tabs above the telephone keys on each page are used for selecting other telephone pages (up to 12 from 60, set by the System Manager). Each of the telephone pages can contain a maximum of 25 keys. The middle four tabs directly select their indicated page. The right-hand MORE PAGES tab causes the tabs for the next four pages to be displayed. Touching MORE PAGES again displays the tabs for the next four, up to a maximum of 12 different pages. In the normal state, these tabs are typically darker than the current page tab which is brightened or a different colour. All keys and tabs are touch-sensitive.
5.1.4
Telephone Key Types

There are three types of telephone keys that can be configured on your system: a) Line Key This type of key is used to control a specific physical telephone line or DPNSS extension. The key flashes to indicate an incoming call, and when the call is answered it changes colour (configurable). Touching the key in the Active state clears the call and returns it to the quiescent condition. The key text usually identifies the associated line. This type of key is used to automatically dial a specific pre-programmed number. The system allocates the first available outgoing line (as set by System Manager configuration). The key cannot be used for incoming calls. Outgoing call status is displayed on the line allocated for the Hot Key call. The text of an active Hot Key call displays the attributes from the line key allocated for the call.
b) Hot Key
c) Combined Key
This type of key operates as a line key for incoming calls and as a Hot key for dialling, with the exception that for dialling the system only attempts to use the line or DPNSS extension associated with its line key operation.
5 -- 7
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE 5.1.5 Telephone Keys with CLI
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
All key colours, attributes and identification numbers can be configured by the System Manager.
When displayed, indicates an interface or line fault.
C1
Telephone key text. When CLI is displayed on the key the top area is used for Tele Line text. When CLI is disabled both areas are used with five characters in each.
XXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
F AUL T
C1 = Line is in Conn 1 C2 = Line is in Conn 2 CNNN = Terminal number of another operator when in a connect
D = Line Disabled M = Monitor state of MON/TALK function T = Line monitored with talking enabled H = Line on Hold m = Line monitored by other operator
CLI - This area displays the first 14 characters of the callers Id. The caller ID is retrieved from the EISEC service or the internal CLI facility. If this information is not available then the text zone displays the callers telephone number. When no CLI information is available, then NO CLI is displayed.
An operator position number is displayed on the key at other terminals when an operator has selected, or is monitoring, the line. FAULT is displayed on the top line when the system has detected an Input/Output card or line fault.
5.1.6
Audible Incoming Call Indications

Depending on the way that the system has been set up by your System Manager, an incoming telephone call will result in one of three indications: a) b) c) Urgent Alarm Normal Alarm No Audible Indication
When the system has been configured to present audible indications, these can be enabled or disabled at individual terminal positions using the following keys:
5 -- 8
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
Touch the NORM ALARM key to disable the Normal (non--urgent) audible indication at your position. The disabled status of the alarm is shown as a different key colour. Touch the key again to re-enable the alarm. Touch the URGT ALARM key to disable the Urgent audible indication at your position. The disabled status of the alarm is shown as a different key colour. Repeat the above process to re-enable the alarm. Note: If an alarm is disabled, all alarms associated with that specified group-set are disabled.
5 -- 9
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
5.2
Taking a Call
You are alerted to an incoming call by the flashing of the Line or Combined key. The Key icon in the appropriate call queue position also flashes. The flash rate can be configured to increase if the call is not answered within a preset time. The system may also have been configured to give an audible warning. These latter features can be changed by the System Manager.
5.2.1
Integrated Telephone Call Queue View

The Integrated Call Queue provides combined visibility of both the Telephone and Tetra radio call queues which you can switch between to take calls for either type. When the queue(s) for incoming Telephone calls are displayed a summary of the incoming Tetra calls is shown, and when the Tetra radio call queues are displayed a summary of the incoming Telephone call queue(s) is shown. You expand the view for the required queues by touching the current summary key that is displayed. When the Telephone queue is visible, incoming telephone calls are placed in the queue area at the right hand side of the main screen as shown below. This view shows the Telephone call queues together with a summary of the incoming Tetra calls key where there is one incoming Telephone call and no Tetra calls.
One Incoming Telephone call presented in queue position 1
Inc
Incoming Telephone Call Queue.
Incoming Telephone call queue position 8
Tetra Calls Summary Key.
You can take the Telephone call by either touching the TAKE CALL key, the telephone key in the call queue (at the top of the display), or that telephone key on its telephone page.
5.2.1.1
Tetra Call Summary Key

This key is displayed at the bottom of the queue and consolidates the four main incoming Tetra calls: -- Emergency, Individual Callback, Group Callback and Individual Calls onto one key and indicates the count of calls in each queue.
Amb_5.2_TAKING A CALL_8
5 -- 10
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
The background colour for each count in the Tetra summary key is derived from the actual Tetra keys when they are displayed. These colours are configured using the Tetra Colours database file. The key is updated dynamically and the counts are incremented or decremented as calls come in or are taken. The following screen shows an example with counts:
If you wish to take a Tetra call while in this view, then touching the summary key will change the view to the Tetra Call view as described in the following section.
5.2.2
Integrated Tetra Queue View

The following screen shows the Tetra call queues together with a summary of the incoming Telephone calls key. There are eight queue positions within the Incoming Telephone Call Queues Summary key with two unanswered incoming Telephone calls shown in the queues. An Emergency call and three Individual calls are indicated on their repective keys. As there are no calls outstanding for Individual Callback or Group Callback those keys are not invoked.
Incoming Telephone Call Inc Queues Summary
Tetra Call Keys only appear when that function is generated and unanswered.
5 -- 11
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The TAKE RADIO key will take Emergency calls, Individual Callback, Group Callback, and Individual calls, in this order if there are outstanding calls of more than one type. Calls can be taken out of order by selecting the specific Tetra key. When an unacknowledged Emergency request is outstanding, touching the Emergency key automatically invokes the Emergency List with that Emergency acknowledged. When an Individual Callback request is outstanding, touching the Individual Callback key initiates a call to the radio that requested the Individual Callback and automatically displays the Individual Calls page. When a Group Callback request is outstanding, touching the Group Callback key automatically invokes the radio page, and the talkgroup key associated with the radio that requested the Group Callback is changed to Selected. When an incoming Individual Call is awaiting an answer, touching the Individual Call key accepts the awaiting call and automatically displays the Individual Calls page.
5.2.2.1
Telephone Call Summary Key

This key is shown at the top of the display and is a summary of all the Telephone queues configured for your User Type. It displays each queue name and the number of unanswered calls in each of the queues. A queue entry is defined in the following fomat:
XXXXXXXXXXXX N
Where: S S XXXXXXXXXXXX is the twelve character queue name as defined by the System Manager N is the count of the number of calls in the queue and can be up to the number of lines in the system. It is displayed with a background colour of the highest priority call in that queue.
The maximum number of queues that can be displayed is eight. If there are fewer than eight queues then the queues are spaced proportionally, in the available space on the key. Two examples of a Telephone Call Summary key, one containing eight queues and one containing four queues is shown below.
The key is updated dynamically and the counts are incremented for a queue when a call comes in for that queue and decremented for a queue when a call is taken from that queue.
5 -- 12
DS2000
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
The background colour for the count may change, if the new line at the head of queue is of a different type to the previous one. If you wish to take a Telephone call while in this view, touching the summary key changes the view to the Telephone Call view and the TAKE RADIO key changes to become the TAKE CALL key as described in the section 5.2.1. The call can now be taken as normal.
5.2.3
Note:
PABX Call Capture

This facility is not available on all systems. PABX Call Capture provides an automatic answering facility for an incoming call, prior to the call being dealt with by an operator. The facility confirms to the caller that their call has been received and is in a queue, awaiting attention. The automatic answer plays a call progress tone to the caller; this may be in the form of a Ring Tone, Hold Tone, Music on Hold etc, depending on the database. The purpose of PABX Call Capture is to ensure that any incoming call is acknowledged within a specified time and retains its position within the take-call queue. If the facility was not incorporated in those systems having an automatic answering and queueing facility, any call not answered before the PABX ring time-out expired would be treated as a new call and placed at the back of the relevant incoming call queue. Auto-Answered calls appear, in all respects, as normal ringing in calls and therefore cannot be distinguished from them.
Note:
Those lines programmed for Auto-Answer are put into appropriate groups, with the corresponding ring time and call tone being determined in the database by the System Manager.
5 -- 13
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE 5.2.4 Answering a Call

To speak to the caller, either: a) b) c) Touch the TAKE CALL key
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Touch the appropriate key in the call queue (not configured on all systems) Touch the line key itself
The TAKE CALL key is the preferred option as it selects the highest-priority call that has been waiting longest. Methods b) and c) can be used to override the priority function. Some systems generate a message saying that the system has been overridden. This message is sent to designated terminals and may be entered in the system log. When the call is accepted (or cancelled by the caller) the Key icon is removed from the call queue area and the Line key stops flashing. If there are more calls waiting in that queue, the next highest priority call is displayed. The key of the answered call is displayed in the Active Telephone area of the Active Telephone Page. If the call is answered by another user, that users terminal position number is displayed at the bottom of the Line key. You can also answer a call when you are already speaking on another call. In this case you will be connected to the new caller and the first call will automatically be put on Hold.
Helpful Hint
If a radio channel/talkgroup is already selected, your ability to answer a telephone call depends on a value set in the database by the System Manager: a) If Simultaneous Access is enabled, you are able to answer the call and the radio/talkgroup remains selected. Your microphone is connected to the telephone line as normal; you can also speak on the radio channel by using the TX key or footswitch. If Simultaneous Access is disabled, and your value in the database is set for Radio Priority you cannot answer a telephone call and the radio channel and/or talkgroup remains selected.
b)
5 -- 14
DS2000
5.2.5
OPERATOR MANUAL Microphone On/Off
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
The initial system condition is Microphone On. When you do not want the caller to hear you, touch the MIC OFF key. The message
MICROPHONE OFF
is displayed in the message area. microphone.
Touch the key again to re-enable the
The MIC OFF key also prevents transmissions over the radio; it is not overridden by the footswitch or the TX key.
5.2.6
Clearing a Call
Clear the call by touching the Line key. On DPNSS extensions and on some PSTN lines, the key will revert to the idle state automatically if the caller clears first.
5 -- 15
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE 5.2.7 Holding a Line
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Touch the HOLD key to Hold a call. The key is displayed in the On Hold area of the Active Telephone Page, and an H will be displayed on the key. Up to four Held calls can be displayed in the box. If there are more than four Held calls, when Hold is released from an earlier call, the fifth call will be displayed. Up to eight calls can be put on hold at each terminal. The message
LINE HELD
is displayed in the message area and a comfort tone applied to the callers line whilst on Hold. Up to two comfort tones can be programmed to be used when a telephone caller is placed on hold. The Primary Comfort Tone is applied until the Primary Comfort Tone Duration has expired (system configurable), at which point the Secondary Comfort Tone (if configured) is applied. If no Secondary Comfort Tone is configured, the Primary Comfort Tone remains whilst the call is on hold. When the line is put on Hold, the relevant Page Selection key colour and flash rate change to indicate that the page has a Held call. If the relevant Page Selection key is not displayed, the MORE PAGES key changes to indicate that there is a hidden call on Hold. A Held line can be released by another user (system configurable). Lines placed on Hold by other users will display their terminal number on the key.
5 -- 16
DS2000
5.2.8
OPERATOR MANUAL Releasing a Held Line
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
Touch any Line key which shows an H in the border to retrieve the call on that line. It does not matter whether it was originally Held by another user or yourself (system configurable). The message LINE UNHELD is displayed in the message area and any comfort tone removed. You are now able to talk to the caller. Any telephone line you have open is automatically placed on Hold. If you are in an open Connect Group, the Held line is released and placed in the Connect Group.
Helpful Hint
The Hold facility will not be available and the message

INVALID OPERATION
is displayed if: a) b) c) You have more than eight calls on Hold You are in an open Connect Group. Releasing the Line key shows that the line is in a Connect Group.
The Release facility will not be available if: a) You are set to Radio Priority and have one or more radio channel/talkgroup selected. The message
INVALID OPERATION
is displayed. Section 6.6.) b)
Use the HOLD OVRD key. (See
The caller has cleared the call. The message

NO LINE TO UNHOLD
is displayed. A PSTN line reverts to its idle state. A PABX Line key may retain its H until you touch the key. If the caller has cleared the call, the line will be silent.
5 -- 17
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
5.3
Note:
Emergency Call - CLI (Calling Line Identity) Availability and screen position of the CLI data is dependent on your systems specification. Calls can be received that contain CLI information only ie. the callers telephone line number. The Emergency Call -- CLI facility on the system provides access to the BT database and the Cable and Wireless (C&W) database for the retrieval and display of either the caller telephone number and the name and address of the installed location for fixed lines, or the telephone number and the caller location for mobile calls. This function is based on facilities that have been made available to Emergency Authorities (Police, Fire, Ambulance, Coastguard, Mountain Rescue and Cave Rescue) and is known as Enhanced Information Service for Emergency Calls (EISEC). This function only relates to emergency calls (999/112). The retrieval of the address details is only carried out where the system received the information (CLI) in the call set--up messaging.
Note:
WXYZ data is used to determine whether the emergency call is from BT or C&W The solution provides daily logs which may be kept by the customer for a defined number of days for audit purposes. It should be noted that users of the service must have: Registered IP addresses for connection to the BT EISEC Access to the Government organisation network or Criminal Justice network for connection to the C&W ALSEC, or other network connectivity defined by C&W
5.3.1
Enhanced CLI
The procedures for taking/clearing an incoming call or using the hold functionality does not change with the addition of this functionality.
5.3.1.1
Calls Received from a Fixed Location

The originating telephone number is delivered, along with the W,X,Y,Z data, in the call set--up message when the call is presented to you. If analysis of the W and X data indicates that this is an Emergency call from BT or C&W, the system automatically interrogates the providers database to retrieve the caller details. You may accept a call before the caller details have been retrieved. The system functionality for this and other scenarios is as follows: Call accepted and caller details already retrieved -- the operator is presented with the WXYZ data, name, telephone number and address details as indicated in the next screen Call accepted but caller details still pending -- the operator is presented with the WXYZ data, telephone number and a message in the name area indicating Caller details pending. As soon as the response is received from the provider, the callers details are displayed Call accepted but caller details not available due to a fault -- the operator is presented with the WXYZ data, telephone number and a message in the name area indicating Caller details unavailable - Fault Call accepted and caller details not available as the call was not delivered from BT -the operator is presented with the WXYZ data, telephone number and a message in the name area indicating No caller details available
Amb_5.3_CALL LINE IDENTITY
5 -- 18
DS2000
5.3.1.2
OPERATOR MANUAL
Displaying Caller Details for Fixed Lines
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
For a call from a landline the DS2000 interrogates the providers database to retrieve the name and address. The display to the operators is of the following format: Call Origin; wx OAC yz (where wx are the call origin digits and yz the OAC identifier digits) Name Telephone Number HPPC Queue Name (only used when the DS2000 is connected to Siemens Hi Path Pro Centre) Address Line 1 Address Line 2 Address Line 3 Address Line 4 Address Line 5 Address Line 6 (For calls from C&W this value is always the Post Code)
5.3.1.3
Calls Received from a Mobile

As with a call from a fixed location the originating telephone number is delivered, along with the WXYZ data, in the call set--up message when the call is presented. If mobile lookup is enabled and the W data indicates that this is an Emergency call then the system automatically interrogates the providers database. It is expected that the mobile details take longer to retrieve than is the case with fixed lines.
5 -- 19
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The accuracy of location may be improved after a period of time. This service is subject to service providers and being enabled within factory configurable data. Call accepted and caller details already retrieved -- the operator is presented with the WXYZ data, operator name, telephone number data available in the retrieval state area. The estimated coordinates of the caller are displayed. Call accepted but call details still pending and initial searching message not yet received -- the operator is presented with the WXYZ data, telephone number and a message in the retreival state area indicating Caller details pending. As soon as the response is received from the provider, the callers details are displayed. Call accepted but call details still pending, initial searching message has been received -- the operator is presented with the WXYZ data and telephone number. The retrieval state field is Searching. Call accepted, caller details not available -- the operator is presented with the WXYZ data, telephone number and a message in the retrieval state area indicating No Caller details available. Call accepted Unsupported Mobile Licence Operator -- the operator is presented with the WXYZ data, telephone number and a message in the retrieval state area indicating Unsupported MLO.
5.3.1.4
Displaying Caller Details for Mobile Calls

The format of mobile location information is presented to the operator as follows: Call Origin; wx OAC yz (where wx are the call origin digits and yz the OAC identifier digits) Mobile Operators Name and retrieval state Name Telephone Number HPPC Queue Name (only used when the DS2000 is connected to Siemens Hi Path Pro Centre). Coordinates Coordinates system used and confidence level Address Line 1 of Pico cell antenna (if available and applicable) Address Line 2 of Pico cell antenna (if available and applicable) Address Line 3 of Pico cell antenna (if available and applicable) Address Line 4 of Pico cell antenna (if available and applicable) Address Line 5 of Pico cell antenna (if available and applicable)
Note:
Some Mobile operators operate pico cells whose coverage is limited to a building. For pico cells the address of the antenna is given. Address details displayed to the operator are in the format passed by the BT EISEC service. If no address details are received this area is left blank. For calls from Cable and Wireless these address lines are left blank.
5 -- 20
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
Coordinates System The coordinates are provided in three possible systems (OSGB36, IRG or WGS84). The system used will be defined by the data received from the BT EISEC service: OSGB36 for mainland Britain (BT and C&W) IRG for Irish Grid and Northern Ireland (BT) WGS84 for coordinate that cannot be displayed in OSGB36 or IRG (BT) NI for Northern Ireland (C&W) ROI for Republic of Ireland (C&W)
5.3.2
Last Caller Details

After a call is cleared, a last caller function key enables you to toggle the display between the last caller details (with the text displayed in a non active colour) and the default display. The initial state of the last caller function key is a factory configured option and can be configured either to allow the details to be automatically removed when the call is cleared, leaving the default display, or left displayed in the non active colour. The last caller details remain available until another emergency call is answered.
5 -- 21
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Helpful Hint
The following are indications of an external error: Router Errors Indicated as a network failure Line Failure No indication on the system. Notification is dependent on the service purchased from BT. BT Database Failure No indication on the system. Notification is dependent on the service purchased from BT.
5.3.3
5.3.3.1
C&C Links
C&C Server Link (DS2000 Command and Control Interface)
Where a C&C Server Link is provided via a DS2000 Command and Control Interface (DCCI), the Caller Details and Operator Identity can be sent to the C&C Server once all the information has been assimilated and the incoming call has been accepted on the ICCS. If the call is accepted while the request for name and address information is still outstanding, the message is held back until the response has been received from BT and the name and address details have been added. If the Caller Details arrive before the call is answered and it is configured to do so, the Caller Details will be sent to the C&C Server without the Operator Identity then, once the call is accepted, with the Operator Identity. For mobile calls there may be a series of details sent to the C&C via the DCCI. For example Searching followed by data available. For mobile calls, if the Caller Details arrive after the caller has hung up, the details will be forwarded to the C&C with the operator ID set to undefined.
5 -- 22
DS2000
5.4
5.4.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
Making a Call
Telephone Page Tabs
The system displays up to twelve pages of telephone tabs; how they are implemented is determined by the System Manager. There are up to 25 Line keys per standard page. The middle four tabs select adjacent pages directly; touching the MORE PAGES tab displays tabs for a further group of four adjacent pages (e.g., five to eight). Touching this tab again displays the keys for the next four pages. A further touch returns the display to the first four. In their idle state, the tabs are usually pale green. The tab relating to the current page is highlighted or grey. Typically, there are five possible ways to make an outgoing telephone call: a) Touch a Hot key or Combined key. When a Hot key is touched, the first available line is seized and the preset number is dialled. The seized line is displayed in the Active state. When a Combined key is touched, the line associated with it is seized and the preset number associated with the key is dialled. b) c) d) e) Use the Telephone Dial Pad. Use the Last Number Redial facility. Select an entry in the Telephone Directory. When the DS2000 is being used in conjunction with a Command & Control system (C&C), calls can be made from the C&C when the DS2000 is displaying a priority telephone page. You can specify the line to be used for the call, or you can let the system seize the first available line.
Methods b), c) and d) seize the first available line in the same manner as that described for Hot keys. When an outgoing call is made by another user, the appropriate Line key displays that users terminal position number.
Helpful Hint
If you have a radio channel selected, you may not be permitted to dial unless Simultaneous Access is enabled in the database. If it is not, the message
INVALID OPERATION
is displayed. The radio channel(s)/talkgroup(s) will remain selected.
5 -- 23
Amb_5.4_MAKING A CALL
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
5.4.1.1 Outgoing Line Selection
Normally, the first available line is automatically selected. Note:
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
To specify a particular line to be used, its Line key should be touched before dialling.
Helpful Hint
When specifying a particular line, the selected Line key must be in the idle state when touched. If, between touching a Line key and dialling (by methods b), c), d) or e) described previously above), the line is seized by another user or there is an incoming call on that line, your call will fail and the message
DIALLING FAILED - LINE UNAVAILABLE
is displayed (When you have made the outgoing call via the C&C system, this message is slightly different). The line selection is cancelled by any of the following actions: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) Dialling out on another line Accepting an incoming call Releasing a Held call/Monitoring a call Accepting a call transfer Selecting a radio channel or talkgroup Accepting or initiating an intercom call Opening a connect group Performing eavesdrop on another operator Performing mimic on another operator
When you select a PABX line to dial an outside line, you must include the prefix number (usually nine). The DS2000 system uses the prefix as confirmation that an outside line is actually wanted, and that the call is not a misdialled PABX number. When a PSTN line is selected no prefix number is normally required.
5 -- 24
DS2000
5.4.2
OPERATOR MANUAL Telephone Dial Pad
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
The Dial Pad is used to enter either a telephone number or an Individual Short Subscriber Identity (ISSI) in the following modes: S S S S S Initial telephone call setup Use of PABX Recall facility Call in Progress Enter an address for a Short Data Message (SDM) or Predefined SDM (PDFSDM) Call a subscriber
Operation of the Dial Pad is the same as a normal telephone dial pad with the addition of
p(validate), CIP PAD, DIAL TEL, SDM ISSI, PREDEF SDM and DIAL ISSI keys.
Touch the DIAL PAD key to display the telephone Dial Pad screen. Enter the telephone number to be dialled by touching the appropriate figures on the keypad. The numbers are entered in the display area situated above the keys. External calls may have to be preceded by a nine. In situations when a PSTN line is seized external calls prefixed with a nine will have the nine automatically dropped by the DS2000. Use the BACKSPACE key to delete the most recently entered digit.
Use the ERASE key to delete all the digits entered
Use the Dial Pad RECALL key to access the call routing facilities of the PABX. Please refer to your PABX instructions for use of this key. It can often be used to pick up a failed (returned) PABX Transfer call.
5.4.2.1
Telephone Dialling
Touch the DIAL TEL key to dial out the numbers. The system allocated line will be displayed in the Active Telephone area, and the dialled number is displayed in the Last Number area at the top right of the screen. You will hear a ringing tone. At all other terminal positions which display this line, the Line key will show your terminal position number. When the called party answers, the message area displays
CALL ANSWERED
However, if no line is available,

appears in the message area.
5 -- 25
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
5.4.2.2 Tetra SDM Dialling
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
You are able to initiate two types of SDM message to the subscriber: S SDM ISSI S PREDEF SDM After the ISSI address has been entered, touch the SDM ISSI key to invoke the SDM screen. The ISSI is automatically entered in the ISSI address box of the SDM screen. Text can be entered in the message area. After the ISSI address has been entered, touch the PREDEF SDM key to invoke the PREDEF SDM list screen. Select the appropriate predefined message from the list and touch the USE TEXT key. The SDM screen is invoked with the text automatically inserted and the ISSI automatically entered in the ISSI address box of the SDM screen. Note: A blank SDM screen is displayed when your first log on and select the SDM Key followed by NEW SDM. or when you carry out an initial Sub Search, select a radio terminal from the search results, and then the NEW SDM key. Once an SDM has been sent the blank SDM screen will not be displayed again; as the text from the previous SDM remains populated within the text field.
5.4.2.3
Tetra ISSI Dialling

Touch the DIAL ISSI key to dial out using an ISSI number to initiate an individual call.
The VALIDATE ISSI key enables you to have the ISSI that is entered in the dial pad window validated before the system uses the address. If the subscriber address is ambiguous, the Validate Subscriber to Call search screen is automatically invoked with all the destination possibilities. You can then either select an entry from the list or perform a subscriber search. If no possibilities are found the search screen is invoked but no results are displayed. A search can be performed using the wild card ( * ), or the CANCEL key used to return to the Dial Pad.
5 -- 26
DS2000
5.4.3
OPERATOR MANUAL Call in Progress Dialling
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
When calling Touch Tone services you need to dial extra digits after the call has been answered. Touch the CIP PAD key to invoke the CIP numeric key pad which has the digits 0 -9, * and # as with a standard telephone keypad. When an operator selects a numeric key a fixed duration tone is transmitted to the open phone line. The tone is also fed back to the headset. (On some systems a P may be displayed in front of the new digits to inform the system that the numbers following are to be sent down the currently open line.)
5 -- 27
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
Telephone Operations
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Helpful Hint
Dialling The message

is displayed when no line can be seized for dialling. Dependent on the users configuration, if a radio channel is selected and the dial command is given, the message
INVALID OPERATION
is displayed. To proceed, the radio(s)/talkgroup(s) must be put into the Monitor state. If no digits are entered and the DIAL key is touched, the message
INVALID REQUEST - NO DIGITS TO DIAL
is displayed and no dialling is attempted. Note: Operator microphone pickup may produce an erroneous
CALL ANSWERED
message. Not talking into the operator microphone whilst being connected will help prevent this. Transferring a call The message
INVALID OPERATION
is displayed if no open line is available and the RECALL key is used. If the current line is not a PABX line and the RECALL key is used the message is displayed and no further action is taken. Many PABXs have a recall timeout. In these instances, when transferring a call the RECALL key is used after keying the number to which the call is to be transferred and just before the DIAL key. Call in Progress Dialling The message is displayed if a line is not currently open and the CIP key is selected.
CIP DIAL INVALID, NO OPEN LINE RECALL UNAVAILABLE ON THIS LINE
5 -- 28
DS2000
5.4.4
OPERATOR MANUAL Redial - Last Numbers
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
The last ten telephone numbers that you have dialled using the Dial Pad, regardless of whether they were answered or not, are displayed at the top right of the Main Screen as a dropdown list when you touch the REDIAL key. When you want to redial a number, touch the required dropdown list entry. The screen changes to the Dial Pad with the number from the dropdown list populating its display. Now touch the DIAL key. If you have a line already open, it is put on Hold automatically.
Helpful Hint
If you need to change the number slightly, see Telephone Dial Pad (Section 5.4.2) for use of the Dial Pad. If you have a radio channel/talkgroup selected, you may not be permitted to dial unless Simultaneous Access is enabled in the database. If it is not, the message
INVALID OPERATION
is displayed. The radio channel(s)/talkgroup(s) remain selected.
5.4.5
Note:
Dial In/Out List

Availability of this functionality is dependent on your systems specification. The system can be factory configured to utilise the In List function, the Out List function, both, or neither. The Out List is a dropdown menu containing up to the last ten (configurable) outgoing calls made from your terminal. The In List is a dropdown menu containing up to the last ten (configurable) telephone calls answered at your terminal. The lists are typically configured to be found at the top right of the Main Screen next to the Last Number Redial area of the screen. When an entry from a list is selected the Dial Pad is automatically displayed with the selected number populating the Dial Pad display.
5 -- 29
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
5.5
Note:
Telephone Directory
Availability of this function is dependent on your systems specification.
5.5.1
Web- Based Telephone Directory The web--based telephone directory is accessed through the Browser function. The standard directory database, which can store up to 10,000 telephone records, is hosted on the database server at each site. Telephone directory format is based on the existing DS2000 internal directory with additional features. The directory provides the following (configurable) features: 1. Favourites functionality -- allows you to add your own telephone number records and/or existing records to your personal favourite number list. Sensitivity -- allows access to specific telephone number records to be restricted to specific users. Regional partitioning -- allows telephone number records to be partitioned into regions so that records are only displayed for the current region.
2.
3.
Note:
There are two web-based directory options available within the Browser, View Directory and Maintain Directory (for editing). Within the View Directory option there is facility to add and maintain personal favourites as detailed in the Add New Favourites section. The second option is the Maintain Directory option which is a System Manager function and is detailed in Volume Two of this manual.
5.5.1.1
View Directory
Touching the BROWSER key replaces the General Work Area with a blank browser page displaying the keys which represent the web--based pages available on your system.
Note:
The keys (and therefore web access) displayed on your system are configurable by the System Manager. An example is displayed below.
Touch the TEL DIR key to display the web--based telephone directory. (Note: This key may be labelled differently or located elsewhere on your system.)
Amb_5.5_TELEPHONE DIRECTORIES
5 -- 30
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
The initial page contains a Region List field with drop down menu, a Search input field, a Name Search key, Number Search key, an Add New Favourite key, and a set of pre--defined categories keys. Searches can be made using the following: S S S Pre--defined categories Names Numbers
5.5.1.2
Regional Partitioning
This functionality is optional and the Region label and list box are only available if this function is enabled. Regional partitioning allows regions to be added to each telephone number record. The telephone directory is set to a region and only shows records that are in that region or that are national records (those with no region set). The telephone directorys region is set by selecting a region from the drop down list. On startup the region defaults to the region previously used on the Operator Position. Privileged users can configure Regions by using the Add Region page or Update Region page available in the Maintenance view of the telephone directory.
5 -- 31
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
5.5.1.3 Searching
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
When a search string is entered in the Search input field and the NAME SEARCH button or the NUMBER SEARCH button is touched the Telephone Number Results page is displayed. Searching by Name or Number returns the first 100 records that match the search criteria. Wildcard searches can be performed using the * character. The wildcard can be placed anywhere in the search string and used more than once. A search string of *d*m* could result in the following name matches; Darren Trentham, Derek Smith, and Dan Pardom. A search string of d*m only matches Darren Trentham and Dan Pardom. Derek Smith does not match as it ends in mith not m.
5.5.1.4
Pre-defined Category Search

Touching any category key invokes the Telephone Number Result page displaying all the records for that category. For each row in the table, the Telephone Number, Category, Name, and Location details are displayed. Records are displayed in order of priority. If a number of entries have the same priority those entries are ordered alphabetically. The priority of a category is configured when editing or adding it.
5 -- 32
DS2000
5.5.1.5
OPERATOR MANUAL
Favourites
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
The Favourites functionality is optional. The Add New Favourite and Favourites category key is only displayed if this functionality is enabled. Favourites data is associated with you and the Favourites functionality allows you to create a personal list of telephone number records. You can create new telephone number records in your favourites list as well as adding references to existing telephone directory records. The Add New Favourite key is used to invoke the New Favourite Page, which allows you to add new directory records to your favourites list. Telephone number records added here are only available to you. The Favourites category key is used to invoke the Telephone Number Results Page which shows all telephone numbers in your favourite list and allows records to be viewed, edited or deleted. The Favourites category key priority can be configured using the Add Category page or Update Category page available in the Maintenance view of the telephone directory.
5.5.1.6
Sensitivity Classification
The Sensitivity functionality is optional. It provides the ability to limit access to telephone numbers in specific categories to specific users, thus preventing certain operators from viewing sensitive numbers. Each operator is given an access number from 1 to 10. A corresponding sensitivity number, from 1 to 10, is applied to each telephone directory category. Records are only shown where the operators access number is greater than or equal to the categorys sensitivity number, i.e., a user with access level 3 can see all records in categories with sensitivity classification 1, 2 and 3. The operators access number is configured against their job role, and the telephone directory category sensitivity is configured in the Add category and Update category pages in the Maintenance view of the application. Category keys are not shown to you if you do not have access.
5 -- 33
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
5.5.1.7 Telephone Number Results Screen
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
This page displays the results of a search or all records for a category.
Display of records resulting from a search is limited to the first 100 records. Display of records for a category displays all records for that category.
<-- BACK
Touching the <- BACK key returns you to the previous screen. -
Touching the telephone icon to the left of each result displays the Dial Pad with the telephone number of that record populating the number field. Touch the DIAL TEL key on the Dial Pad to call the displayed number. This two--phase process is provided to ensure that numbers are not accidentally dialled from the browser presentation.
5 -- 34
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
DETAILS
Touching the DETAILS key displays the Telephone Number Details Page which contains the full details for the selected record.
Touching the telephone icon displays the Dial Pad with the telephone number populating the number field. Touch the DIAL TEL key on the Dial Pad to call the displayed number.
NEW SEARCH
Touching the NEW SEARCH key returns you to the initial search screen.
The ADD TO FAVOURITES key is optional and is only available if this function is enabled on your system.
ADD TO FAVOURITES
Touching the ADD TO FAVOURITES key adds the currently viewed record to your list of favourite numbers in the database. Prior to any change to the database, you are prompted to confirm the update via a OK/Cancel message box. If CANCEL is selected the update is aborted and the focus is returned to the existing page. If OK is selected the change is written to the database and the previous page is displayed. When initiating this page from a list of favourites, the page will be displayed in the following specific modes: View/Edit/Delete, New Favourite and View/Delete Referenced Favourite. 5 -- 35
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
5.5.1.8 View/Edit/Delete New Favourite
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
This page is used to display and edit all stored information for a favourite telephone number entry that has been added by you.
This page is the same as the Telephone Number Editable Details page with the exception that the category field is defaulted to Favourite and is not editable. The Region field is also not displayed, as regional functionality is not applicable to a users favourite record. NUMBER LIST Touching the NUMBER LIST key invokes the Number List page which allows you to modify five phone numbers and their associated alias (as detailed in Vol 2 Chapter 1 Section 7)
5 -- 36
DS2000
5.5.1.9
OPERATOR MANUAL
View/Delete Referenced Favourite
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
This page is used to display all stored information for a referenced favourite telephone number entry that has been added to a users favourite list. DELETE RECORD Touching the DELETE RECORD key removes the users reference to the record from the database.
5 -- 37
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
5.5.1.10 New Favourite Page
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
This page is optional and is only displayed if favourites functionality is enabled on your system. The New favourite page is used to add a new personal telephone number record to the database. A Personal number record can only be seen by the user that added it via their favourites.
The New Favourite page displays the following fields: Category, Title, Name, Phone (number), Address (three lines), Postcode and two comment fields. There are three keys, BACK, SAVE CHANGES and NUMBER LIST.. All fields on this page can be edited except the Category field which will be disabled and shows the favourite category. The Phone field is edited via the Number List key. <-- BACK Touching the <- BACK key returns you to the previous screen. -
SAVE CHANGES
Touching the SAVE CHANGES key saves the change to the database.
NUMBER LIST
Touching the NUMBER LIST key invokes the Number List page which allows you to modify five phone numbers and associated alias (as detailed in Vol 2 Chapter 1 Section 7)
Prior to any change to the database, yuo are prompted to confirm the update via an OK/Cancel message box. If Cancel is selected the update is aborted and the focus is
5 -- 38
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
returned to the existing page; if OK is selected the change is written to the database and the previous page is displayed.
Helpful Hint
If the System Manager has made changes to the Telephone Directory while you have been viewing it, those changes are not displayed until you close the Browser and re--open it. Alternatively, touching the Tilda (~) key on the keyboard refreshes the display while in Normal view. If the web server is out of action when you press the TEL DIR key, the standard browser Page Cannot be displayed page is displayed. The priority field and sensitivity field (if enabled) on the Add and Update categories page are mandatory. Attempting to save without populating these fields invokes a warning message in red next to the field. When attempting to invoke the keyboard, if the external keyboard application is not found the message,
KEYBOARD APPLICATION NOT FOUND
is displayed in the message bar. If data cannot be displayed in the Telephone Directory application because the database is unavailable, an error message appears on the screen.
5 -- 39
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
5.6
5.6.1
Monitoring
Normal Call Monitoring
Some systems inhibit the monitoring of private lines. In these instances facilities are provided which operate differently from these described below. All users can monitor a line but your USER ID/Password characteristics will determine whether you have the facility to monitor a telephone line open at another users position and to converse with the caller. However, you will be able to converse with the user owning the call. Open lines are identifed by the display of the users terminal position number in the lower border of the Line key.
To monitor the call, touch the Line key; M will appear in its lower border. The message
TELEPHONE MONITOR ACTIVE
is displayed in the message area. (If your system supports the microphone on/off functionality, the MIC OFF key will be automatically operated. If so, touch the MIC OFF key to talk to the other operator.)
Touch the MON/TALK key to talk to the caller and the other operator. The MON/TALK key changes to its active state. M is replaced on the Line key by T. The message
TELEPHONE MONITOR TALK ACTIVE
is displayed in the message area. To leave the Monitor/Talk mode, touch the Line key again. The message
TELEPHONE MONITOR CANCELLED
is displayed in the message area. On PSTN and DPNSS lines, the Monitor/Talk mode may be cancelled automatically if the caller clears the line. On analogue PABX lines the Monitor/Talk mode has to be cancelled manually. If the owning user clears from the call whilst it is being monitored, the call will be taken over by the user who has been monitoring the call the longest.
Amb_5.6_MONITORING
5 -- 40
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
Helpful Hint
You can only monitor one line at a time. If you are already monitoring a line, it will be demonitored when you monitor another line. If you have an open telephone call, it is automatically put on Hold. If you have a current intercom call, it will be cleared. If local recorder replay is active, it is automatically stopped. You will not be able to use this facility if you have selected a radio channel or talkgroup and Simultaneous Access is not enabled. Attempting to monitor a telephone call which already has the permitted maximum number of users monitoring a line (usually five) results in the message
INVALID OPERATION
being displayed in the message area. Attempting to monitor a telephone call whilst in an Indivdual Call is not permitted, and the message
INDIVIDUAL CALL IN PROGRESS
is displayed in the message area. The System Manager may have configured the system to put you in Talk mode as soon as you touch the Line key to start monitoring. In this case, the MON/TALK key is used to toggle between modes.
5 -- 41
Amb_5.6_MONITORING
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
5.7
Transferring Calls
Important: This chapter reflects standard call transferring from one terminal to another. If your system supports Group Partitioning functionality, the following procedures will differ slightly and this chapter should be read in conjunction with Sections 8.16 and 8.17. Calls can be transferred to other terminals by using the TRANS CALL key. PABX calls can be tranferred to other PABX extensions by using the TRANS PABX key. Both these tranfers can be made as either supervised (under operator control) or unsupervised (automatic) transfers.
5.7.1
Transfer to Another Terminal (TRANS CALL)

Supervised Transfer a) Touch the TRANS CALL key to transfer an open telephone call (PSTN or PABX) to another terminal. The Terminal Select screen is displayed and the call is automatically put on Hold. b) Touch the required Terminal key. The TRANS CALL keys on your screen and at the selected terminal now flash, and your screen reverts to the previous display.
When the selected terminal user touches the TRANS CALL key, the message
SUPERVISED TRANSFER IN PROGRESS
is displayed in the message area of both terminals. The TRANS CALL keys continue to flash and because the call is already on Hold, you can advise the other terminal user that there is a call waiting without the caller hearing you. The Held call can be taken by the other user, or retrieved by you if the other user is busy. The first one to touch the TRANS CALL key takes the call. Both TRANS CALL keys stop flashing. Unsupervised Transfer a) Touch the TRANS CALL key to transfer the call to another terminal user. The Terminal Select screen is displayed and the call is put on Hold. b) Touch one of the Terminal keys to transfer the call. The TRANS CALL key on your screen and at the selected terminal now flash and your screen reverts to the previous display. c) Touch the TRANS CALL key again -- before the other user accepts the transfer. Your key stops flashing and the call is automatically transferred to the other user when they touch their own TRANS CALL key.
Amb_5.7_TRANSFERRING CALLS
5 -- 42
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Accepting a Call from Another Terminal
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
The TRANS CALL key flashes when another user transfers a call to you. When you touch the key, you will see one of two messages in the message area, either
SUPERVISED TRANSFER IN PROGRESS
or
CALL UNHELD
a)
The first message indicates that you are connected to the transferring operator -- your TRANS CALL key will continue to flash. After communicating with the transferring operator, if you decide to take the call, touch the TRANS CALL key again. It will stop flashing and you will be connected to the caller. The second message indicates that you are directly connected to the caller. Your TRANS CALL key stops flashing.
b)
Helpful Hint
If, when you try to take the call, the message

NO CALL TO UNHOLD
is displayed, the caller has cleared down while on Hold, or has been taken over by another operator. If the operator you are transferring to is busy, transfer is not possible and
INVALID OPERATION
or
TERMINAL ACCESS NOT AVAILABLE
is displayed in the message area.
5 -- 43
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE 5.7.2

Note: Note:
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
PABX Transfer (TRANS PABX)

PABX Transfer is not supported by Group Partioning. The following procedure for a PABX Transfer may differ depending on your PABX eqiupment.
This function enables an incoming PABX call to be transferred to another PABX extension. Because the transfer takes place in the PABX, and not in the DS2000, it cannot be used to transfer direct PSTN lines. PABX Transfer is a two-stage process. Calls can be transferred using the Dial Pad, Telephone Directory or Hot keys. It is important not to touch the DIAL key or Hot key too early in the sequence.
The First Stage Using the Dial Pad: a) Touch DIAL PAD and enter the required PABX extension. Do not touch Dial yet. b) Touch TRANS PABX, the line will automatically be Held, and
TRANSFER PABX IN PROGRESS
is displayed in the message area. c) Touch the DIAL key on the Dial Pad.
Using the Telephone Directory: a) Touch a Telephone Directory entry. b) c) Touch TRANS PABX. Touch the DIAL key on Telephone Directory page.
Using a Hot Key or Combined Key: a) Select the relevant Telephone page. b) c) Touch the Hot Key. Touch TRANS PABX.
The number will be dialled into the PABX and you will hear the ringing tone.
The Second Stage - Supervised Transfer When the extension is answered, you can speak to the user before transferring the call. Touch the LINE key to connect the incoming call to the extension and clear yourself from the call.
5 -- 44
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The Second Stage - Unsupervised Transfer When you hear the ringing tone touch TRAN PABX again. The message
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER IN PROGRESS
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
will be displayed in the message area and AX (Automatic Transfer) will be displayed on the Line key. The TRAN PABX key is now free for use with other calls. When the called extension answers, the system will reroute the call independently of you and the Line key will revert to the Inactive state. For returned or failed automatic transfers, or if there is no reply after a specified delay, XH (PABX transfer on Hold) will be displayed on the key and the key will return to its Active state. Touch the Line key to release Hold and return to the call to speak to the caller.
Helpful Hint
For Supervised Transfers, if you get a busy or Number Unobtainable (NU) tone, use the standard PABX facilities (e.g., the RECALL key followed by * 1 then Dial Tel on the Dial Pad) to return to the call to advise the caller, and select another destination for the call if required. Refer to your PABX manual for details. On some lines, an Unsupervised Transfer to an already busy line will lose the caller. Always ensure that the ringing tone is heard before touching a Transfer key the second time. If you try to use this facility on a PSTN line, or some special PABX lines, the message
RECALL UNAVAILABLE ON THIS LINE
is displayed. The restrictions on transferring calls are described in your PABX manual. With the Unsupervised Transfer methods you cannot talk to the other user or retrieve the call. Call Transfer will be cleared if you try to monitor a line before the call has been connected. Call Transfer will be cleared if you try to make an outgoing call before the transfer has been connected. Many PABX lines detect when a call has been answered by recognising an interruption of the ringing tone. Sidetone from the user microphone can have the same effect -- try to avoid talking whilst the call is ringing out.
5 -- 45
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
5.8
Note:
PABX Key
Availability and screen position of the PABX key is dependent on your systems specification. The Terminal PABX key flashes when an incoming call is received on the line nominated specifically as your terminal extension. Touching the key when it flashes accepts the call. Incoming calls directed specifically to the terminal via this line (i.e., appearing on this key) need not go into the telephone queue. When an idle PABX key is touched, the General Work Area changes to display the Dial Pad so that you can dial out via the PABX. In some installations if the radio page is being displayed, the replacement display may be the telephone page instead of the key pad. (The telephone page provides direct access to Hot keys). The page displayed at your terminal may be different from that at another terminal, as it is dependent on the database entries set by the System Manager.
Helpful Hint
Incoming calls directed to a terminal via an exclusive line, i.e., dedicated to only a terminal PABX key, do not usually go into the telephone queue. (The telephone queue display is dependent on settings made in the User Configuration file; some users may not see the key in the queue and others may.)
Amb_5.8_PABX KEY
5 -- 46
DS2000
5.9
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
Telephone Eavesdrop
Availability and screen position of the TELE EAVES key is dependent on your systems specification.
Important: This chapter reflects standard telephone eavesdrop functionality. If your system supports Group Partitioning functionality the following procedures will differ and this chapter should be read in conjunction with Sections 8.16 and 8.17. During Telephone Eavesdrop you hear the other operators earpiece audio and microphone audio. The operator being eavesdropped will not normally know that you are listening unless they have the appropriate Terminal Select screen to view. Note: A live microphone and a visible indication of monitoring (an M on the Line key) are database configurable, but these latter features for Telephone Eavesdrop are set at the time of installation to suit the system specification, and cannot be changed by the System Manager.
5.9.1
How to Use Tele Eaves

You cannot telephone eavesdrop more than one terminal at a time. On activation of telephone eavesdropping your microphone is automatically muted. If you wish to join the call, touching the MIC OFF key returns your microphone to the live state.
Touch the TELE EAVES key to listen to the audio of an operator on a telephone call at another terminal. The terminal select screen is now displayed and the message
appears in the message area. Up to 25 terminals can be displayed on a page; use the PREV PAGE or the NEXT PAGE keys to view other pages. Only terminals that have active calls can be telephone eavesdropped. When a terminal entry from the list is touched, the message
EAVESDROP IN PROGRESS
is displayed in the message area. The EAVES key becomes available. Touch the EAVES key to begin eavesdropping. When you activate telephone eavesdrop, your calls in progress are put on Hold and you will hear a mix of the other operators headset and microphone audio. Cancel Telephone eavesdrop by touching the CANCEL key; you will see the message
EAVESDROP CANCELLED
displayed in the message area.
The Tele Eaves facility can also be cancelled by touching the QUIT key.
5 -- 47
Amb_5.9_TELE EAVESDROP
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Helpful Hint
Eavesdrop is automatically cancelled by the system when: a) b) c) The call is terminated by either party in the call. The call is placed on Hold. A telephone or individual call is taken by the eavesdropper (This is dependent on each users default telephone or radio priority). The eavesdropping operator selects a radio channel or talkgroup (This is dependent on each users default telephone or radio priority). An internal intercom call is answered by the eavesdropper.
d)
e)
Eavesdropping on an eavesdropper is allowed by the system. The maximum number of users in one eavesdrop is typically limited to five -- refer to the System Manager for details.
Amb_5.9_TELE EAVESDROP
5 -- 48
DS2000
5.10
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Availability and screen position of the ACD key is dependent on your systems specification.
5.10.1
Introduction
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) removes the need for continually having to touch the TAKE CALL key when there is a heavy incoming call load. Calls are automatically distributed amongst the logged on terminals. ACD presents a fresh telephone call to you as soon as the current call has been cleared. However, whilst in the ACD mode of operation, if there are calls waiting to be answered you are not able to access the internal intercom, tannoy etc., or to respond to radio (except during Wrap Up time, see below). The ACD key is therefore provided on the Main Screen to temporarily suspend Automatic Call Distribution, and allow access to other facilities even though calls may still be coming in.
Note:
The ACD key may not be displayed to all User Types. When the key is not displayed, the function is not normally made active. The System Managers database entries define which User Types are configured for ACD and which are not. Similarly the System Manager will have specified a small delay between clearing and presentation of calls - this is called Wrap Up time.
5.10.2
Using the ACD Key

During the interval between calls (Wrap Up) you can touch the ACD key to a provide a temporary suspension of Automatic Call Distribution at your terminal. When ACD is suspended you can respond to radio, door phones, intercom etc., or you can take calls directly from any key in the call queue, or take a call direct from a key on the displayed telephone page. If you do need to answer a call whilst in the suspended state and want to ensure that you take the highest priority call first, use the TAKE CALL key. To remind you when the suspension time has exceeded that allowed, the message
AUTO MODE CURRENTLY SUSPENDED
is displayed. A message is also displayed on the supervisors screen if the ACD suspension time becomes excessive, i.e., exceeds a second time period set in the database. Touch the ACD key again to return to the Automatic Call Distribution method of working.
5 -- 49
Amb_5.10_AUTO CALL DIST
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE 5.10.3 Wrap Up
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
This term is used to define the interval allowed for completing a current action prior to accepting the next call, or touching the ACD key in order to carry out a non-telephone function. The period of time allowed for Wrap Up is defined in the database by the System Manager. When you have been out of the ACD mode and wish to return to it before the Wrap Up period has timed out, touch the ACD key twice. If you are busy when the Wrap Up period times out, ACD is put into Suspended mode. To remind you when the (preset) suspension time has been exceeded, the message
AUTO MODE CURRENTLY SUSPENDED
is displayed. A message is also displayed on the supervisors screen if the ACD suspension becomes excessive, i.e., it exceeds the second period set in the database.
Helpful Hint
You cannot change the ACD state to its alternative mode when you: a) b) c) d) Have any radio channel/talkgroup selected. Have an open Connect Group. Have an active tannoy, internal intercom or door telephone etc. Are accessing the Instant Playback recorder.
Calls that are on Hold are not considered as Active calls and so suspension of ACD is permitted (this option is configurable) if you have calls on Hold and no new calls to answer. Callers making incoming calls hear a ringing tone. This is to inform them that the call is progressing and that they are about to be connected. The tone you hear before a call is presented to you is provided to let you know that a call has been received by the system and that presentation is imminent. The message
INCOMING CALL UNAVAILABLE
indicates that the caller rang off as you were connected.
Amb_5.10_AUTO CALL DIST
5 -- 50
DS2000
5.11
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
Common Call Queue

Availability of Common Call Queue is dependent on your systems specification.
5.11.1
Introduction
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) presents a fresh telephone call to terminals as soon as the current call has been cleared. However, whilst in the ACD mode of operation, if there are calls waiting to be answered and there are no further operators available due to a heavy call load the calls can be automatically passed on from a local site to remote site. The Common Call Queue (Inter--Site Automatic Call Distribution) function is available on DPNSS connected DS2000 systems and operates in conjunction with the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and Automatic Call Forwarding functions. It allows linked sites which are already using ACD to hand--off incoming calls on specified telephone groups, which would otherwise be placed on a queue, to another site which has operators available to take the call. This functionality may be configured to handoff calls under the following conditions: S S When no local operators are available -- Call Forcing Mode. Calls rings both locally and on the remote site -- Parallel Mode
In addition, to give a chance for calls to be handled by a local operator regardless of the handoff mode employed at the system handing calls off, it will be possible to configure a delay before any incoming handoff calls arriving at a remote site are presented to its local operators. The incoming call is handed--off over a fixed link from the local site to a remote site and placed on the appropriate priority queue. ACD and Automatic Call Forwarding at the remote site ensures that the call may be immediately presented to a free operator. If no remote site has operators available or all the inter--site lines are in use, the call is placed on the appropriate queue at the local site.
5.11.2
Available Sites and Free Operators

ICCS sites which are participating in the Common Call Queue function notify all sites to which they are linked, of their availability for accepting calls handed--off from other sites. At each site the System Manager can configure in the System Defaults file the minimum number of operators that must be free before the site is available to accept handed--off calls. (A value of zero indicates that the site is not available to accept handed--off calls at any time.) The System Manager at each site can also determine which remote sites the local site will accept calls from.
5 -- 51
Amb_5.11_COMMON CALL Q_INTERSITE
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE 5.11.3 Handoff Modes
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The System Manager can configure the handoff mode and related settings for each telephone group as follows.
5.11.3.1
Call Forcing Mode (No Local Operators Only)

In this mode, the system will only attempt to handoff calls to a remote site if there are no local operators available to take the call. If no remote sites are available, the call will be queued locally. If the handoff fails it is never retried.
5.11.3.2
Parallel Mode
In this mode, calls are queued locally and handed off to the remote ICCS site. When a call is answered locally, the handoff call is cancelled. When a call is answered remotely, the call is removed from local operator screens and all local call timeouts etc are also cancelled. In this mode, the inter--site handoff call can optionally be delayed if local operators are available, to give the call a chance of being answered locally. This delay is definable for each telephone group and can be configured for no delay ie set to zero. If an inter--site handoff call attempt fails, because the remote ICCS site has no operators available or the remote site is not available, the handoff can be configured to retry. This is defined by setting a handoff retry delay timeout, defined for each telephone group and is configured in the database to a non zero value.
5.11.4
Incoming External Call

When a call comes into an ICCS site, the handoff group and mode for the line group to which the incoming line belongs is examined. Should the line group be a defined handoff group the call is immediately queued to local operators. In addition, if there are no local operators available that could take the call, a handoff attempt is made immediately. If there are local operators available that could take the call, the handoff attempt is delayed by the number of seconds (which may be zero) defined for the telephone group to which the incoming line belongs. If the handoff attempt fails, a timer is started and the handoff is attempted again on expiry of this timer, provided the call has not been answered by a local operator in the meantime. This retry can be disabled (by setting the handoff retry delay to zero). When a call is answered locally, any inter--site handoff call is cleared. If the call is answered by an operator connected to the remote ICCS site, the call is removed from local operator queues and all local call timeouts etc. are cancelled.
5.11.5
Incoming Handoff Call

When a call comes into a system on a line dedicated to handoff calls, the configured Incoming Handoff Delay setting is examined. If this delay is non zero, the call will not be presented to operators until a time equal to the configured delay has elapsed. If this value is zero, the call is presented to operators immediately.
_5.11_COMMON CALL Q_INTERSITE ACD
5 -- 52
DS2000
5.11.6
OPERATOR MANUAL Call Hand- off Mechanism -
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
A call is handed--off from a local ICCS site to a remote ICCS site, by making an inter--site call to an extension number at the remote site appropriate to the priority group. The originating line number of the incoming call (OLI) is also passed to the remote ICCS site, thus enabling EISEC look--up to be performed if appropriate. If there are no longer sufficient free operators available connected to the remote ICCS site the call may be rejected, otherwise the handed--off call is presented to an ACD operator. When the call is answered at the remote ICCS site, the original incoming call (which is still ringing in) is automatically connected through from the local ICCS site to the remote ICCS site and is answered via ACD. If there are no lines available to the remote ICCS site or the call is rejected, the incoming call is handled at the local ICCS site. If the handoff call timer is set to non--zero the handoff will be attempted again after the set time. If the handoff retry delay is set to zero no retry attempt will be made.
5.11.7
Lines and Extensions

At each site, the System Manager can determine for the inter--site link, the minimum number of lines allocated to each priority group for handing--off calls. If the total number of lines allocated to all groups on the inter--site link is less than the maximum number of lines available on the link, the remaining lines are treated as a pool which is available to all priority groups. One extension for each priority group at a remote ICCS site is used as the seed for all other extensions within that group. This seed extension is used by the local ICCS site as the target extension at the remote site to hand--off the call to. If seed extensions are not defined for a specific priority group, the call shall target the same extension at the remote ICCS site as the original call targeted. This allows both sites to configure symmetrical data for these extensions allocating the same group and subgroup and hence making these calls available to the same user roles.
5.11.8
5.11.8.1
Call Logging
Call Forcing Mode (No Local Operators Only)
When a call is answered locally then the call logging at the local end remains unchanged from that of any other call answered by local operators: S Incoming Call S Call Answered S Call Cleared or Op Call Cleared
5 -- 53
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
If a call has been handed off then there will be no call log events generated at the local end and the following events will be generated at the remote end: S Incoming Call S Call Answered S Call Cleared or Op Call Cleared
5.11.8.2
Parallel Mode
If, as well as being presented at the local end the call has been the subject of a handoff and the call has started ringing at the remote end, then call log events will be generated as indicated for the following scenarios: Senario 1 -- Call answered by an operator at the local end: Local End S Incoming Call S Call Answered S Call Cleared or Op Call Cleared Remote End S Incoming Call S Call Withdrawn Senario 2 -- Call answered by an operator at the remote end: Local End S Incoming Call S Call Handed Off Remote End S Incoming Call S Call Answered S Call Cleared or Op Call Cleared Senario 3 -- Caller hangs up before call is answered at either end: Local End S Incoming Call S Call Cleared Remote End S Incoming Call S Call Withdrawn
5 -- 54
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
Helpful Hint
If a call is handed--off to a ICCS remote site tagged as available but on arrival there are no free operators, the call is rejected back to the local site. If the inter--site link fails after a call as been handed--off to a remote site, the call is cleared at both sites and that fault may be reported to the System Managers and may be logged in the site fault log. If the inter--site link fails before hand--off has been completed, the call reverts to the local site as if it had been rejected. If the call is cleared before hand--off is complete, the inter--site call is terminated and the line released for further use. Should an incoming call be cleared before being answered in the Parallel Mode, the system will clear both the local and inter--site handoff calls. If a Parallel Mode handoff call is answered simultaneously by both a local and remote operator, only one operator will have the call routed to them, the other receiving a
CALL NOT AVAILABLE
message.
5 -- 55
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
5 -- 56
DS2000
5.12
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
Conferencing
Refer to Chapter 7 for information on setting up Telephone (or Radio/Telephone) Conference calls.
5 -- 57
Amb_5.12_CONFERENCING
VOLUME 1 TELEPHONE
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Amb_5.12_CONFERENCING
5 -- 58
Chapter 6 Radio
VOLUME 1 RADIO Amendment Record

Issue A B Reason Author Date 25.04.06 24.06.06
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Approved
First draft incorporating Ver SS 9.11 functionality Amendments to first draft to incorporate Ver 131 functionality Third draft to incorporate changes post review First Issue First draft to incorporate V161 Second Issue to Incorporate Changes to reflect V161 Draft to Incorporate Changes to reflect V171 SS
C 1 1A 2
KJL JC TS SS
22.08.06 11.12.06 13.09.07 01/11/07
2a 2b 3 4 5
KJL
06/11/07 07/12/07 20/12/07 02/09/09 02/06/10
Second Draft to Incorporate KJL Changes Post Review Third Issue to Incorporate Changes to Reflect V171 Minor changes to text Changes to Ambient Listen functionality (Subs Prof) KJL DSW SS
Amb_6.0_RADIO
6 -- 2
Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Contents
6.1 Airwave Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9 6.1.1 Talkgroup Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 9 6.1.2 Talkgroup Key Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 9 6.1.3 Caller Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 11 6.1.3.1 Caller Identity Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 11 6.2 Talkgroup Setup and Key States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12 6.2.1 Talkgroup Setup Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 12 6.2.2 Preselecting a Talkgroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 12 6.2.3 Un-preselecting a Talkgroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 13 6.2.4 Rearranging Talkgroup Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 13 6.2.5 Talkgroup Base State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 13 6.2.6 Talkgroup Preselection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 14 6.2.7 Talkgroup Un-Preselection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 14 6.2.8 Talkgroup Event Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 15 6.2.9 Monitoring a Talkgroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 15 6.2.10 Demonitoring a Talkgroup (Preselect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 16 6.2.11 Selecting a Talkgroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 17 6.2.12 Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 18 6.2.13 Deselect Talkgroup (Monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 19 6.2.14 Talkgroup Key States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 20 6.2.15 Talkgroup Show Subs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 21 6.3 Unmonitored Talkgroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 22 6.3.1 Talkgroup not Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 22 6.4 Talkgroup Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 23 6.4.1 Talkgroup List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 23 6.4.2 Associated Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 23 6.5 Last Dispatcher Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 24 6.5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 24 6.5.2 Last Audio Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 24 6.5.2.1 Last Audio Monitored Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 24 6.5.3 Last Audio Monitored Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 24 6.5.4 Last Event Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 25 6.5.4.1 Last Event Monitored Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 25 6.5.5 Last Event Monitored Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 25 6.5.6 Last Event Monitored On Exit Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 26 6.6 Talkgroup History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 28 6.6.1 Talkgroup History List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 28 6.6.1.1 List Entry Time-Stamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 29 6.6.2 Associated Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 29 6.7 Subscriber Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 30 6.7.1 Subscriber Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 31 6.7.2 Radio Status Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 32 6.7.3 Main Tab Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 33 6.7.4 Alias Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 34 6.7.5 DGNA -- Dynamic Group Number Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 35 6.7.6 DGNA -- Add Talkgroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 36
6 -- 3
Amb_6.0_RADIO
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.7.7 DGNA Remove Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 37 6.7.8 Stun/Enable Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 38 6.7.9 Stunning a Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 38 6.7.10 Enabling a Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 39 6.7.11 Radio Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 39 6.7.12 Ambient Listen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 40 6.7.12.1 Motorola Dimetra Ambient Listen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.8 Subscriber Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 6.8.1 Searching for a Subscriber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--45 6.8.2 Using the Search Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--47 6.9 Subcriber Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 49 6.9.1 Subs List Function Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 49 6.9.2 Subscriber List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 49 6.9.3 Associated Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 50 6.9.4 Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 50 6.10 Radio User Identity (RUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 51 6.10.1 RUI Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 51 6.10.2 RUI Profile Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 51 6.10.3 Main -- Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 52 6.10.3.1 Subscriber Profile Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.10.3.2 Rui Query Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.10.4 Book -- Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 53 6.10.5 New Pin -- Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 54 6.11 Call Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 55 6.11.1 Call Event History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 55 6.11.1.1 Associated Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.12 Individual Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 57 6.12.1 Single Point to Point Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 57 6.12.1.1 Individual Call via a List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.12.1.2 Individual Selection by ISSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.12.1.3 Mobile Resource Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.12.1.4 Resource Group Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.12.2 Interupt Priority Individual Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 58 6.12.3 Multi Point Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 58 6.12.4 Individual Call in Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 58 6.12.5 Radio Group Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 59 6.13 Inbound Individual Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 61 6.13.1 CCI Port Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 61 6.13.2 Individual Call Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 61 6.13.3 Individual Tetra Calls List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 63 6.13.3.1 Active Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.13.3.2 List Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -6.14 In-progress Individual Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 66 6.15 Individual Call Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 67 6.15.1 Placing a Call On Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 67 6.15.2 Taking a Call Off Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 68
41
52 52
56 57 57 58 58
63 63
Amb_6.0_RADIO
6 -- 4
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
6.16 Individual Call History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 69 6.16.1 Individual Call History List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 69 6.16.2 Associated Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 70 6.17 Individual Callback Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 71 6.17.1 Queuing Callback Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 71 6.17.2 Individual Callback Requests Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 71 6.17.3 Restrictions Accepting an Individual Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 72 6.17.4 Individual Callback List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 73 6.17.5 Clearing a Callback Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 73 6.17.6 Automatic Clearing of Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 73 6.17.7 Intersite Notification of Callback Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 73 6.17.8 Callback Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 74 6.18 Group Callback Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 75 6.18.1 Queuing Callback Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 75 6.18.2 Group Callback Requests Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 75 6.18.3 Restrictions Accepting Group Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 76 6.18.4 Group Callback List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 77 6.18.5 Clearing a Callback Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 77 6.18.6 Automatic Clearing of Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 77 6.18.7 Intersite Notification of Callback Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 78 6.18.8 Callback Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 78 6.19 Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 79 6.19.1 Emergency Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 79 6.19.2 Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 81 6.19.3 Emergency Calls List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 82 6.19.4 Clearing Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 83 6.19.5 External Acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 83 6.19.6 Emergency Alarm Flushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 84 6.19.7 Emergency Alarm Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 85 6.19.8 Auto Select on Emergency Acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 86 6.20 Short Data Message Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 88 6.20.1 Accessing SDM Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 89 6.20.2 Sending a Short Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 90 6.20.3 Sent Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 93 6.20.4 Sent Message Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 94 6.20.5 Received Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 95 6.20.6 Received Message Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 96 6.20.7 SDM History List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 97 6.20.8 History Message Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 98 6.21 Predefined Short Data Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 100 6.21.1 Accessing the Predefined SDM Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 100 6.21.2 PREDEF SDM key in the General Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 100 6.21.3 PREDEF SDM key in Main Screen Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 102 6.22 Mute All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 104 6.22.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 104 6.22.2 Muting of Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 104 6.22.3 De--Muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 104
6 -- 5
Amb_6.0_RADIO
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.23 Alert Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 106 6.23.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 106 6.23.2 Sending An Alert Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 106 6.24 Communication Control Interface (CCI) Port Usage . . . . . . . . . 6 - 108 6.24.1 CCI Summary Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 109 6.24.2 CCI Port Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 109 6.24.3 Threshold Exceeded Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 109 6.25 CCI Port Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 110 6.25.1 CCI Port Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 111 6.25.2 Icon A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 111 6.25.3 Icon B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 112 6.25.4 Reserved for Individual Use Key State -- Icon B . . . . . . . . 6 -- 112 6.25.5 Reserved for Group Use Key State -- Icon B . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 113 6.25.6 Summary Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 113 6.25.7 Help Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 115 6.26 Status Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 116 6.26.1 Status Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 116 6.26.2 Associated Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 117 6.26.3 Refresh List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 117 6.27 Mobile Resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 118 6.27.1 List Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 118 6.27.2 Display Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 119 6.27.2.1 Multi Column List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 119 6.27.2.2 Single Column List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 120 6.27.3 Dropdown Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 120 6.27.3.1 Functional Area Dropdown Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 121 6.27.3.2 List Ordering Dropdown Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 121 6.27.3.3 Resource Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 123 6.27.3.4 List Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 124 6.28 Radio Resource Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 125 6.28.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 125 6.28.2 Resource Group Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 126 6.28.2.1 Primary Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 127 6.28.2.2 Secondary Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 128 6.28.3 Secondary Area -- Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 129 6.28.3.1 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 129 6.28.3.2 Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 129 6.28.3.3 Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 129 6.28.3.4 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 130 6.28.3.5 Auto Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 130 6.28.3.6 Subs Prof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 131 6.28.4 Resource Group Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 132 6.28.4.1 OK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 132 6.28.4.2 Updating and Alias Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 132 6.28.4.3 Updating and Multiple Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 134 6.28.4.4 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 135 6.28.4.5 Multicall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 135 6.28.4.6 Dflt Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 135
Amb_6.0_RADIO
6 -- 6
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
6.28.4.7 Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 136 6.29 Group Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 137 6.29.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 137 6.29.2 Group Repeat Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 137 6.29.3 Changing Group Repeat State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 138 6.29.4 External Group Repeat State Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 138 6.30 Radio Revert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 139 6.30.1 Radio Revert Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 139 6.31 Analogue Radio Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 141 6.31.1 Radio Channel Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 141 6.31.2 Radio Key Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 142 6.32 Radio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 143 6.32.1 Radio Setup Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 143 6.32.2 Adding Radio Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 144 6.32.3 Removing Radio Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 145 6.32.4 Rearranging Radio Channel Key Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 146 6.33 Use of Radio Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 148 6.33.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 148 6.33.2 Radio Key Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 148 6.33.3 Mute Speaker Key (Speaker Mute) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 148 6.34 Talkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 149 6.34.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 149 6.34.2 Setting up Talkthrough (T/T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 149 6.35 Monitoring and Selecting Radio Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 150 6.35.1 Radio Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 150 6.35.2 Radio Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 150 6.35.3 Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 151 6.35.4 Radio Demonitor and Deselect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 152 6.36 Combining Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 153 6.36.1 Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 153 6.36.2 Uncombine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 153 6.36.3 Radio Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 154 6.36.3.1 Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 154 6.36.3.2 Uncombine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 154 6.36.4 Talkgroup Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 154 6.36.4.1 Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 154 6.36.4.2 Uncombine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 154 6.37 Remote Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 155 6.37.1 Preselecting the Remote Radio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 155 6.37.2 Using the Remote Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 155 6.37.3 Leaving (Un--preselecting) the Remote Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -- 157
6 -- 7
Amb_6.0_RADIO
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Amb_6.0_RADIO
6 -- 8
DS2000
6.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Airwave Functions
6.1.1
Talkgroup Keys
This chapter describes the operation of Airwave and Talkgroup keys. A single talkgroup is defined as a single talkgroup audio source, mapped to a Talkgroup key on the users screen. During this chapter the term talkgroup refers to a single talkgroup audio source and its associated key.
USER OP PC 1 2 3
Talkgroup Keys
SWITCH
User Audio
Talkgroup Audio Source
Talkgroup Overview
6.1.2
Talkgroup Key Description

Key colours, attributes and identification numbers are set by the System Manager. The Talkgroup key is made up of a face (border) area and a textface area. The face area contains the terminal number, talkgroup channel and other functional information. The textface area contains the subscriber ID of the calling terminal. TX is displayed on the top line of the key when the talkgroup is Selected and you transmit using either the PTT key or foot--switch, and the PTT request is sucessfully processed. BUSY is displayed when the Radio System is still processing the PTT request. The colour of the border indicates the state of emergency alarms. 6 -- 9
Amb_6.1_Airwave Functions
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
FLT = I/O card or Radio System Fault Indication MG FLT = CCI port for this Migration Group has failed MG ERR = Migration Group Error (see note below) Disabled/Busy/TX
Comb RD
= Combined = Group Repeat
Face Area (Border) Talkgroup Identity 2 x 9 characters
Calling Subscriber Id 3 Character Talkgroup Id (Optional)
Tg n Northern XRAY 03 p xsecCxx xxx
Tx
FLT
Comb
Key Face
Talkgroup state is: p = Preselected for this user e = Event monitored for this user m = Monitored for this user s = Selected for this user MUTE Talkgroup audio is muted
Talkgroup Status: Cn = Talkgroup is in a Connect Group at this terminal, where n is the number of the Connect Group. Cxx = Talkgroup is in a Connect Group at another terminal where xx is the terminal number. If the talkgroup is part of a Remote users Connect Group xx indicates the site ID instead of the terminal number. The following security indications can be disabled by the System Manager: xsecCn = Talkgroup is part of an unsecure Connect Group at this terminal where n is the number of the Connect Group of which the talkgroup is a member. xsecCxx = Talkgroup is part of an unsecure Connect Group at another terminal where xx is the terminal number at which the talkgroup is part of a Connect Group. Note Unsecure Connect Groups are those containing a telephone or legacy radio = = Talkgroup is selected at this terminal or at another terminal (if the talkgroup is enabled for multi--user select). Talkgroup is selected at another terminal where nnn is the terminal number of the other user selecting the talkgroup and that selection restricts access to the talkgroup, i.e., the talkgroup nnn is not enabled for muti--user selection and the user is not enabled to select an already selected talkgroup. Talkgroup is keyed by another user, where nnn is the terminal number of the user keying the talkgroup.
S Snnn
Txnnn
Note:
MG ERR - Any users who are accessing the talkgroup on an alternative CCI port are presented with this legend on the key indicating that they should re-monitor the migration group on the recovered CCI port and demonitor all associated radio channels. Group Repeat State - This legend indicates the current state and is displayed if the state differs from the talkgroups configured base-state and provided the operator has the talkgroup audio monitored or selected. RD - Indicates that Group Repeat is currently disabled on the Talkgroup. RE - Indicates that Group Repeat is currently enabled on the Talkgroup. -
Note:
6 -- 10
DS2000
6.1.3
OPERATOR MANUAL Caller Identity
VOLUME 1 RADIO
The radio caller identity area can accommodate 12 characters and is used to identify the radio alias of the last caller to transmit on that talkgroup. If the alias of the caller is not known to the system the alias is defined as one of the following: 1. If the organisation has elected to use the Force Identifier in Unknown Alias functionality the alias will be UNK aaaaaaaa, where aaaaaaaa is up to eight alphanumeric characters representing the organisation to which the Subscriber ISSI belongs. Otherwise the alias is UNKxxxxxxxxx, where xxxxxxxxx is the last nine digits of the Subscribers ISSI.
2.
6.1.3.1
Caller Identity Area

The text and background colour of the calling subscriber identity area of the key are configureable by the System Manager. When the calling subscriber identity area of the key is used to indicate the talkgroup status, the display attributes options are defined below: Key Status Normal talkgroup call Unacknowledged emergency talkgroup call Acknowledged emergency talkgroup call Attributes Status line -- normal mode Status line -- emergency mode Status line -- acknowledged emergency alarm
6 -- 11
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.2
Talkgroup Setup and Key States

The Talkgroup Page Setup screen is used to preselect Talkgroup keys and reconfigure the layout of Talkgroup keys within the talkgroup area page(s).
6.2.1
Talkgroup Setup Key

Touch the idle TGRP SETUP key to set it to the Active state. The message
CHOOSE A RADIO/TALKGROUP OR PRESEL
is displayed. The General Work Area changes to the Talkgroup Setup screen, with the first page of the available Talkgroups list being displayed. The Talkgroup page area is changed to show the outlines of any blank (i.e., currently unused) talkgroup keys. Talkgroups preselected at the operator position are already allocated to keys in the Radio/Talkgroup page area. You can preselect as many additional talkgroups as required, up to the maximum configured by SunGard Vivista (typically 40). A talkgroup must be preselected (i.e., have a key displayed on one of the Radio/Talkgroup pages) before it can be used (e.g., Monitored or Selected). On Preselection, talkgroups default to their base state which can be configured to be either idle or Event Monitor. During talkgroup setup the background colour of the Radio Page is changed to indicate that the setup screen is active and blank radio keys may be available to be populated.
6.2.2
Preselecting a Talkgroup
Talkgroups are preselected by the following sequence of actions: a) Touch the talkgroup entry in the Talkgroup Selection list. CHOOSE A BLANK PRESELECTION KEY is displayed. The message
b)
Touch a blank, i.e., unused Talkgroup key space. The MORE RADIO key can be used to access talkgroup/radio pages not currently displayed before selecting a blank key. If an already allocated Talkgroup key is touched, the message INVALID KEY; RESELECT CHANNEL is displayed and the function cancelled.
Talkgroups which are not available for preselection are not touch sensitive, and hence cannot be preselected.
Amb_6.2_TG_Setup_and _Use_of_Keys
6 -- 12
DS2000
6.2.3
OPERATOR MANUAL Un-preselecting a Talkgroup
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Talkgroups are un-preselected (i.e., removed from the Radio Page) by touching the appropriate list entry in the Talkgroup Setup area of the screen. Talkgroups for which un-preselection has been disabled are not touch sensitive, and cannot be un-preselected. Note: Other ways of un-preselecting are by logging off, changing to another Functional Area or by using the AREA REVERT key. Each of these methods return you to the default state after the respective action.
6.2.4
Rearranging Talkgroup Keys

Talkgroup keys can be swapped from their current positions to any other position on any page. Keys are swapped by first touching a Talkgroup key position. The message CHOOSE A PRESELECTION KEY is displayed in the message area. If the same Talkgroup key or the TGRP SETUP key is touched next, the swapping function is cancelled but the Talkgroup Setup mode is still active. The message CHOOSE A RADIO/TALKGROUP OR PRESEL is redisplayed. If a different Talkgroup key position is touched, the position of the two keys is swapped and the message CHOOSE A RADIO/TALKGROUP OR PRESEL is redisplayed. During the process of choosing a second Talkgroup key, the MORE RADIO key can be used to change pages as required.
6.2.5
Talkgroup Base State

A Talkgroup key can be configured to be presented to an operator at logon or whilst accessing the TGRP SETUP pages in either of the following base states: S S Preselected Event Monitored
This base state option is System Manager configurable per talkgroup. A talkgroup whose Base State option is set to Event Monitored cannot be event demonitored (Preselected).
6 -- 13
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.2.6 Talkgroup Preselection
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Preselecting a talkgroup makes the Talkgroup key available for use, by displaying it within one of the pages in the users radio area. Talkgroups are set to be preselected when the base state is configured to be preselected (see 6.2.6). Note: A talkgroup cannot be preselected if the base state for that talkgroup is set to the event monitored state (see 6.2.6). Talkgroups can be preselected, either automatically as part of the user logon process, or manually by use of the TGRP SETUP functionality. The talkgroup key is then presented in the preselected state. Preselected talkgroups are in the idle state, i.e., they are not Monitored or Selected, and no audio from the talkgroup is routed to you.
6.2.7
Talkgroup Un-Preselection
A talkgroup can be un-preselected by either logging off the user position, changing functional areas, using the TGRP SETUP key, or using the AREA REVERT key. Un-preselecting a talkgroup removes the Talkgroup key from your radio area. A talkgroup can be configured to disable Un-preselection.
6 -- 14
DS2000
6.2.8
OPERATOR MANUAL Talkgroup Event Monitor
VOLUME 1 RADIO
When the base state is configured to be event monitored, the talkgroup key is presented either automatically as part of the user logon process, or when manually put on a radio page via use of the TGRP SETUP key, in the event monitored state. You can Event Monitor any talkgroup that you have Preselected by touching the EVENT MON key followed by the appropriate Talkgroup key. Talkgroup keys on radio pages that are not currently displayed can be accessed via the MORE RADIO key. When a talkgroup is event monitored the following actions occur: S The Talkgroup key attributes and legend change to indicate that the talkgroup is event monitored. A TALKGROUP EVENT MONITORED message is displayed in the operators message area. Events occurring on this talkgroup are displayed in the call events list.
When a talkgroup has event monitor removed, i.e., touching the EVENT MON key followed by the appropriate Talkgroup key, the following actions occur: S The corresponding Talkgroup key attributes and legend change to indicate that the talkgroup is no longer event monitored. A TALKGROUP EVENT DEMONITORED message area. message is displayed in the operators
A check is performed by the system to determine whether a Last Dispatcher Warning should be raised.
A talkgroup cannot be event demonitored (Preselected) if the base state for that talkgroup is configured to the event monitor state (see 6.2.6).
6.2.9
Monitoring a Talkgroup
You can monitor any talkgroup that you have Preselected, Event Monitored, or Selected, by touching the appropriate Talkgroup key in the radio area. Talkgroup keys on radio pages that are not currently displayed can be accessed via the MORE RADIO key. When a talkgroup is Monitored the following actions occur: S The received and transmitted audio from the talkgroup audio source is routed to your headset/loudspeaker and events occurring on this talkgroup are displayed in the Call Events list. The incoming audio level is set according to the Audio Levels presentation function. The corresponding Talkgroup key attributes and legend change to indicate that the talkgroup is monitored. A
TALKGROUP MONITORED
S S
message is displayed in your message area. 6 -- 15

VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.2.10 Demonitoring a Talkgroup (Preselect)
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
You can de-monitor any talkgroup that you have monitored by using the DEMON/DESEL key. When a talkgroup is demonitored it returns either to the Preselected state or the Event Monitored state depending on the base state setting in the database (see 6.2.6). When a talkgroup is demonitored the following actions occur: S The corresponding Talkgroup key attributes and legend change to indicate that the talkgroup is now preselected or event monitored. Received and transmitted audio from the talkgroup audio source is disconnected from your headset/loudspeaker. A
TALKGROUP DEMONITORED
S S
message is displayed in your message area.
A check is performed by the system to determine whether a Last Dispatcher Warning should be raised.
When a talkgroup is demonitored, a check is performed by the system of the number of users with the talkgroup Monitored or Selected. If no users have the talkgroup Monitored, and the talkgroup is configured to generate a not--monitored alarm, a talkgroup not--monitored alarm event is triggered. Each User Type can be configured to be either included or excluded in the talkgroup not--monitored check, i.e., supervisor types are normally excluded, and operators are normally included in the talkgroup not--monitored check.
All Selected talkgroups can be Deselected by touching the DESEL ALL key twice or individually by touching the Selected talkgroup. All Monitored talkgroups can be Demonitored by touching the DEMON key twice or individually by touching the Monitored talkgroup. Notes: For a full description of the Demon Desel function refer to Chapter 6.35.4. Organisations that have Last Dispatcher Warning functionality should refer to Chapter 6.5.
6 -- 16
DS2000
6.2.11
OPERATOR MANUAL Selecting a Talkgroup
VOLUME 1 RADIO
You can select a talkgroup by touching the appropriate Monitored Talkgroup key. Talkgroup keys on radio pages that are not currently displayed can be accessed via the MORE RADIO key. You are barred from Selecting a talkgroup if any of the following conditions exist: S The talkgroup is part of another users Connect Group and either the system is not configured to select talkgroups in other user connect groups or you are not privileged to select a talkgroup already selected by another user. An OPERATION DENIED -- TALKGROUP BUSY message is displayed in your message area. You already have the maximum allowed number of talkgroups and/or radio channels selected. The message OPERATION DENIED -- SELECT LIMIT is displayed in your message area. You have an individual call in progress. The message INVALID OPERATION is displayed in your message area.
When a talkgroup is Selected the following actions occur: S The corresponding Talkgroup key attributes and legend are changed to indicate that the talkgroup is selected. The Talkgroup key attributes and legend for any other users that have the Talkgroup key displayed are changed to indicate that the talkgroup is selected. The terminal number of the selecting user is only displayed to other users, if the selecting user is not enabled to select talkgroups already selected by other users, and the talkgroup is not enabled for multiple user selection. The incoming audio level is set according to the Audio Levels presentation function. The message
TALKGROUP SELECTED
S S
is displayed in your message area.
If you have Push-To-Talk (PTT) active (via the foot--switch) while a talkgroup is selected, the talkgroup is immediately placed into the Transmit state (see 6.2.14). Note: The maximum number of talkgroups/radio channels a user can simultaneously have selected/monitored is factory configurable and is typically set to 10.
6 -- 17
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.2.12 Transmit
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
You can transmit on the talkgroups you have selected either by touching the TX key or by pressing the foot-switch (the PTT switch). When you activate PTT the following actions occur: S S The TX key attributes are changed to indicate that PTT is active. The Talkgroup key legend and attributes, for all other users with the Talkgroup key displayed, are changed to indicate the terminal position of the user keying the talkgroup. When PTT is applied on a talkgroup, initially the legend Busy is displayed on the Talkgroup key. When PTT is granted on a talkgroup by the radio system, the legend Busy is replaced by Tx. Your microphone is routed to each Selected talkgroups audio source.
When you deactivate PTT (neither the TX key or the foot-switch are pressed) the following actions occur: S S S Your microphone is de-routed from the selected talkgroup audio source(s). The TX key attributes are changed to indicate that PTT is inactive. The Talkgroup key legend and attributes, for all other users with the Talkgroup key displayed, are changed back to the Selected state, indicating that you have stopped keying the talkgroup.
When a talkgroup is simultaneously selected by more than one user, contention between the users is resolved by PTT, i.e., the first user to activate PTT is routed to, and transmits on, the talkgroup. While the user routed to the talkgroup holds PTT active, all other users are disabled from transmitting on the talkgroup, i.e., they are locked out until PTT is released. This feature is dependent on the radio system allowing operators to have priority over normal users. If another user has the talkgroup selected and PTT active when PTT is released, they will not be routed to or transmit on the talkgroup. If the second user is to successfully transmit on the talkgroup, they have to release and reapply PTT once the first user has released PTT.
6 -- 18
DS2000
6.2.13
OPERATOR MANUAL Deselect Talkgroup (Monitor)
VOLUME 1 RADIO
You deselect an individual talkgroup by touching the appropriate Selected Talkgroup key. All selected talkgroups can be simultaneously deselected by use of the DESEL ALL function key. When a talkgroup is deselected the following actions occur: S S If PTT (Tx) is active, the talkgroup audio source is un--keyed. If PTT (footswitch) is active, attempting to deselect displays the message INVALID OPERATION . Your microphone is disconnected from the talkgroup audio source. The Talkgroup key attributes and legend are changed to indicate that the talkgroup is Monitored. If the talkgroup is not selected by any other user, the Talkgroup key attributes and legend for all users are changed to indicate that the talkgroup is not selected by any other user. The incoming audio level is set according to the Audio Levels presentation function. The message
TALKGROUP DESELECTED
S S
S S
is displayed in your message area.
6 -- 19
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.2.14 Talkgroup Key States
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The following table is a brief overview of the states that a Talkgroup key can be in, what actions can be performed in that state, and the keys possible next state. Entries in Event List refers to relevant entries being displayed in the operators Event list area.
Current State Un--preselected Preselected
Entries in List No No
Key Displays N/A Preselected
Audio No No
Next State Preselected Un--preselect, Event Monitor, Monitor Event Mon Cancel Un--preselected,
Event Monitored Yes *
Monitored
Yes *
Event Monitored with Incoming audio indicated * Monitored with Incoming audio indicated * Selected
No
Selected **
Yes
PTTing
Yes
PTT colour
Monitor Incoming audio Preselected, routed into Event Monitor, secondary Selected audio feed As Monitored Monitored, but in primary PTTing audio feed As Selected Selected plus OPs mic routed out to talkgroup
Audio Indication may not be shown and the Group call is not entered into the Event list if the Inhibit Call Indication option is Enabled and the talkgroup is selected by another Operator. The monitored Talkgroup key still retains the last subscriber alias when a call is received even though it is not showing incoming audio indication. When a talkgroup is selected by more than one operator then no incoming audio indication is displayed on the Talkgroup key, but an entry is put into the event list.
**
6 -- 20
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Helpful Hint
If the TETRA radio system (or connection to it), is unavailable it may be due to one of the following reasons: a) A TRIC (Trunked Radio Interace Card) supports audio for two CCI ports. If a TRIC fails FLT will appear on the talkgroup key. Note: Audio is lost, not control. To resume, demonitor then return to the Monitored state. If a CCI port fails all relevant Talkgroup keys automatically default to their Preselected state. If the data link fails all relevant Talkgroup keys will automatically default to their base state and the message
CCI xx @ yyyyyyyy FAILED
b) c)
is displayed in the message area, where yyyyyyyy is the Tetra Gateway name. d) If you attempt to monitor talkgroups and there is no CCI Ports available to you the message
TG MON FAIL - CAPACITY REACHED -
is displayed in the message area. e) If you attempt to monitor too many talkgroups the message
TOO MANY CHANS . MONITORED/SELECTED
is displayed in the message area. f) If an attempt is made to monitor a specific talkgroup on a CCI port but it is not supported on that port, the message
MONITOR FAIL - TALKGROUP xxx PORT yyy -
is displayed in the operators message area.
6.2.15
Talkgroup Show Subs

You can display a list of subscribers currently affiliated to a specific talkgroup by touching the LISTS tab followed by the TGRP key, choosing from the list the entry for which you wish to see the subscribers, then touching the SUBS LIST key.
Note:
This is just one of the ways that you can find a subscriber.
6 -- 21
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.3
Unmonitored Talkgroups
When the number of operators monitoring a talkgroup drops to zero (i.e., when the last operator monitoring the talkgroup ceases to do so), a warning message to indicate the event is presented to the responsible supervisor.
Note:
Also see Last Dispatcher Warning function.
6.3.1
Talkgroup not Monitored

This function enables the supervisor to know when the number of operators covering a talkgroup drops to zero, so that adequate cover of the talkgroup can be maintained. The function only applies to talkgroups with the relevant database flag set. The message
WARNING: TGROUP YYY NOT MONITORED
is displayed on the responsible supervisors screen when the last operator monitoring talkgroup YYY has ceased to do so. This alarm is only raised on the transition from one to zero operators audio monitoring the group (this includes those with the talkgroup selected). When a supervisor logs on, if there are talkgroups with no operators covering them, no alarm is generated for those talkgroups, as the alarms are only raised on the downward transitions.
Amb_6.3_Unmonitored Tgroup
6 -- 22
DS2000
6.4
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Talkgroup Selections
The Talkgroup list displays the talkgroups and Migration Groups, both those being available for preselection, and those already preselected by this operator. When the term talkgroup(s) is used within this section it will include Migration Group(s). For further information about Migration Groups, see Migration Groups.
6.4.1
Talkgroup List
Touching the TGRP key displays a list of the talkgroups to the operator. This is a scrollable list with the title:
TALKGROUP LIST
Each entry in the list has the form: TTT DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD Where: S S TTT is the talkgroup identifier specified in the System Manager configurable talkgroup database (maximum three characters) DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD is the description of the talkgroup (maximum 15 characters)
The colour of the list entry distinguishes talkgroups that have Emergency Alarms and whether the alarms are acknowleged or unacknowleged.
6.4.2
Associated Functions
List entries are selectable by touching them. Once an entry is selected, the operator can make use of the following keys: S SUBS LIST displays the Subscriber Selection list for the corresponding talkgroup. The Subscriber Selection list displays a list of all subscribers currently affiliated to a specified talkgroup or migration group; this includes radio subscribers and operators at the local site who have registered to the talkgroup (or member talkgroups of a migration group). TGRP HIST displays the Talkgroup History list for the selected talkgroup. NEW SDM displays the Short Data Message screen, initialised with the selected talkgroup as the addressee. PREDEF SDM displays the Predefined Short Data Message functionality, initialised with the selected talkgroup as the addressee.
S S S
Helpful Hint
Touching one of the SUBS LIST, TGRP HIST NEW SDM or PREDEF SDM keys without first selecting an entry in the talkgroup selection list displays ERROR - NO ITEM PRIMED in the error message box at the top of the screen. The message NOT AVAILABLE ON THIS RADIO SYSTEM is generated when an attempt is made to send a Pre--defined or an SDM message to a Talkgroup whose Radio System does not support SDM.
6 -- 23
Amb_6.4_Tgroup Selection
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.5
Note:
Last Dispatcher Warnings

6.5.1
Introduction
Last Dispatcher warning consists of two warnings; Last Audio Monitored and Last Event Monitored. Any talkgroup can be configured to generate either, both or no warnings. Last Dispatcher warning operates in two modes. One mode is advisory and results in a warning message being logged. The second mode requires positive action by the demonitoring operator. These two modes are mutually exclusive.
6.5.2
6.5.2.1
Last Audio Monitored

Last Audio Monitored Warning
This warning is only raised when the number of operators audio monitoring the group (this includes those with the talkgroup Selected) changes from one to zero. When the number of operators that are audio monitoring a talkgroup drops to zero, (i.e., when the last operator audio monitoring the talkgroup ceases to do so), a warning message to indicate this is presented to the responsible supervisor and may be added to the system fault log.
6.5.3
Last Audio Monitored Confirmation

When you are audio monitoring a talkgroup and you attempt to demonitor the talkgroup, the system checks to see if you are the only operator audio monitoring the talkgroup. If this is the case then a dialog box is displayed on your screen. The dialog box informs you that you are the last audio monitoring operator and prompts you to either Cancel or Confirm the warning.
CANCEL
Touching the CANCEL key aborts the Demonitor command and no fault message is raised.
CONFIRM
Touching the CONFIRM key continues the Demonitor command and the DS2000 system will check again to see if this was the last operator. If no other operator has taken over audio monitoring the talkgroup a Last Dispatcher warning message may be raised and thus the Supervisor made aware.
Amb_6.5_Last Dispatcher Warning
6 -- 24
DS2000
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
The rest of your operators screen continues to update with events whilst the dialog box is displayed. However you are not able to access any other areas except the above buttons in the dialog box. The following system fault message is associated with the Last Dispatcher Warning Function and may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen:
WARNING: TG YYY NOT MONITORED
Where: YYY is either the talkgroup mnemonic or identifier as configured (maximum three characters).
6.5.4
6.5.4.1
Last Event Monitored

Last Event Monitored Warning
This warning is only raised when the number of operators event monitoring the group with the main screen displayed (operators with the talkgroup selected or audio monitored count as Event Monitored for the purpose of this check) changes from one to zero. When the number of operators that are event monitoring a talkgroup drops to zero, (i.e., when the last operator to be event monitoring the talkgroup ceases to do so), a warning message to indicate this is presented to the responsible supervisor and may be added to the system fault log. An operator is considered to be event monitoring when audio monitoring, therefore, a Last Event Monitored warning is not raised when the last operator that is effectively event monitoring, demonitors a talkgroup whilst another operator still has that talkgroup audio monitored. You are deemed to have ceased event monitoring when you the main screen or event demonitor the talkgroup.
6.5.5
Last Event Monitored Confirmation

When you are event monitoring a talkgroup and attempt to event demonitor the talkgroup, the system checks to see if you are the only operator event monitoring the talkgroup. If this is the case and there are no audio monitoring operators, then a dialog box is displayed on your screen. The dialog box informs you that you are the last event monitoring operator and prompts you to either Cancel or Confirm the warning.
6 -- 25
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Touching the CANCEL key aborts the Event Demonitor command and no fault message is raised.
CANCEL
CONFIRM
Touching the CONFIRM key continues the Event Demonitor command and the DS2000 system checks again to see if this was the last operator. If no other operator has taken over event/audio monitoring the talkgroup a Last Dispatcher warning message may be raised.
Note:
The rest of your operators screen continues to update with events whilst the dialog box is displayed. However, you are not able to access any other areas except the above buttons in the dialog box. The following system fault message is associated with the Last Dispatcher Warning Function and may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen:
WARNING: TG YYY NOT EVENT MONITORED
Where: S YYY is either the talkgroup mnemonic or identifier as configured (maximum three character).
6.5.6
Last Event Monitored On Exit Main Screen
When you attempt to leave the main screen to go to the Preselection Menu screen, a system check is made as to whether there are any event monitored talkgroups for which you are the last event monitoring operator. If this is the case, and there are no audio Monitoring operators for this talkgroup, then this dialog box informs you that you are the last event monitoring operator on one or more talkgroups and prompts you to either Cancel or Confirm. Cancelling aborts the command whilst Confirm completes the command. If the command is confirmed, a check is made as you leaves the main screen of each talkgroup that is event monitored by you. If this check indicates that there are now no operators either event monitoring or audio monitoring that talkgroup, a warning to indicate the event is presented to the responsible supervisor and added to the system fault log. Note: The rest of your operators screen continues to update with events whilst the dialog box is displayed. However, you are not able to access any other areas except the above buttons in the dialog box.
6 -- 26
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Helpful Hint
When a supervisor logs on, if there are talkgroups with no operators covering the group, no warning is generated for those talkgroups, as the warnings were raised when the actual demonitor takes place.
6 -- 27
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.6
Talkgroup History
The call, status code and status event history relevant to a specific talkgroup are displayed in the Talkgroup History list. Emergency alarms received for the specified talkgroup are also indicated.
6.6.1
Talkgroup History List

With an entry selected in the Talkgroup list, or whilst the Subscriber list for a particular talkgroup is displayed, touching the TGRP HIST key displays the Talkgroup History list for the selected talkgroup. The number of entries in the list is restricted to a maximum of 1000. This is a scrollable list with the title:
Call History DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
Where: S The 15 letter field, DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD, is the talkgroup description, eg Talkgroup 1.
The scrollable list displays a history of all calls and logged status codes in this talkgroup since you logged on. Note: The list does not include calls made by operators on the talkgroup, unless the operators are at other sites (and are not accessing the radio system via this sites Remote Access functionality). Talkgroup call histories are retained from all local sessions when you log on remotely. Any activities performed whilst you are in a remote session are appended to existing logs. Histories are retained when the remote session is terminated. Hence you retain information about any group calls made whilst remote. Histories are cleared when you log off from the operator terminal. Histories are retained during takeover logon. The list is time ordered, with the most recent entry at the top. Each entry in the list has the form:
TTT AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS
Where: S TTT is the talkgroup identifier specified in the System Manager configurable talkgroup database (maximum three characters) AAAAAAAAAAAA is the 12 character alias of the radio subscriber or remote operator. HH:MM is the time--stamp of the event. SSSSSSSSSSS is the callers current status which is derived from their current Availability status code or the status event description. For an operator, the field is filled with .s.
S S
Amb_6.6_T_group_History
6 -- 28
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
The Availability status codes and status events are mapped to text messages according to a System Manager configurable database. List entries are displayed in system configurable colours according to the corresponding status code. However, calls or status codes (but not status events) occurring whilst the radio is in emergency mode are displayed with the standard emergency attributes. In addition, a system configurable option controls which types of status codes and status events are displayed. Note: Entries representing calls are drawn in the system configurable colour for PTT events.
6.6.1.1
List Entry Time-Stamps

If the list entry refers to a group call event, the time-stamp will be the time-stamp of the preceding status code notification of which the system has stored information. If no status code is logged for this radio, the field will be filled with .s. If the list entry refers to a status code or status event, the displayed time is the time-stamp of that status code or event.
6.6.2
List entries are selectable. Once an entry is selected, the operator can make use of the following keys: S Touching the MAKE CALL key initiates an individual call to the radio subscriber corresponding to the list entry. Touching the SUBS PROFILE key displays the Subscriber Profile screen for the radio subscriber corresponding to the list entry. Touching the NEW SDM key initiates the short data text entry screen. The screen is initialised with the selected radio subscriber ID, or if no radio subscriber was selected, the specified talkgroup ID as the addressee. Touching the PREDEF SDM key initiates the predefined SDM functionality with the selected subscriber ID as the addressee. Touching the LIST INCDNT key initiates the sending ot a List Incidents command to the Command and Control System server.
Helpful Hint
At system start up, i.e., when the link to the radio system is first established, the status code of a radio may not be known. In this case the status field will be filled with .s. Touching the MAKE CALL, SUBS PROF, NEW SDM, PREDEF SDM or LIST INCDNT keys without first selecting an entry in the talkgroup selection list displays ERROR -- NO ITEM PRIMED in the error message box at the top of the screen. The message NOT AVAILABLE ON THIS RADIO SYSTEM is generated when an attempt is made to send a pre--defined or an SDM message to a talkgroup whose radio system does not support SDM.
6 -- 29
Amb_6.6_T_group_History
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.7
Subscriber Profile
The Subscriber Profile screen illustrated overleaf displays the details of a previously identified radio subscriber. These details are: S S S S S S S S Subscribers alias Current status code and time received Most recent group and individual calls Current or most recent emergency alarm Talkgroup affiliation Subscribers ISSI Associated RUI (if applicable) Radios telephone number
In addition, the screen provides access to a set of specific subscriber operations. These operations are: S S S S S S To make an Individual Call or Short Data Message Subscriber Alias Update Radio check Radio Stun (Disable) and De-Stun (Enable) Radio DGNA (Add and Remove talkgroups) Ambient Listen (Motorola Dimetra Ambient Listen or Motorola Smartzone Remote Monitor) Perform a Terminal Query (To ascertain from the Airwave system whether an associaton exists between this handset and a Radio User) Display associated Radio User Profile details (if applicable) Request a Short Data Message History Radio Resource Groups
S S S Note:
Where AAAAAAAAAAAA is stated in this section, subsitute the radios alias.
Amb_6.7_Subs_Profile
6 -- 30
DS2000
6.7.1
OPERATOR MANUAL Subscriber Profile
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Illustrated below is the information displayed on touching the SUBS PROF key, after first specifying a radio subscriber, e.g., by selecting an entry in a list containing radio subscribers, or after using the Subscriber Search screen (see Chapter 6.8).
Note:
This illustration is to be used as a guide only and may not represent the screens final appearance. The information displayed is described below: S S S S S S S S 0201 -- Radio subscribers alias Checking -- Is the prioritised radio status description On Duty -- Subscribers current status code and time the call was received Chippenham TG2 -- Subscribers most recent talkgroup voice call and time the call started Operator -- Alias of the (CCI port which the) last individual caller to dial this subscriber and the time the call started Emergency -- Subscribers current or most recent emergency alarm status, time of last emergency alarm, time of last acknowledgement, time of last emergency clear Details -- Subscribers current talkgroup affiliation, subscribers ISSI, RUI ( if logged on, just dashes if no one is logged on) and telephone number Details -- Subscribers current talkgroup affiliation, subscribers ISSI, RUI (if logged on -- just dashes if no one is logged on) and telephone number.
Note:
Calls and status codes are shown only if they occurred within the previous twelve hours. If no call or appropriate status code event has occurred in the last twelve hours the appropriate field or fields is filled with .s. The last emergency alarm is always shown, together with the date and time the alarm was received, and the times of when it was acknowledged and cleared. If the alarm has not been acknowledged or cleared the field will be blank. If no emergency alarm has been received from this radio user, the appropriate fields are filled with .s.
Note:
Notification of the events caused by these and other functions may be filtered to be displayed on TETRA Supervisors positions only. This permission is given by the System Manager and is set in the User Types database file. 6 -- 31
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.7.2 Radio Status Description
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
A prioritised radio status description is displayed at the top right hand side of the Profile area. The following descriptions of the radios current status will be colour coded in a system configurable colour: Status Event Priority Description No Talkgroup
Radio de--affiliated from talkgroup High (may indicate radio power down, depending on the radio system infrastructure) Radio check in progress Radio disabled/stunned Ambient listen DGNA Applied to radio <none> Note: Note: Med Med Med Med Low
Checking Disabled Amb. Listen Regrouped <blank>
Medium priority items are prioritised in time order, the most recent being the one displayed. Checking is a transient state, which is only shown whilst the corresponding operator initiated command is in progress. The following sections describe the status events listed in the table above. A non--prioritised radio status description is displayed when actioning the functionality for each status event. Menu tabs give access to the functionality. These functions are dependent on the subscribers host radio system.
6 -- 32
DS2000
6.7.3
OPERATOR MANUAL Main Tab Operations
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Touching the MAIN tab invokes the subscriber operations sub--menu screen.
Touch the SUBS QUERY key to perform a Terminal Query to ascertain from the Airwave System whether an association exists between this handset and a Radio User. Touching the RUI PROF key displays the associated RUI Profile for the associated Radio User. If no radio user is associated, this key will be disabled (as in the above example). Touching the MAKE CALL key attempts an individual call to the indicated subscriber. Touch the RADIO GROUP key to invoke the Radio Group Resource screen. If the selected subscriber belongs to a Resource Group, then that groups details are displayed and the screen is an Update screen. If the selected Subscriber does not belong to a Resource Group then the Resource Group screen is displayed as a Create Group screen with the selected subscriber as the default for the Primary group member. Touch the NEW SDM key to invoke the new SDM screen with the address filled out with the indicated subscriber details. Touch the SDM HIST key to invoke the SDM History list which can display (System Manager configurable) up to the last 50 messages received from the selected subscriber. A non--prioritised radio status description may be displayed when this menu tab is selected. This will display De--affiliation status if the radio has been de--affiliated. If the radio is affiliated then no status will appear.
6 -- 33
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.7.4 Alias Update
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Touching the ALIAS tab invokes the Alias Update sub--menu screen.
This displays the 12--character alias for the subscriber. To enter a new alias, touch the ALIAS tab containing the keyboard icon to invoke the Alphanumeric keypad for touch screen text entry. Entering a new alias and touching the UPDATE ALIAS key (or pressing the ENTER key on the keyboard) sends an update alias message to the radio system for the indicated subscriber. If the update alias message is unsuccessful, the message
ALIAS UPDATE FAILED
is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen and the alias is restored to its original value. The system may be configured to prevent a subscriber from having the same alias as another subscriber. This is achieved by resetting the alias for the duplicate subscriber to its default alias. For the purpose of the duplicate check comparison, case is sensitive, i.e., fred, FRED and Fred are not treated as duplicates. Limitations: S When an alias update is attempted and it would become the same as the default alias of another subscriber, the update fails and the message
ALIAS UPDATE REJECTED
is displayed. System Managers can use the Database Management Application to identify the subscriber with this default alias and update if necessary. S On touching the ALIAS UPDATE key the alias text is validated. An alias of DUPLICATE or any alias where the first three characters are UKN or Def (or any case variation of these) are not permitted and the message
INVALID ALIAS
is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen and the alias is restored to its original value.
6 -- 34
DS2000
6.7.5
OPERATOR MANUAL DGNA - Dynamic Group Number Assignment -
VOLUME 1 RADIO
This function is used to add or remove a talkgroup from the radios DGNA list. Radios are preconfigured with talkgroups in which the radio user is allowed to talk. In situations where a radio user needs to talk to another agency talkgroup, the radio can be reprogrammed on-the-fly using this command. Upon receiving an Add command, the radio automatically updates to include the specified talkgroup and thus allows the radio user to communicate with the added talkgroups members. Note: The ability for the DS2000 to control the DGNA functionality will be dependent on the security group and primary group configuration of the radio subscriber to which the DGNA is to be applied. This configuration ensures that operators with the appropriate privilege to use the DGNA command are only able to update those subscribers with appropriate configuration settings within the service infrastructure. Touching the DGNA tab invokes the DGNA sub menu screen.
The displayed talkgroup is set to the last talkgroup which was added to this subscribers DGNA list. If no talkgroups have been added then a string of dots is displayed. A counter for the number of talkgroups that have been added for this subscriber is also displayed.
6 -- 35
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.7.6 DGNA - Add Talkgroup -
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Touching the ADD TALKGRP key invokes the Talkgroup Selection screen. From this screen a talkgroup can be selected. Only talkgroups that have not already been added will be available. Existing DGNA members are unselectable.
To proceed with the DGNA Add operation select the desired talkgroup from the list, then touch the ADD TALKGRP key. The procedure can be cancelled at any time prior to this by touching the CANCEL key which returns you to the Subscriber Profile screen. When the ADD TALKGRP key is activated the operator position sends a radio DGNA add message to the radio system for the indicated subscriber. Note: The initial response to this message simply records the fact that the radio system has acknowledged receipt of the command. It does not imply that the command will succeed. If the radio regroup message is rejected by the radio system, the error message
DGNA ADD REJECTED
is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen. If the radio regroup message is unsuccessful, the message AAAAAAAAAAAA - DGNA ADD FAILED (where AAAAAAAAAAAA is the radio users alias) is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen. If the radio regroup message is successful, the message AAAAAAAAAAAA - DGNA ADD OK (where AAAAAAAAAAAA is the radio users alias) is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen.
6 -- 36
DS2000
6.7.7
OPERATOR MANUAL DGNA Remove Group
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Touching the REM TALKGRP key invokes the Talkgroup Selection screen. From this screen a talkgroup can be selected. Only talkgroups which are already in the radios DGNA list will be made available. DGNA members which this operator does not have access to, are unselectable.
To proceed with the DGNA Remove operation select the desired talkgroup from the list, then touch the REM TALKGRP key. The procedure can be cancelled at any time prior to this by touching the CANCEL key. This returns you to the Subscriber Profile screen. When the REM TALKGRP key is activated the operator position sends a radio DGNA remove message to the radio system for the indicated subscriber. Upon receiving this command the radio will attempt to remove the specified talkgroup from its internal talkgroup list. Note: Note: The functionality of this command is dependent on the radio system infrastructure. The initial response to this message simply records the fact that the radio system has acknowledged receipt of the command. It does not imply that the command will succeed. If the cancel regroup message is rejected by the radio system, the error message
DGNA REMOVE REJECTED
is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen. On notification from the radio system that the cancel regroup message has suceeded the message AAAAAAAAAAAA - DGNA REMOVE OK (where AAAAAAAAAAAA is the radio users alias) is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen. On notification from the radio system that the cancel regroup message has failed, the message AAAAAAAAAAAA - DGNA REMOVE FAILED (where AAAAAAAAAAAA is the radio users alias) is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen. 6 -- 37
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.7.8 Stun/Enable Radio
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Touching the STUN tab invokes the radio stun/enable sub--menu.
A non prioritised radio status description is displayed in this menu area, this will only display Stun status.
6.7.9
Stunning a Radio
Touching the STUN RADIO key sends a stun radio message to the radio system for the indicated subscriber.
Note:
The initial response to this message only records the fact that the radio system has acknowledged receipt of the command. It does not imply that the command will succeed. If the stun radio request canot be made because the radio system is unavailable or does not support this feature, the error message
STUN REJECTED
is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen. In addition, a Stunned status event is displayed in the talkgroup Events Queue area of operators affiliated with that radios talkgroup. The Radio Status Description field is set to Disabled. If the stun radio request times out, the error message
STUN FAIL - STILL PENDING -
is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen. The Pending Stun state remains even though the initial request has failed and will remain at pending until an affiliation message is received from the radio, which will result in the stun being retried. Note: If an enable command is issued during the pending stun state, then the stun request will be cancelled and the subsequent behaviour will be as described in the next section. On notification from the radio system that the stun radio message has succeeded, an entry is logged to the fault log which, if configured, will be displayed in the message box at the top of the screen. In addition, a Stunned status event is displayed in the talkgroup Events Queue area of operators affiliated with the radios talkgroup, and the Radio Status Description field is set to Disabled.
6 -- 38
DS2000
6.7.10
OPERATOR MANUAL Enabling a Radio
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Touching the ENABLE RADIO key sends an enable radio message to the radio system for the indicated subscriber. Note: The initial response to this message only records the fact that the radio system has acknowledged receipt of the command. It does not imply that the command will succeed. If the enable radio request cannot be made because the radio system is unavailable or does not support this feature, the error message
ENABLED REJECTED
is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen. During the enabling phase the status description will be displayed as Enabling. If the enable radio request times out, the error message
ENABLE FAIL - STILL PENDING -
is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen (the Pending Enable state remains even though the initial request has failed and will remain at pending until an affiliation message is received from the radio, which will result in the enable being retried). On notification from the radio system that the enable radio message has suceeded, an entry is logged to the fault log which, if configured, will be displayed in the message box at the top of the screen. In addition, an Enable status event is displayed in the talkgroup Events Queue area of operators affiliated with the radios talkgroup, and the Radio Status Description field is reset.
6.7.11
Radio Check
Touching the CHECK tab invokes the radio check sub--menu screen.
Touching the BEGIN CHECK key sends a radio check message to the radio system for the indicated subscriber.
The Radio status description field is updated to Checking. When, or if, the radio responds, the text message AAAAAAAAAAAA -- RADIO CHECK OK (where AAAAAAAAAAAA is the radio users alias) is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen and the Radio Status Description field is reset to its current status. In addition, a Check OK status event is displayed in the Talkgroup Events Queue area of all operators affiliated to that radio,s talkgroup. 6 -- 39
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
If the radio check message is rejected by the radio system, the error message
RADIO CHECK REJECTED
is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen, and the Radio Status Description field is reset to its current status. If the check operation times out, the message AAAAAAAAAAAA - RADIO CHECK FAILED (where AAAAAAAAAAAA is the radio users alias) is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen. The Radio Status Description field is reset to its current status. In addition, a Check Fail status event is displayed in the Talkgroup Events Queue area of the operators affiliated with that radio,s talkgroup. A non--prioritised radio status description is displayed in this menu area. This will only display Radio Check status. Note: Each command will time-out if no response is received from the radio system within a factory configured time limit.
6.7.12
Ambient Listen
The Ambient Listen function may be configured to allow instant access to start the feature or to require authorisation for use. Authorisation may be required for certain User Types if an authorisation code has been defined for the site. Check with your System Manager. If an authorisation code is not required, or an ambient listen is already in progress, then touching the AMB LSTN tab invokes the following Ambient Listen sub--menu screen.
When the operational need arises and/or authorisation is given to listen in to a subscriber, touching the LISTEN key starts ambient listening. The CANCEL key is used to abort a Listen requests which has not yet commenced.
6 -- 40
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
If your system database is configured with an Authorisation Code string and your User Type requires the use of the code, touching the AMB LSTN tab will display an edit box and a numeric keypad as shown below:
On entering the Authorisation Code the edit box will echo asterisks (*) for each digit entered. You can use either the keyboard ENTER key or the LISTEN key to start the Ambient Listen function. The system validates the entered code against the code stored within the DS2000 database configuration file and if valid, the Ambient Listen request will be issued. If you enter an invalid code then the message INVALID AUTHORISATION CODE is displayed in the message area and the edit box cleared ready for a subsequent attempt. If the code is valid but the Ambient Listen request is unsuccessful, the edit box is not cleared, and the request may be repeated simply by touching the LISTEN key There are two types of Ambient Listen, each of which is tied to a particular type of radio system; Motorola Smartzone Ambient Listen and Motorola Dimetra Ambient Listen. Only Motorola Dimetra Ambient Listen is mentioned in this manual.
6.7.12.1
Motorola Dimetra Ambient Listen

Motorola Dimetra version of Ambient Listen is based upon an Individual Call and obeys individual call rules, so can only be heard by the operator initiating Ambient Listen. An Ambient Listen request will pre--empt any existing normal priority individual call that the radio is in. 6 -- 41
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
An Ambient Listen call may not be placed in a connect group as this would prevent all members of the connect group from transmitting. If an operator attempts an Ambient Listen to a radio for which an outstanding individual callback status exists, the DS2000 does not consider the Ambient Listen request to be a callback. The Ambient Listen proceeds regardless and the callback request remains outstanding. The system prevents an operator from transmitting whilst an Ambient Listen call is active (and not on hold) at that position. Motorola Dimetra Ambient Listen can be in one of four states: Idle, Pending, Ringing or Listening.
Idle State
In this state, the LISTEN key is enabled and the CANCEL key is disabled. If the LISTEN key is pressed a Listen request is issued over the network for this subscriber. If this is successful the state will be changed to Pending otherwise it remains in the Idle state. If the Ambient Listen request is rejected by the radio system, the error message
AMBIENT LISTEN REJECTED
is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen.
Pending State
The Pending state is where an Ambient Listen request has been issued but the radio has not yet started to transmit and the ringing indication has not been received by the operator. This state is entered when the LISTEN key has been pressed and the Ambient Listen request has been successful. In this state, the LISTEN key is enabled and the CANCEL key is disabled. This is to prevent both keys from being disabled should the message indicating that the radio has stopped transmitting not being received. In addition, the CALLS key indicates that a call is pending. If the LISTEN key or the CALLS key is pressed whilst in the Pending state, the action will fail and the system remains in the Pending state. If the radio has reverted back to its Idle state, the LISTEN key and the CALLS key operate in the normal way. If the radio system is unable to allocate a resource for the call or is unable to locate radio, the error message AAAAAAAAAAAA - AMBIENT LISTEN FAILED (where AAAAAAAAAAAA is the radio users alias) is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen and the system goes to the idle state. If the radio indicated in the request is unknown to the radio system, the error message AAAAAAAAAAAA - AMBIENT LISTEN REJECTED (where AAAAAAAAAAAA is the radio users alias) is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen and the system goes to the idle state. When a status message is received indicating that the radio is ringing the state is changed to Ringing. Note: A Motorola Dimetra Ambient Listen can only be cancelled once the radio unit is ringing or during the call, i.e., in states Ringing or Listening.
6 -- 42
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Ringing State
VOLUME 1 RADIO
In the Ringing state a Listen request has been accepted and the radio has signalled that it is ringing (even though no actual ringing is taking place and the radio auto--answers). In this state the LISTEN key is disabled, the CANCEL key is enabled. Also the CALLS key indicates the ringing state. When a status message is received indicating that the Ambient Listen has started, the state will change to Listening. If this indication is not received within a preconfigured amount of time, the system reverts to the Idle state. In this state, if you press the CANCEL key, the system will go to the Idle state. It is possible for this state to be skipped entirely and the Ambient Listen call go straight from the Pending State to the Listening state.
Listening State
This is the period during which the radio is transmitting. This state is entered when a status message that the radio has begun to transmit is received. The message (where AAAAAAAAAAAA is the radio users alias) is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen. The Radio Status Description field is set to Amb Listen. In this state the LISTEN key is disabled, the CANCEL key is enabled and the CALLS key and Current Call field of the Current Calls Area assume the Ambient Listen colour. Note: On some systems a factory configurable message may be displayed in the area above the LISTEN and CANCEL keys to give the operator standard information about Ambient Listen calls. If a status message is received indicating that the radio has stopped transmitting the state reverts back to Idle. Unlike the Motorola Smartzone functionality, Motorola Dimetra Ambient Listen does not time--out; generally the operator has to cancel the function using one of the methods described. A non prioritised radio status description is displayed in this menu area; this only displays Ambient Listen status. Ambient Listen can also be cancelled by any of the methods by which an normal individual call can be cleared. The following error conditions can occur:
AAAAAAAAAAAA - AMBIENT LISTENING -
6 -- 43
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Message
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Comment
Unable to execute; command times out. If an alias updated is attempted to DUPLICATE or where the first three characters are UNK or Def. If an alias is updated and it is the same as the default alias of another subscriber. If an alias is updated with a * in it. Unable to locate radio; command times out. Unknown radio. Unable to add a talkgroup; command times out. Unknown radio/talkgroup, or too many have been added. Unable to remove command times out. a talkgroup;
Helpful Hint
Alias Update Failed
Invalid Alias
Alias Update Rejected
Invalid Character AAAAAAAAAAAA -Radio Check Failed AAAAAAAAAAAA -Radio Check Rejected AAAAAAAAAAAA -DGNA Add Failed AAAAAAAAAAAA -DGNA Add Rejected AAAAAAAAAAAA -DGNA Remove Failed AAAAAAAAAAAA -DGNA Remove Rejected AAAAAAAAAAAA -Stun Failed AAAAAAAAAAAA -Stun Rejected AAAAAAAAAAAA -Enable Failed AAAAAAAAAAAA -Enable Rejected AAAAAAAAAAAA -Ambient Listen Failed AAAAAAAAAAAA -Ambient Listen Rejected Ambient Listen Rejected Invalid Authoristaion Code AAAAAAAAAAAA -Subscriber Query Failed AAAAAAAAAAAA -SDM History Display Failed Operation Failed
Unknown radio/talkgroup. Unable to stun radio; command times out. Unknown radio/talkgroup. Unable to enable radio; command times out. Unknown radio/talkgroup. System unable to allocate resources for audio monitoring, unable to locate radio. Unknown radio/talkgroup. Ambient listen command is rejected by the radio system. Ambient Listen Authoristaion Code is invalid. Airwave system is unavailable for queries. Unable to retrieve the SDM History or the command times out. Voice database not available.
6 -- 44
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
6.8
Note:
Subscriber Search
6.8.1
Searching for a Subscriber

The Subscriber Search screen can be invoked by touching the SUBS SEARCH key. The Subscriber Search screen allows you to search for a radio subscriber or a radio user. S S Radio subscribers can be searched for, based on Alias or ISSI Radio users can be searched for, based on RUI or ASSI
The Subscriber Search screen can also be used to enter a subscriber address directly, if known, to be used by a referring screen. Descriptive text header Subscriber Search option tabs
Enter search string Search function key
Function keys vary as they are dependent on where the screen has been invoked from A search screen can be invoked in one of two ways: S Subscriber Search -- When requesting a subscriber search; you may search by Alias, ISSI, RUI and ASSI. Validation Search -- When validating an ISSI number which is not correct, e.g., via the Dial Pad or SDM function; you may search by either Alias or ISSI.
S Note:
The function keys and search option tabs that are presented are dependant on which search screen was invoked.
6--45
Amb_6.8_Subs Search
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
To carry out a search, touch the tab (Alias, ISSI, RUI or ASSI) that corresponds to the address type you wish to search for. Address text can be entered either from a keyboard or by invoking the on--screen keyboard, displayed when touching the text field. The SEARCH key becomes available once text is entered in the address window. To find an alias using the on--screen keyboard, touch the ALIAS tab then touch the text field. This invokes the alphanumeric keyboard screen. To find an alias starting with the letter A, for example, enter A* in the text window. Now touch the ALIAS SEARCH key. The Subs Search screen is invoked with the address in the edit box, e.g., A*, and the previously disabled SEARCH key is active. Note: The wildcard * is supported, but only at the end of the string, e.g., A*, and characters are not case sensitive. Touching the SEARCH key initiates a search, and returns all the results that fit the search criteria. They are presented as a scrollable list with a maximum of eight results per page as shown in the following screen. Note: A search result is in alphanumerical order and limited to a maximum of the first 100 nearest matches per search. If no results were found, the message
NO RESULTS FOUND
is displayed in the message bar.
Descriptive header text Validation search, ISSI and Alias only
Search string * Scrollable list of results
Icon depicting binding
Function key enabled as list entry Alias00016 is selected
6--46
Amb_6.8_Subs Search
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
The results are split in to four columns: S S The first column shows the matches to the search string that was entered. The second column displays the following icon to indicate when there is a binding (association) between the Radio and a User.
The third column shows either the User, or the Radio that is bound. If there is no binding then this column will display - - to indicate that there is no associated -Radio/User.
The fourth column shows an icon to indicate whether the Radio is a primary member of a Resource Group
a secondary member of a Resource Group
or an independant
6.8.2
Using the Search Results

Selecting the required entry from the scrollable search result list enables those menu keys available for that type of entry, e.g., if the search is by user and the selected RUI or ASSI has no bound subscriber the RUI PROF key is enabled and the SUBS PROF, MAKE CALL and NEW SDM keys are disabled. However if the selected item demonstrates binding, all four keys are enabled. The possible menu keys available are: S S S S The SUBS PROF key to display the Subscriber Profile screen. The RUI PROF key to display the associated RUI Profile screen. The MAKE CALL key to instigate an individual call, displaying the Individual Call screen. The NEW SDM key to invoke the SDM screen with the address filled out with the indicated subscriber details. The USE RESULT key to transfer the search result back to the screen from which the Subscriber Search screen was invoked. The CANCEL key to return you to the screen from which the Subscriber Search screen was invoked. 6--47
Amb_6.8_Subs Search
S S
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Helpful Hint
Maximum results per search is limited to the first 100 matches. If the wildcard ( * ) is entered anywhere except at the end of a text string, the message
INVALID CHARACTER
is displayed.
6--48
Amb_6.8_Subs Search
DS2000
6.9
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Subcriber Selection List

The Subscriber Selection list displays a list of all subscribers currently affiliated to a specified talkgroup or Migration Group; this includes radio subscribers and operators at the local site who have registered to the talkgroup (or member talkgroups of a Migration Group). When the term talkgroup(s) is referred to within this section it includes Migration Group(s).
6.9.1
Subs List Function Key

The SUBS LIST key is found by accessing the Talkgroup List. To view a list of all the subscribers that are currently affiliated to a particular talkgroup, touch an entry in the Talkgroup List. With that entry now primed, touch the SUBS LIST key. A list of subscribers for that talkgroup is displayed.
6.9.2
Subscriber List
The Subscriber list for a selected talkgroup is a scrollable alphabetically ordered list. The title of the list is displayed in the following format:
Subscriber List DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
(TTT)
where: S DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD is the description of the talkgroup, e.g., Talkgroup 1 (maximum 15 characters). TTT is the talkgroup identifier.
Each entry in the list has the format

AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS
where: S AAAAAAAAAAAA is the alias of the radio subscriber, or of any operator who is currently affiliated to the talkgroup. HH:MM is the time-stamp of the last status code logged for the radio subscriber, or for an operator it is the time-stamp of the operator registration event. SSSSSSSSSSS is the callers current status, derived from their current status code.
S Note:
If no status code is logged for a radio, the time-stamp and status fields will be filled with .... When you are displaying a subscriber list and an incoming group call event is received from a subscriber in that list, .that subscriber entry in the list changes colour (to the System Manager defined colour). The indication is displayed for the duration of the call if the subscribers talkgroup is selected or audio monitored. If the subscribers talkgroup is event monitored the subscribers entry indicates the incoming call for a system predefined time. The talkgroup must be either event monitored, audio monitored or selected in order for incoming call indications to be displayed on the subscriber list.
Note:
This functionality is a factory configurable option. 6 -- 49

Amb_6.9_Subs List Selection
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.9.3 Associated Functions
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Touching the MORE key displays a further selection of function keys within the screen. Touching the TGRP HIST key displays the Talkgroup History screen for the specified talkgroup. This operation is always valid. Touching the NEW SDM key initiates the short data text entry screen with the selected radio subscriber as the addressee, or if no selection, with the specified talkgroup. Once an entry corresponding to a radio user is selected, you can make use of the following function keys: S S S S S Touching the MAKE CALL key initiates an individual call to the radio user. Touching the SUBS PROFILE key invokes the Subscriber Profile screen with the details of the selected radio subscriber displayed. Touching the NEW SDM key invokes the short data text entry screen with the selected radio subscriber as the addressee, Touching the LIST INCDNT key initiates the sending of a List Incident command to the Command and Control server, Touching the SDM HIST key invokes the SDM History list screen containing up to the last 50 SDMs received from the selected subscriber,
6.9.4
Refresh
The Subscriber list is a snapshot of users affiliated to the talkgroup at the time the list was first displayed. If notification of a subscriber leaving the talkgroup occurs whilst this list is displayed, the corresponding entry for that subscriber in the list is displayed in a highlighted style. The Status field is also changed to the corresponding status event description for radio change talkgroup affiliation or de-affiliation as appropriate. For example, when a subscriber moves to a new talkgroup, a Reaffil TTT status is displayed (where TTT is the identifier of the new talkgroup). The REFRESH key flashes to indicate an update. If a new subscriber or operator joins the talkgroup whilst the list is displayed, the REFRESH key changes state/flashes. Touching the REFRESH key updates the list with any new affiliated subscribers and removes any subscribers who have de-affiliated from the talkgroup since it was last displayed. Any current selected entries are deselected and the list is scrolled to the first page. On notification of a status code from the radio, the corresponding list entry updates automatically.
Helpful Hint
At system startup, i.e., when the link to the radio system is first established, the status code of a radio may not be known; in this case the status field is filled with ...s. In the event of a CADI failure the incoming group call event will only be shown for those talkgroups audio monitored by at least one operator. Touching the SUBS PROFILE or the MAKE CALL key without first selecting an entry in the list displays INVALID OPERATION in the error message box at the top of the screen.
Amb_6.9_Subs List Selection
6 -- 50
DS2000
6.10
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Radio User Identity (RUI)

Availability of this functionality is dependent on the connecting radio system. If it is not supported the relevant keys or menu tabs will be greyed out. The RUI Profile screen can be accessed from the Subscriber Profile screen (see Chapter 6.7) or after accessing the Subs Search screen and using the RUI tab for the search.
6.10.1
RUI Introduction
The RUI Profile screen displays details relating to a previously identified radio user. These details are: S Radio Users Identity (RUI) -- The RUI is used to identify a Radio User (individual or function). The RUI may be a numeric or alphanumeric user ID. ASSI -- This is a special form of radio user ID that fits into the TETRA SSI address space. A particular user may have an RUI or an ASSI, or both. Alphatag. The current binding state of the radio.
S S
In addition, the screen provides access to a set of specific radio user operations. These operations are: S S S Display associated Subscriber Profile details (if applicable). Setup an association between a Radio User and a handset. Perform a Radio User Query to ascertain from the Airwave infrastructure whether an association exists between this Radio User and a handset.
6.10.2
RUI Profile Screen

After specifying a radio user, e.g., from the Subcriber Profile list, touching the RUI PROF key invokes the RUI Profile screen as shown below.
6 -- 51
Amb_6.10_RUI Profile
VOLUME 1 RADIO
The screen displays the following information: S RUI0001 -- Radio Users Identity.
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Details
S S 20001 -- Is the ASSI. Radio User 0001 -- Radio users alphatag.
Association
S UNKNOWN -- The users current association state with a radio. The following table shows the different association states. Time -- This is the date and time of the association update. State Text Booked On Logged On Bound by the System Booked Off Logged Off Unbound by System Timed Out Implicit Association Implicit Disassociation Unknown Description of State User has been booked on by an operator. User has logged on to Airwave. User has been implicitly bound by the system. User has been logged off by an operator. User has logged off Airwave. User unbound by the Airwave system. Airwave system unbound the user due to log/book on timeout. DS2000 system association due to database update. DS2000 system has unbound user due to database update. Unknown to the system.
6.10.3
Main - Sub Menu The MAIN tab is automatically selected when the RUI Subs screen is invoked.
6.10.3.1
Subscriber Profile Key

Touching the SUBS PROF key invokes the Subscriber Profile screen for the associated handset. If the radio user is not currently associated with a handset this key is greyed out.
6.10.3.2
Rui Query Key

Touching the RUI QUERY key issues a request to the Airwave system to confirm whether this user is currently associated with a handset.
6 -- 52
DS2000
6.10.4
OPERATOR MANUAL Book - Sub Menu -
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Touching the BOOK tab invokes the Book Radio sub menu screen as shown in the following illustration.
Initially the ISSI edit box is blank and either: Touching the SEARCH key invokes the Subscriber Search screen so that a Radio address can be found. When an address is found the RUI profile display is presented to you, with the desired address entered into the ISSI edit box, or Touching the ISSI keypad key invokes the Numeric keypad display for touch screen numeric entry. The ISSI, SEARCH and BOOK ON keys will be greyed out if there is a binding between the User and a Radio, as show above.
When there is an ISSI address in the edit box, after touching the BOOK ON key, a book on message is sent to that radio address. If the ISSI address is unknown to the system, the subscriber search screen is presented to you, displaying a list of nearest matches to the ISSI entered. You may now: S S S Choose one of these matches as the radio. Initiate a new search for a radio. Cancel the Book On request.
The BOOK OFF key is greyed out if there is no binding between the user and a radio. Touching the BOOK OFF key sends a book off message to the radio system for the indicated radio user and their associated ISSI. If the command is successful then the message
RADIO USER BOOKED ON or RADIO USER BOOKED OFF
is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen. If the command is unsuccessful then the message
RADIO USER BOOKING FAILED
6 -- 53
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.10.5 New Pin - Sub Menu -
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Touching the NEW PIN tab invokes the Change Radio PIN sub menu screen as shown in the following illustration.
This display contains a text box which is initially blank. Touching the CHANGE PIN key sends a change radio user pin message to the Airwave System for the indicated radio user. If the command is successful then the radio users new PIN is displayed in the PIN box and the message
RADIO USER PIN CHANGED OK
is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen. If the command is unsuccessful then the message
RADIO USER PIN CHANGED FAILED
Helpful Hint
The Radio User Query command will be rejected with a failure message if no viable connection to the Airwave Aliasing sub--system exists. The Book On/Off command is still available even if no viable connection to the Airwave Aliasing sub--system exists as it will update the data held on the Tetra Gateways Alias database.
6 -- 54
DS2000
6.11
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Call Events
The Call Events log displays a history of calls (both group and individual) and status codes and events, as well as emergency alarms and callback requests. Status code updates are deemed as standard (National) codes and Trust defined codes. These status codes are sent by radio users and are displayed as system configurable text messages. Status events are generated by the radio system as a confirmation (or side-effect) of an action initiated by either the radio user or by an operator; these are also displayed as system configurable text messages.
Note:
A history of calls etc., relating to a specified talkgroup are displayed in the Talkgroup History.
6.11.1
Call Event History Log

Touching the CALL EVENTS key invokes the call events history list. This is a scrollable, selectable list entitled Call Events List. It displays a history of calls and status information received by you since logon to a maximum of 1000 entries. The list displays: S S Incoming individual calls Talkgroup calls, i.e., PTTs by radio subscribers and operator calls originating from remote sites Individual callback requests Emergency alarms Status codes and events
S S S
The list is time ordered, with the most recent entry at the top. This list therefore provides a near complete history of the most recent activity, as seen by you. Note: Events may be selectively filtered for addition to this list based on Event and whether the operator is a Tetra supervisor. The default format for an entry in the queue is either:
TTT is the talkgroup identifier specified in the System Manager configurable talkgroup database (maximum three characters). AAAAAAAAAAAA is the alias of the radio subscriber (maximum 12 characters) If the alias is longer than 12 characters, then the last 12 characters are displayed, preceded by ... HH:MM is the start time of the incoming call or event notification. SSSSSSSSSSS is either the callers current status, derived from their current status code, or the status event description (as specified in the System Manager configurable options below). For calls originating from operators at remote sites this field is filled with ...s.
S S
or 6 -- 55
Amb_6.11_Call Events
VOLUME 1 RADIO
That of an Individual Call queue list entry:
AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
HH:MM indicates the start time of the call.
Additional entries displayed as specified below: S Emergency alarms are displayed in the same colours as those used by the Emergency Display list. Callback requests are displayed in the same colours as those used by the Callback Display list. Incoming individual calls are displayed in the same colours as those used by the Individual Call Queue list.
6.11.1.1
The call events history list is up to date when it is first displayed. Any subsequent events are not displayed in the list until the screen is exited and re-entered. List entries are selectable. A list entry is selected by touching it. Once an entry corresponding to a radio user is selected, the operator can make use of the following keys: S S Touching the MAKE CALL key initiates a call to the radio subscriber. Touching the NEW SDM key initiates the short data text entry screen with the details of the selected radio subscriber displayed. Touching the PREDEF SDM key initiates the predefined SDM functionality screen with the details of the selected radio subscriber displayed. Touching the SUBS PROF key initiates the Subscriber Profile screen with the details of the selected radio subscriber displayed. If available, touching the LIST INCDNT key initiates the sending of a List Incidents command to the Command and Control server.
Helpful Hint
At system startup, i.e., when the link to the radio system is first established, the status code of a radio making a group call may not be known. If this is the case the status field is filled with ...s. The following system error report message may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen: The message
NOT AVAILABLE FOR THIS SUBSCRIBER
is displayed when an attempt is made to send a predefined SDM or an SDM message to a subscriber whose Radio System does not support SDM.
Amb_6.11_Call Events
6 -- 56
DS2000
6.12
6.12.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Individual Calls
Single Point to Point Call
To make an individual call, you can select a subscriber using one of the following methods:
6.12.1.1
Individual Call via a List You can scroll through the chosen list to find the desired radio user.Individual calls from an operator position to a radio subscriber can be made from one of a number of lists or in some cases, via the Dial Pad. To make an individual call, you can select a subscriber from one of the following: S S S S S S S S S S S Talkgroup Events list Subscriber Selection list Individual Call History list Emergency Display list (depending on radio terminal configuration) Callback list Individual Subscriber Search screen Call Event list SDM Received Message list SDM Sent Message list SDM History list Mobile Resource List
To make a call, you highlight the desired radio users list entry by touching it, then touch the MAKE CALL key. When answered, the call is automatically placed in the Active Call area of the list.
6.12.1.2
Individual Selection by ISSI Operation of the Dial Pad is as a normal telephone dial pad with the addition of DIAL TEL, SDM ISSI and DIAL ISSI keys. When an ISSI for a subscriber is known, touch the DIAL PAD key or the DIAL PAD entry in the Pop Up Menu associated with the TELEPHONE key to display the Dial Pad screen. Enter the ISSI of the subscriber to be called by touching the appropriate figures on the keypad. The dialled figures are displayed in the 20--character field situated above the keys. Touch the DIAL ISSI key. When a connection is established touch and hold the TX key when talking to the subscriber.
6 -- 57
Amb_6.12_Individual Calls
VOLUME 1 RADIO
6.12.1.3
Mobile Resource Screen
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The Mobile Resource screen can be used to initiate simultaneous point--to--point calls to all members of a Resource Group with the individual call being established with the first subscriber to answer. Alternatively, a single point--to--point call can be initiated directly to the required subscriber using the Resource Entry Menu. Once this call has been initiated the Individual Tetra Calls page is automatically displayed.
6.12.1.4
Resource Group Screen The Resource Group configuration screen can be used to initiate simultaneous point--to--point calls to all members of a Resource Group with the individual call being established with the first subscriber to answer. Once an individual call has been initiated from this screen, the Individual Tetra Call page is automatically displayed, and any unsaved changes made on the Resource Group screen are discarded.
6.12.2
Interupt Priority Individual Call

An individual call to a radio subscriber may be made as a high priority (or Interrupt Priority) call by priming the MAKE URGNT key prior to placing the call. Making such a call will eject the radio subscriber from any active normal priority individual call and force it into the new call. Interrupt priority calls may be identified on the individual calls list or subscriber list (or INDIV CALLS key, if enabled through a configurable option), by the interrupt priority call colour.
6.12.3
Multi Point Call

A Multi Point call initiates individual calls to all members of a Resource Group who are currently not busy. The Individual Tetra Call page is automatically displayed showing that a call has been made to the Resource Group. Once one of the members answers the call, the other call attempts are cancelled and the answering call is fully connected. The Individual calls are first made to the Primary of the Resource group followed by the Secondary members.
6.12.4
Individual Call in Progress

Once the radio user answers the call, you are connected to them as an individual (half duplex) call. You can then use PTT to transmit to the radio as normal.
Note:
The INDIV CALLS key, if enabled through a factory configurable option, indicates that the outgoing call is connected and displays the radio users alias. The call details are also displayed in the Active Call field of the Individual Tetra Call List (accessed by touching the INDIVIDUAL CALLS entry in the Pop Up Menu associated with the LISTS key ) in the following format:
WWW AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS
Where: S WWW is the three character field representing emergency or normal priority call
6 -- 58
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
S S S AAAAAAAAAAAA is the 12 character subscriber alias HH:MM is the time the call was initiated SSSSSSSSSSS is the 11 character call status mnemonic
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Types of Individual Calls list entries are as follows: Normal Calls

... AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS
Emergency Calls
EMG AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS
Interrupt Priority Calls

URG AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS
Ambient Listen Call

AMB AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS
It is also possible through a factory configurable option to clear the current call by un--touching the Active Call entry. If the radio user is also in the Incoming Call queue, the call entry is taken as an incoming call rather than an outgoing call. If the radio user is in the Callback Requests queue, the queue entry is removed once the individual call is initiated. You can clear the call before the radio user answers, or whilst the call is in progress, by touching the Active Call entry in the Individual Calls screen.
6.12.5
Radio Group Key

Whilst an Individual Call is in progress the RADIO GROUP key may be used to navigate to the Resource Group Configuration screen displaying the Resource Group details for the in progress call. The primary purpose of this feature is to enable easy navigation for rapid Alias update. The following error reports are associated with the Make Individual Call function and may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen when an attempt is made to make a single individual call: a) The message
INVALID OPERATION
Helpful Hint
is displayed in the message area when an attempt is made to make an individual call if you already have an open connect group, an individual call in progress and auto hold is disabled or a selected Talkgroup or radio and you are a radio type. b) The message
INDIVIDUAL CAPACITY REACHED
is displayed in the message area if the radio subsystem is unable to allocate the relevant resource.
6 -- 59
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The following messages are reported for error conditions that are detected by the Tetra System and sent back to the DS2000: Priority 1 2 Op Console Message Call Failed -- Radio In Group Call Call Not Answered -- May Be In Group Call Call Failed -- Radio Engaged Call Failed Description The radio is already engaged in a group call (see note 1 below). The radio user does not answer the call or the radio is already engaged in a group call (see note 2 below). The radio is already engaged in a private individual call. The Tetra System encountered an internal error and was unable to place the call (channel failed ...etc -- see note 3 below) or failed to respond to the Begin Call request. The radio is out of coverage. The radio is turned off or not affiliated The radio has been disabled (stunned). The radio user terminated the call without answering it.
3 4
5 6 7 8
Call Failed -- Out Of Coverage Call Failed -- Radio Turned Off Call Failed -- Radio Stunned Call Terminated
1: If supported by the Tetra System, this message is generated if the radio user is already involved in a group call. 2: This message is generated if the radio user does not answer the call within a (Tetra System configured) preset period of time after the radio starts ringing. Note that if the radio is in a group call then it may not actually ring but the call will still proceed until timed out by the the system. 3: If the Tetra System reports any error conditions other than those shown above then the DS2000 will map these onto the Call Failed (Tetra System internal error) condition. In addition this message is generated if the DS2000 fails to receive any response from the Tetra System before an internal (configurable) timeout period has elapsed. Reporting of these error conditions is subject to the ability of the specific Tetra System to detect them and report them back to the DS2000. In a Multi--Point call it is possible for each call to fail for a different reason, but only one failure message will be displayed on the OP Console. Note: The error condition priority shown in the table above is used to determine which message is displayed, with 1 being the highest priority and 8 the lowest.
6 -- 60
DS2000
6.13
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Inbound Individual Calls

Incoming individual calls from radio subscribers to a specific operator ITSI are held in the Individual Call queue of that operator, (below any calls on Hold). Incoming calls in the queue can be answered in order via the INDIV CALLS key or in any order from the Individual Calls list. Emergency calls are placed in the Individual Call queue ahead of non-emergency calls. Non-emergency calls are then held in order of arrival (i.e., oldest first).
Note:
All references to emergency individual calls are conditional on the radio system being able to support this functionality.
6.13.1
Note:
CCI Port Assignments

CCI ports are the interface point for third party systems, i.e., the DS2000 to the Airwave Service. Incoming individual calls arriving at a CCI port are presented to a single operator or to a group of operators as configured by the System Manager. The call can then be answered by use of the INDIV CALLS key or via the Individual Calls list. Once the call has been answered the call indication is removed from all other operator screens that received that call.
6.13.2
Individual Call Key

The INDIV CALLS key is used to show and answer the head of the Individual Call queue. This is similar to answering a telephone call and connects you to the calling party on a point to point basis. You can then use PTT to transmit to that radio subscriber as normal. On use of this key, the call at the head of the queue is answered, the key changes to display either the details of the next call that is waiting to be answered, as well as a count of the number of queued calls (not including the call in progress), or, if no calls are awaiting, the address window is blank. Additionally, the active call is displayed in the Individual List.
6 -- 61
Amb_6.13_Inbound Ind Call
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The presentation format of inbound INDIV CALLS is shown below.
No Individual Calls (displayed in minimised Radio queue)
Five Individual Calls (displayed in minimised Radio queue)
The INDIV CALLS key below shows that the subscriber with the alias of Df10004 is at the head of the Individual Calls queue with a total of five calls waiting to be answered.
If further incoming calls arrive or are pending once a call has been answered, the key indicates that further calls are pending by a change of display attributes, along with an indication of the number of queued calls. An audible alarm is generated when there are unanswered calls in the queue. The audible alarms can be configured by the system manager to be enabled or disabled for each specific User Type. If the connected individual call is terminated by either party and there are no further calls queued, the INDIV CALLS key reverts to its normal state with no alias displayed.
6 -- 62
DS2000
6.13.3
OPERATOR MANUAL Individual Tetra Calls List
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Touch this key to display the Individual Calls list. Accessing this list allows unanswered incoming calls to be answered out of order.
6.13.3.1
Active Calls
The Active Call details field format is:
Where: WWW is the three character field representing the type of call (as listed below) AAAAAAAAAAAA is the 12 character subscriber alias HH:MM is the time the call was initiated SSSSSSSSSSS is the 11 character call status mnemonic
Types of Active Call entries are listed below: Normal Calls

Emergency Calls (these entries are not available on all systems)

Interrupt Priority Calls (these entries are not available on all systems)
URG AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS
Ambient Listen Call

AMB AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS
6.13.3.2
List Entries
The Individual Calls List area consists of the Active Call area and the Individual Calls list which can contain up to five entry types (each with different colour attributes) in the following order: Calls-Hold (three types: Normal, Interrupt Priority and Dimetra Ambient Listen) Emergency incoming calls Normal incoming calls
On-Hold Calls (All types)

HLD AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS
Emergency Calls
Normal Calls
6 -- 63
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The emergency calls are queued in order of arrival, as are those of normal priority. If there are a large number of calls in the queue the scroll bar can be used. The maximum Incoming Calls queue size is 100 per operator. To take an incoming queued call out of order, touch the list entry which highlights the relevant call, then touch the TAKE CALL key. When a call is connected, the caller details are removed from the keys display and the tally is decremented by one. The call is automatically put in the Active Call area of the Individual Calls List. You can then use PTT to transmit to the radio subscriber as normal. You are not able to accept a new incoming call, initiate a new outgoing call, or make a group call whilst a previous individual call is in progress. You must clear the current individual call or place it on Hold before making or taking a new call. If you attempt to accept an incoming call whilst having: An individual call in progress, the attempt is successful after the system automatically places the individual call on hold provided auto hold feature is enabled, otherwise the attempt is rejected. A radio or talkgroup selected, the attempt is successful after the system automatically deselects the talkgroup or radio provided the operator profile is not set for Radio Priority, otherwise the attempt is rejected. A telephone call is in progress, the attempt is successful after the system automatically places the telephone call on hold. An intercom call is in progress, the attempt is successful after the system automatically cancels the operator from the intercom call. An open Connect Group the attempt is rejected.
If a radio user in the Incoming Call queue terminates the call before you are able to answer it, the queue entry is removed from the list. In addition to queued incoming individual calls, the Individual Calls List also displays calls that are on hold. Individual calls that are on hold show at the head of the list. These have a different format and are displayed in the On Hold colour of the type of call being held.
6 -- 64
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
The following system fault message is associated with the Individual Call function and may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen: The message
ANSD OUT OF SEQ OP XXX
PROBLEM?
USER YYYYYYYYY is displayed when the call
accepted is not at the head of a call queue. where XXX is the operator ID and YYYYYYYYY is the abbreviated alias of the radio user. The following error report messages are associated with the Individual Call function and may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen: The message INVALID OPERATION is displayed when an attempt is made to answer an incoming individual call if you already have one of the following in progress: an open connect group, an individual call (and Auto Hold is disabled), or a talkgroup or radio selected and your User Profile is configured as having Radio Priority. The system fault report INVALID INDIVIDUAL ON PORT XX is displayed if an indivdual call is received on a CCI port mode not configuerd to receive individual calls, i.e., 3,7 & 8, where XX is the CCI port number.
6 -- 65
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.14
In-progress Individual Calls

CCI ports are the interface point for third party systems, e.g., the DS2000 to the Airwave Service.
Note:
Incoming individual calls arriving at a CCI port are presented to a single operator or to a group of operators as configured by the System Manager in the database. In-progress individual calls can be cleared either by the radio user or by the operator. To clear an in-progress individual call, or to abort an outgoing call request prior to connection, touch the Individual Call List entry in the Active Call area. You are not able to accept a new incoming call, initiate a new outgoing call, or make a group call whilst an individual call is in progress. You must clear (or place on Hold) the current individual call before making or taking a new call. When either the radio subscriber or yourself clears the individual call, the Active Call details field in the Individual Calls list is cleared. If the radio interface fails during the call, the call is cleared down and the operator notified.
Helpful Hint
The following system error report messages are associated with the Clear Individual Call function and may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen: The message is displayed if the radio interface (CCI Port) fails whilst an individual call is in progress. Where XX is the port number and YYYYYYYYY is the name of the Tetra Gateway the port was being accessed by.
CCI XX @ YYYYYYYYY FAILED
The message
CALL CLEAR FAIL is displayed when an attempt is made by you to clear the individual call whilst the radio is transmitting.
During a Call In Progress, if there is a TRIC (Trunked Radio Interface Card) failure, a FAULT condition may be indicated on the key as illustrated below:
Amb_6.14_Clearing Ind Call
6 -- 66
DS2000
6.15
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Individual Call Hold

The Airwave network does not support this functionality. Calls placed on hold (for Airwave users) will drop out after approximately 4.5 seconds. There are three types of individual calls: normal priority, interrupt priority and Motorola Dimetra Ambient Listen. Whilst an individual call is in progress, it is possible to put it on Hold in order to answer/make other calls or to broadcast on talkgroups. Up to five calls can be kept on Hold by an operator at any one time, although this may be further limited by configuration settings. On Hold calls can be resumed by taking each call off Hold in any order.
6.15.1
Placing a Call On Hold

When an individual call is in progress, (normal priority, interrupt priority or Ambient Listen) you can place the call on Hold by touching the HOLD CALL key.
When a call is placed on Hold, the in-progress call becomes suspended and the entry in the Active Call details field is removed. An entry for the call is then placed in the Individual Call list in the On Hold colour and format. Each type of individual call (normal priority, interrupt priority or Ambient Listen) has its own on Hold colour. On Hold call entries in the Individual Call List are placed in the order of initial reception, above any unanswered calls. (This is so that if calls are placed on and off Hold more than once, they do not become shuffled.) References to these entries in the Individual Call list are referred to as the On Hold list. On Hold entries have the following format: HLD AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS Where: S S S AAAAAAAAAAAA is the 12 character radio alias HH:MM is the time the call was initiated SSSSSSSSSSS is the 11 character call status mnemonic
The INDIV CALLS key is updated with any new calls. Once the maximum number of on Hold calls for an operator is reached, any further attempt by that operator to place calls on Hold is barred until the number of On Hold calls is reduced.
6 -- 67
Amb_6.15_Ind Call Hld
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.15.2 Taking a Call Off Hold
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
To take a call off hold, select the required held entry in the individual calls list, then touch the TAKE CALL key.
When a call is taken off Hold, the entry in the Individual Calls list is removed and appears in the Active Call details field in the format illustrated below:
Where: S S S S WWW is the three character field representing emergency or normal priority call AAAAAAAAAAAA is the twelve character subscriber alias HH:MM is the time the call was initiated SSSSSSSSSSS is the 11 character call status mnemonic
A call may only be taken off Hold when there are no individual calls in progress. If such a call is in progress, it must be either terminated or put on Hold before taking a previous call off Hold. If an on Hold call is terminated by the radio user, the call is deleted from the on Hold list.
Helpful Hint
The following error messages are associated with the On Hold/Off Hold function and may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen: The message OPERATION DENIED -- HOLD LIMIT is displayed when an attempt is made to place a call on Hold when the number of On Hold calls is already at the maximum permissible. The message INDIVIDUAL CALLS ON HOLD is generated when an attempt is made to take a call off Hold when the operator has already an individual call, a telephone call or intercom call in progress. The message INVAILD OPERATION is generated when an attempt is made to place a call on Hold if the facility is disabled in the User Profile database file.
Amb_6.15_Ind Call Hld
6 -- 68
DS2000
6.16
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Individual Call History

The history of an operators individual calls is displayed but does not include individual calls currently in progress. This list is a history of individual calls taken and made by you.
6.16.1
Individual Call History List

Pressing the INDIV HIST key displays the Individual Call History list; this is a scrollable list. The title text displayed at the top of the list is the Individual Call History and contains a history of all the completed individual calls made by and taken by you since logon, up to a maximum of 1000 entries. If a call is completed whilst this list is displayed, e.g., if the radio subscriber hangs up the call, the list is not updated automatically. However, the list updates to include this entry when it is next displayed. Individual call histories are retained from local sessions when you log on remotely. Any activities performed whilst you are in a remote session are appended to existing histories. Histories are retained when you log off from a remote site. Histories are cleared when you log off from the operator terminal. However, histories are retained during takeover logon. The list is time ordered, with the most recent entry at the top. Each entry in the list has the format:
AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS
Where: S AAAAAAAAAAAA is the 12 character alias of the other party (radio subscriber or remote operator) involved in the call. HH:MM (first occurrence reading left to right) is the start time of the call. HH:MM (second occurrence reading left to right) is the end time of the call. SSSSSSSSSSS is the other partys status at the start of the call, derived from their current Availability status code. For a call originating from a remotely located operator, or if the current Availability status code is unknown, this field is filled with .s.
S S S
The Availability status codes and status events are mapped to text messages according to a System Manager configurable database. Incoming calls to you can be distinguished from outgoing calls by a system configurable colour scheme.
6 -- 69
Amb_6.16_Ind_Call_Hist
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.16.2 Associated Functions
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
List entries are selectable. A list entry is selected by touching it. Once an entry is selected, you can make use of the following keys: S The MAKE CALL key initiates an individual call to the radio subscriber corresponding to the list entry. The SUBS PROF key displays the Subscriber Profile screen for the radio subscriber corresponding to the list entry. The SDM key initiates the short data text entry screen initialised with the selected radio as the addressee. The PREDEF SDM key initiates the predefined short data message functionality screen. When a predefined message is selected the SDM screen is invoked with the selected radio as the addressee and the selected predefined message populating the text field. If available, touching the LIST INCDNT key initiates the sending of a List Incidents command to the Command and Control server.
Helpful Hint
At system startup, i.e., when the link to the radio system is first established, the status code of a radio may not be known. If this is the case individual calls made before a status code is established will be filled with .s. Touching the SUBS PROFILE, MAKE CALL, NEW SDM or PREDEF SDM keys without first selecting an entry in the list displays ERROR -- NO ITEM PRIMED in the error message box at the top of the screen. The message NOT AVAILABLE FOR THIS SUBSCRIBER is generated when an attempt is made to send a predefined SDM or an SDM message to a Subscriber whose Radio System does not support SDM.
Amb_6.16_Ind_Call_Hist
6 -- 70
DS2000
6.17
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Individual Callback Operation

Radio subscribers requesting an operator to call them back can issue a Callback Request status message. These requests are held in a prioritised Callback Requests queue. The queue is prioritised in the following way: urgent requests are placed to the front of the queue in order of reception, followed by normal requests, also in order of reception. Each priority type has different colour attributes. Individual callback requests in the queue can be answered in order via the INDIV CALLBACK key, or in any order from the displayed Callback Request list. An individual callback request from a radio subscriber is presented to all operators that are affiliated to that talkgroup, i.e., have that talkgroup Selected, Monitored or Event Monitored. If the Notify all callbacks flag is set to enabled in the User Types database file, then all individual callback requests are presented to operators logged on as that User Type regardless of affiliation.
6.17.1
Queuing Callback Requests

Entries in the Callback Requests queue are held in descending order of priority, with requests of the same priority held in order of arrival (i.e., oldest first). The maximum Callback Request queue size is 500 entries (per operator). Requests that already exist in the queue will have their priority upgraded or downgraded with the previous entry being removed from the list. If a duplicate request is received, i.e., the same priority level, then it will be ignored and the original request is maintained in its position in the queue.
6.17.2
Individual Callback Requests Key

The INDIV CALLBACK key is used to show and answer the head of the Callback Requests queue. On touching this key, you make an individual call to the requesting party and the requesting subscribers alias is no longer displayed in the text window of the INDIV CALLBACK key. Once the requesting radio subscriber has answered the call, you can use PTT to transmit to them as a normal individual call. Once an individual callback has been initiated by any operator and the call has been answered by the requesting subscriber, the following can be observed at all operator positions: S The request is removed from the Individual Callback Requests queue and hence the Individual Callback Requests list The INDIV CALLBACK key shows the alias of the new queue head, or reverts to its base state if there are no further requests pending for the operator The INDIV CALLBACK key will show the decremented count of the number of queued requests, or the count is removed if there are no further requests pending for the operator
If the individual call fails to be established, the subscriber is busy or the subscriber does not answer the call, the Callback Request will remain in the Callback Requests Queue and the Individual Callback Requests List.
6 -- 71
Amb_6.17_Indiv Cback Operation
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
No Individual Callbacks (displayed in minimised Radio queue)
Three Individual Callbacks (displayed in minimised Radio queue)
The INDIV CALLBACK request key below shows that the subscriber with the alias of Df10008 is at the head of the Callback Requests queue with a total of three requests queued.
If further requests arrive, the key indicates this by a change of the number of queued calls. If a request of higher priority than the head of the queue is received, the new queue head is indicated on the key.
6.17.3
Restrictions Accepting an Individual Callback

If you attempt to respond to a callback request whist having: S S An open Connect Group, the attempt is rejected. A radio or talkgroup selected, the attempt is successful after the system automatically deselects the talkgroup or radio provided the operator profile is not set for Radio Priority, otherwise the attempt is rejected. An telephone call in progress, the attempt is successful after the system automatically places the telephone call on hold. An individual call in progress, the attempt is successful after the system automatically places the individual call on hold provided auto hold is enabled, otherwise the attempt is rejected. An Intercom call, the attempt is successful after the system automatically cancels you from the intercom call.
6 -- 72
DS2000
6.17.4
OPERATOR MANUAL Individual Callback List
VOLUME 1 RADIO
To allow callbacks to be serviced out of order, it is possible to display the list of unserviced callbacks in the GWA (General Work Area) of the screen by use of the CALL BACK key. The Tetra Callback list shows the order in which the callback requests are queued, with each line representing a single request and the colour indicating its priority. (The priority of a callback request is encoded in the callback status code). Each line has the following format:
Where: S S S S TTT is the three character talkgroup identifier AAAAAAAAAAAA is the 12 letter subscriber alias HH:MM is the time the call was initiated SSSSSSSSSSS is the 11 character call status mnemonic
If numerous requests are present in a queue, the scroll bar can be used to scroll through the list. To take a callback request out of order, the required request can be answered by selecting the relevant list entry, then touching the RETURN CALL key. When the return call is initiated the INDIV CALLS key indicates the fact (including displaying the alias) and the request is removed from the displayed list.
6.17.5
Clearing a Callback Request

To remove a callback request from the queue without answering it, select the desired entry in the Tetra Callback list, then touch the CLEAR CALLBK key. The request is removed at all operator positions.
6.17.6
Automatic Clearing of Callback

Once added to the queue, callback requests remain in the queue until they are manually cleared without replying, until a successful call has been established to the requesting subscriber or they are aged out (if configured) by the system, i.e., where the callback request is automatically cleared from the queue after a time preconfigured by the System Manager.
6.17.7
Intersite Notification of Callback Acceptance

Since callback requests are non--directed events from the Tetra radio system they may be received at more than one site for multi--site systems. In order to ensure that the callback request is only responded to once, a callback acceptance at one site can be notified to all other connected remote access sites (resulting in the callback request being automatically cleared from the queues at those other sites). This is typically a Sungard Engineer (System Manager configurable on some systems) configurable option and is dependent on the systems being configured to have Messaging Sessions established between them. 6 -- 73
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Note:
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The notification to all other connected remote access sites will only occur after a successful call has been established to the subscriber or when the callback request has been cleared using the CLEAR CALLBK key from the Individual Callback Requests List.
6.17.8
Callback Alarm
An audible alarm is generated when a callback enters the callback queue. Different alarm tones can be defined to differentiate between Urgent and Normal callback requests. Both alarms can be configured by the System Manager to be enabled or disabled for each specific User Type. The following error reports are associated with the Callback Request function and may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen: The message INVALID OPERATION is displayed after an attempt is made to return a callback request if you already have an open connect group, an individual call in progress and Auto Hold is disabled or has a selected talkgroup or radio and the Users Profile is set for Radio Priority. The message INDIVIDUAL CALL CAPACITY REACHED is displayed when an attempt is made to return a callback request if there are no available CCI ports. The callback request remains in the queue.
Helpful Hint
6 -- 74
DS2000
6.18
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Group Callback Operation

Radio subscribers requesting an operator to join their talkgroup can issue a Group Callback request status message. These requests are held in a prioritised Group Callback requests queue. The queue is prioritised in the following way: urgent requests are placed to the front of the queue in order of reception, followed by normal requests, also in order of reception. Each priority type has different colour attributes. Group Callback requests in the queue can be answered in order via the GROUP CALLBACK key, or in any order from the Group Callback list when displayed. Group Callback requests are presented to all operators that are affiliated to the requesting subscribers talkgroup ie have that talkgroup Selected, Monitored or Event Monitored. If the Notify of all callbacks flag is set to enabled in the User Types database file, then all group callback requests are presented to operators logged on as that User Type regardless of affiliation.
6.18.1
Queuing Callback Requests

Entries in the Group Callback queue are held in descending order of priority, with requests of the same priority held in order of arrival (i.e., oldest first). The maximum Group Callback queue size is 500 entries (per operator). Requests that already exist in the queue will have their priority upgraded or downgraded with the previous entry being removed from the list. If a duplicate request is received i.e., of the same priority level, then it is ignored and the original request is maintained as is its position in the queue.
6.18.2
Group Callback Requests Key

The GROUP CALLBACK key is used to show, and answer the head of the Group Callback queue. On touching this key, the affiliated subscribers talkgroup becomes automatically Selected and the page that the talkgroup is on is automatically displayed. The group callback request entry is then removed from the queue. Any talkgroups that were previously Selected or Monitored automatically change to either their Event Monitored or Monitored state, depending on how the TGRP Base State factory configurable option is set. Any Selected radios automatically revert to the Monitored state. Once an operator has initiated a group callback reply, the following can be observed at all operator positions: S The request is removed from the Group Callback queue and hence the Group Callback list. The GROUP CALLBACK key shows the alias of the new queue head, or reverts to its base state if there are no further requests pending for the operator. The GROUP CALLBACK key shows the decremented count of the number of queued requests, or the count is removed if there are no further requests pending for the operator.
6 -- 75
Amb_6.18_Grp Cback Operation
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
No Group Callback (displayed in minimised Radio queue)
One Group Callback (displayed in minimised Radio queue)
The GROUP CALLBACK key below shows the three character mnemonic talkgroup alias -003, which the requesting subscriber is affiliated to, and the alias of the subscriber -Df10009. This request is at the head of the Group Callback Requests queue with a total of one request queued.
If further requests arrive, the key indicates this by a change of the number of queued calls. If a request of higher priority than the head of the queue is received, the subscriber details of the new queue head is displayed in the window of the key. On successfully accepting a Group Callback request the radio page containing the talkgroup is automatically displayed with the talkgroup automatically set to Selected. Any talkgroups that were previously Selected or Monitored return to either Event--Monitored or the Monitored state depending on how the TGRP Base State factory configurable option is set. Any previously Selected radios are returned to the Monitored state.
6.18.3
Restrictions Accepting Group Callback

An attempt to respond to a Group callback request is rejected if you have any of the following: S S S An individual call in progress A telephone call in progress An intercom call in progress
The following are restricted if the subscribers affiliated talkgroup is in any of the following: S S A closed Connect Group An open Connect Group
6 -- 76
DS2000
6.18.4
OPERATOR MANUAL Group Callback List
VOLUME 1 RADIO
To allow group callbacks to be taken out of order, it is possible to display the list of unserviced group callback requests in the GWA (General Work Area) by use of the GRP CALLBK list key typically found via the LISTS tab. The Group Callback Requests list shows the order in which the callback requests are queued, with each line representing a single request and the colour indicating its priority (the priority of a callback request is encoded in the callback status code). Each entry line has the following format:
Where: S S S S TTT is the three character talkgroup identifier AAAAAAAAAAAA is the 12 letter subscriber alias HH:MM is the time the call was initiated SSSSSSSSSSS is the 11 character call status mnemonic
If numerous requests are present in a queue, the scroll bar can be used to scroll through the list. To take a callback request out of order, the desired request can be answered by selecting the relevant list entry, then touching the CALL TALKGR key. When a response to the group callback request is initiated by you, the requesting subscribers affiliated TALKGROUP key automatically becomes Selected displaying the requesting subscribers alias. The request is automatically cleared from the displayed list at all positions.
6.18.5
Clearing a Callback Request

To remove a callback request from the queue without answering it, select the entry in the Group Callback list, then touch the CLEAR CALLBK key. The request is removed at all operator positions.
6.18.6
Automatic Clearing of Callback

Once added to the queue, callback requests either remain in the queue until they are manually accepted or cleared, or they may be aged out (if configured) by the system, i.e., where the callback request is automatically cleared from the queue after a time preconfigured by the System Manager.
6 -- 77
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.18.7 Intersite Notification of Callback Acceptance
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Since callback requests are non--directed events from the Tetra radio system they may be received at more than one site for multi--site systems. In order to ensure that the callback request is only responded to once, a callback acceptance at one site can be notified to all other connected remote access sites (resulting in the callback being automatically cleared from the queues at those other sites). This is a Sungard Engineer configurable option and is dependent on the systems being configured to have Messaging Sessions established between them.
6.18.8
Callback Alarm
An audible alarm is generated when a callback enters the Group callback queue. Different alarm tones can be defined to differentiate between Urgent and Normal Group callback requests. Both alarms can be configured by the System Manager to be enabled or disabled for each specific user type.
Helpful Hint
The following error reports are associated with the Group Callback request function and may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen: The message INVALID OPERATION is displayed after an attempt is made to return a group callback request and you already have an individual call, a telephone call or an intercom call in progress. The message TG MON FAIL -- CAPACITY REACHED is displayed after an attempt is made to return a group callback request when the system is unable to allocate a CCI port. The group callback request remains in the queue. The message TALKGROUP IN CONNECT GROUP is displayed when an attempt is made to return a group callback request when the talkgroup is in a connect group.
6 -- 78
DS2000
6.19
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Emergency Calls
Before a radio user can make an emergency call, the radio must first issue an emergency status report. Emergency status reports are initiated by the radio user putting the radio into emergency mode. Emergency status reports from radio subscribers on a particular talkgroup are presented to all operators that have the Notify of all emergencies flag set in the User Types database. They are also presented to operators that do not have the flag set, but are affiliated to that talkgroup (i.e., have that talkgroup selected, monitored or event monitored). However, operators that are not affiliated to the talkgroup can neither acknowledge nor clear the emergency alarm until they monitor or select the talkgroup. Emergency status reports can be presented to operators even if the subscriber is unknown (not currently in the TETRA Gateway subscriber database). In this case the emergency alarm is acknowledged and cleared by any operator who has the talkgroup monitored or selected as normal. Emergency status reports are presented to operators that have the Notify of all emergencies flag set in the User Types database even if the talkgroup to which the subscriber is currently affiliated is unknown (not defined in the Tetra Gateway database). In this case it is possible for operators who have the Access unknown emergencies flag set in the User Types database to acknowledge and clear the emergency alarm internally within the DS2000 system without being affiliated to the talkgroup.
6.19.1
Emergency Alarms
Emergency status reports (emergency alarms) from radio subscribers are held in a queue in order of arrival. Status reports in the queue can be acknowledged in either of two ways: in order of arrival by touching the EMERGENCY key, or in any order from the Tetra Emergency Calls list. All outstanding emergency alarms in the system, whether they be acknowledged or unacknowledged, are held centrally within the system such that as you perform a logon or take--over logon, the list of outstanding alarms relevant to you may be retrieved. When you have received notification of an emergency status report, the border of the relevant TALKGROUP key takes on the unacknowledged emergency report colour as illustrated below. The Emergency Alarm tones will sound until you or another operator acknowledges the alarm. If the Talkgroup key is hidden on another page and is in the Monitored state, the MORE RADIO key changes colour state and flashes (System Manager configurable). No Emergency (displayed in minimised Radio queue)
Two Emergencies (displayed in minimised Radio queue)
6 -- 79
Amb_6.19_Emerg Calls
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Two Emergencies (displayed on Emergency key)
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
If the Mobile Resource Screen is being displayed, the emergency will be indicated on the appropriate Mobile List entry by an EMG legend. If the emergency has been raised by a Resource Group member then the EMG legend will be shown on the Mobile List entry for the Resource Group. Whenever you receive notification of an emergency status report, the message area at the top of the screen indicates the following message:
Emergency from AAAAAAAAAAAA Tg TTT
Where S S AAAAAAAAAAAA is the 12 character subscriber alias TTT is the talkgroup identifier of the subscriber
This emergency status report can be inhibited on a system wide basis by the System Manager if required. If the system receives an emergency status report from a subscriber who does not currently exist in the subscriber database, but who is affiliated to a known talkgroup, then the alias will be defined as one of the following: 1) If the organisation has elected to use the Force Identifier in Unknown Alias functionality the alias will be UNK aaaaaaaa, where aaaaaaaa is up to eight alphanumeric characters representing the organisation to which the Subscriber ISSI belongs. Otherwise the alias will be as UNKxxxxxxxxx, where xxxxxxxxx is the last nine digits of the Subscribers ISSI.
2)
The subscriber is automatically added to the database and the alias can be updated using the Alias Update facility. If the system receives an emergency status report from a subscriber who does exist in the subscriber database but who is affiliated to an unknown talkgroup, the alias displayed will be that defined in the subscriber database but the talkgroup identifier will be set to ***. Such an emergency status report is only displayed to certain users (System Managers configurable option), and it is possible for certain users to acknowledge and clear the emergency without having the associated talkgroup Monitored. If the system receives an emergency status report from a subscriber who does not exist in the subscriber database and who is affiliated to an unknown talkgroup, the alias will be defined as one of the following: 1) If the organisation has elected to use the Force Identifier in Unknown Alias functionality the alias will be UNK aaaaaaaa, where aaaaaaaa is up to eight alphanumeric characters representing the organisation to which the Subscriber ISSI belongs. Otherwise the alias will be UNKxxxxxxxxx, where xxxxxxxxx is the last nine digits of the Subscribers ISSI.
2)
6 -- 80
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
The Talkgroup identifier will be set to ***. Such an emergency status report is displayed to certain users (System Managers configurable option), and it is possible for certain users to Acknowledge and Clear the emergency without having the associated talkgroup Monitored.
6.19.2
Emergency Key
The EMERGENCY key is only displayed in the Integrated Call Queue area whilst there are unacknowledged emergency status reports pending. The key displays the alias of the oldest unacknowledged emergency status report as well as the count of unacknowledged emergency status reports.
Note:
When an Emergency is acknowledged, the screen action following is dependent on how your system has been configured. This can be as follows or as described in Section 6.19.8. When the EMERGENCY key is touched, it does not answer a call, but it acknowledges the alarm to the radio system and removes the alarm from the queue. If you are not affiliated to the talkgroup but have received the alarm indication, when the EMERGENCY key is touched you are informed that the operation was rejected. If however you have Emergency Alarm Flushing privileges the rejection may be overriden (see Section 6.19.6). The Tetra Emergency Calls list is automatically displayed to you as you are the acknowledging operator. The radio system indicates to all operators aware of the emergency that you have recognised the status report and have acknowledged the event. If there are further outstanding emergency alarms, the EMERGENCY key is updated with the alias of the oldest unacknowledged status report and the count on the key is decremented. If there are no further outstanding emergency statuses on that talkgroup, the TALKGROUP key border (or the MORE RADIO key if the talkgroup is hidden) assumes the colour of the Acknowledged emergency status until the emergency is cleared. If there are no further outstanding emergency statuses on any affiliated talkgroup, the EMERGENCY key is removed.
6 -- 81
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.19.3 Emergency Calls List
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The EMERG key is used to display the list of all active emergency status reports in the system. The list allows emergency status reports to be acknowledged out of order, individual calls to be made, predefined SDMs to be sent and emergency status reports to be cleared. The list is ordered to show emergency status reports in the following order: 1) 2) 3) 4) Note: Acknowledged at this operator position Unacknowledged Acknowledged by another operator position Acknowledged externally
The order of 1 and 2 can be altered by System Manager configuration. Each line represents a single report and is colour coded to indicate which category it falls into. Each category is displayed in time order, with the oldest entry first. The format of a list entry is shown below: OPI TTT AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS Where S S S S S TTT is the three character talkgroup identifier AAAAAAAAAAAA is the 12 character subscriber alias HH:MM is the time the status report was initiated SSSSSSSSSSS is the 11 character report status mnemonic OPI is the three character Op ID of the operator who acknowledged the emergency
If there is a large number of status reports in the queue you may need to scroll through the list. The maximum number of entries in the Emergency Calls list is 500. To acknowledge a status report out of order, the required status report should be selected by touch, and then the ACK EMERG key should be touched. The status report is then acknowledged and the list entry moves from the Unacknowledged category to Acknowledged at this operator position. The count on the EMERGENCY key is decremented and its displayed alias updated (if the head of the queue was chosen). When a status report is acknowledged, the list entry for the report moves from the Unacknowledged category to Acknowledged at another operator position category at all other operator positions displaying that emergency. The count and alias on the EMERGENCY key is updated for all. The Op ID of the operator who acknowledged the emergency is displayed to other operators to inform them which operator acknowledged the emergency. If a radio user initiates an emergency status report on more than one talkgroup, each instance of the alarm must be acknowledged and cleared independently. Touching the PREDEF SDM key with an emergency primed invokes the predefined short data message functionality. The emergency does not need to have been acknowledged to use this function.
6 -- 82
DS2000
6.19.4
OPERATOR MANUAL Clearing Emergency Calls
VOLUME 1 RADIO
All transmissions from a radio that is in Emergency mode are considered part of an emergency call. The emergency call can be terminated by either of the following: S S The radio user taking the call out of Emergency mode An operator clearing the emergency by use of the CLR EMERG key -- dependent on the Terminal Radio that is in use (i.e., does it support this functionality)
An emergency call can only be cleared after it has been acknowledged. To clear a call, prime the entry in the list to be cleared by touching it, then touch the CLR EMERG key.
If an emergency call has been cleared by the radio user (by clearing the Emergency mode) without the initial emergency status report having been acknowledged by an operator, the status report is still queued and displayed, and requires operator acknowledgement. When an emergency has been acknowledged and cleared, the emergency indication disappears from the Emergency Calls list on all operators screens. If an emergency alarm has been acknowledged and cleared, but the radio user has not cleared the emergency, a fresh emergency alarm is generated if a new call is received from that radio. If you acknowledge an emergency call and log off with the emergency call still active, the call is only reassigned to an operator logging on to the same workstation. However, any other operator affiliated to the Talkgroup would still be able to accept the emergency call. Note: Once an operator acknowledges an emergency, then only they are able to clear the emergency, unless the clear any emergency privilege has been granted in the User Type database. In this case, any operator with this privilege is able to clear another operators acknowledged emergency.
6.19.5
External Acknowledgement
An emergency can be acknowledged by an external source, e.g., an operator in another control room. If the emergency is acknowleged externally the three character Op ID displays EXT on the correponding entry in the list at all DS2000 operator positions. If an emergency is cleared externally, the emergency is not cleared on the list. It is possible for any DS2000 operator to clear such an acknowledged emergency.
6 -- 83
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.19.6 Emergency Alarm Flushing
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
If you do not have the privilege to force emergency alarm clearance and you attempt to acknowledge an emergency alarm or clear an acknowledged emergency alarm, the action fails and a message is displayed alerting you that the action was unsuccessful. It is effectively warning you that the talkgroup should be Monitored or Selected for this operation. If you have the privilege to force emergency alarm clearance and attempt to acknowledge an emergency alarm, an Acknowledged Emergency Alarm dialogue box is displayed prompting you to confirm or cancel the action.
Touching the CONFIRM key acknowledges the emergency alarm. It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that flushing the alarm in this manner is the correct method to be employed. This operation is logged and a system fault message is generated indicating that the Acknowledge operation has been performed.
ALARM FLUSH ACK TG YYY BY OP ZZZ
Where: S S YYY is the three character talkgroup ID or designated mnemonic ZZZ is the three character operator number
Touching the CANCEL key aborts the operation.
6 -- 84
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
If you have the privilege to force emergency alarm clearance and attempt to clear an emergency alarm, a Clear Emergency Alarm dialogue box is displayed asking you to confirm or cancel the action.
Touching the CONFIRM key clears the emergency alarm. It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that flushing the alarm in this manner is the correct method to be employed. This operation is logged and a system fault message is generated indicating that the Clear operation has been performed.
ALARM FLUSH CLR TG YYY BY OP ZZZ
Where: S S YYY is the three character talkgroup ID or designated mnemonic ZZZ is the three character operator number
Touch the CANCEL key to abort the operation.
6.19.7
Emergency Alarm Timeout

Once added to the queue, emergency alarms either remain on the queue until they are manually acknowledged and cleared, or they may be aged out (if configured) by the system, i.e., where the emergency alarm is automatically acknowledged and cleared from the queue after a set time, preconfigured by the System Manager.
Note:
Only unacknowledged emergencies and emergencies acknowledged externally are aged out.
6 -- 85
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.19.8 Auto Select on Emergency Acknowledgement
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
If the system is configured to Auto Select on Emergency Ack when you acknowledge an emergency alarm, in accordance with the standard audio priority rules the following sequence of events happens automatically at the operator position: S S S The talkgroup with the alarm is Selected The emergency is acknowledged The radio page containing the Selected talkgroup with the alarm, is displayed to you
The table below describes what happens to all the remaining Monitored or Selected radios and talkgroups once the above sequence has been successful, depending on what the Auto Select on Emergency Ack database value is configured to: Database Value D E M Monitored Talkgroup Event Monitored Remain Monitored Selected Talkgroup Event Monitored Monitored Monitored Radio Pre--selected Remain Monitored Selected Radio Pre--selected Monitored
Functionality Disabled
If a talkgroup cannot be Selected, but can be Monitored, then the emergency is still acknowledged and the radio page containing the monitored talkgroup with the alarm is displayed to you. If the talkgroup cannot be Monitored by you, e.g., due to a lack of CCI ports, then the functionality described in the Section Emergency Alarm Flushing applies. Note: The system operation corresponds to the relevant table entries above. The Factory Default configures the system to operate in either the E or M database value setting.
6 -- 86
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Helpful Hint
The following error report messages are associated with the Emergency function and may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen: The message
CALL NOT CLEARED - UNACKED EMERGENCY -
is displayed when an attempt is made to clear an emergency call that has not been acknowledged. The message
MONITOR TALKGROUP BEFORE ACK OR CLR
is displayed when an attempt is made to acknowledge or clear an emergency call without having the associated talkgroup monitored or selected. The message
NOT ACKED BY THIS OP
is displayed when an attempt is made to clear an emergency that has been acknowledged by another operator, if the operator does not have the clear any emergency privilege granted. The message
ERROR - NO ITEM PRIMED -
is displayed when an attempt is made to initiate the Predefined SDM functionality with no entry primed. The message
is displayed when an attempt is made to send a Predefined SDM or SDM message to a subscriber whose radio does not support SDM functionality.
6 -- 87
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.20
Short Data Message Functions

You can make use of the Status and Short Data services offered by Airwave and perform the following functions: Outbound Data Messages Select the destination of the message to be sent Enter text to be contained within the message Define options for message acknowledgements Send the current message Select a previously sent short data message from a list Display the delivery status of previously transmitted messages
Inbound Data Messages View a received message Delete a received message when it has been read Display a list of received messages View historical messages
All messages are currently sent as SDS Type 4 short text messages. You cannot leave the Main screen if you have any unread messages in the Received List unless you have the privilege to do so. If an attempt is made to leave the Main screen when there are unread messages the following screen is invoked:
If you have the privilege rights to leave the Main screen the following screen is invoked:
Amb_6.20_Short_Data_Functs
6 -- 88
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
6.20.1
Note:
Accessing SDM Functions

A blank SDM screen is displayed, either when you first log on and select the SDM Key followed by NEW SDM or when you carry out an initial Sub Search, select a radio terminal from the search results, and then select the NEW SDM key. Once an SDM has been sent the blank SDM screen will not be displayed again; as the text from the previous SDM remains populated within the text field. There are three keys that can be used to enter the SDM functions.
SDM Key Touch the SDM key when it is in its normal state, and the Received Message list is invoked.The illustration below shows the two states the SDM key can be in. An envelope icon is displayed on the key to indicate that a new message has been received. The icon is removed when all unread messages have been read.
NEW SDM Key The NEW SDM key can typically be found by invoking other screens, e.g., Talkgroup List, Subscriber Profile screen (some systems have this key permanently displayed). Touching the NEW SDM key invokes the New SDM Message screen.
SDM HIST Key The SDM HIST key can be accessed from the Talkgroup Subscriber List or the Subscriber Profile screen. Touch this key to invoke the SDM History screen.
6 -- 89
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.20.2

Note:
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Sending a Short Message

When viewing the SDM screen, touching a key with a keyboard on it invokes either a numeric or alphanumeric keyboard.
Selecting a Destination from a List A short data message can be directed to an individual radio subscriber or a Talkgroup. The destination address of a short message can be selected from a list, e.g., the Talkgroup Subscriber List. The subscriber is selected by touching the relevant entry in the list. The NEW SDM key associated with the list is then touched to take the operator to the Short Data Message screen. The destination address is already completed in this screen. The address type is automatically selected using this method. The screen illustrated below is displayed if the NEW SDM key is touched from a list containing individual radio users, e.g., the Talkgroup Subscriber List. The ALIAS tab will be active and the alias destination address is completed in the Alias field.
The screen illustrated below is displayed when the NEW SDM key is touched from a list containing talkgroups, e.g., the Talkgroup list. The TGRP tab is active and the talkgroup destination address is completed in the Talkgroup field.
6 -- 90
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Note:
Message delivery acknowledgements are not allowed for text messages addressed to talkgroups (see Message Acknowledgements). Lists that have a NEW SDM key option are: Talkgroup List, Subscriber list, Call Events list, Status Codes list and Individual Call History list.
Selecting a Destination by Other Methods An alternative method of selecting a destination is to open the Short Data Message screen directly, by pressing the general NEW SDM key on the lower row of function keys (not available on all systems). This takes the user to the Short Data Message screen with the ALIAS tab active and the Alias destination field empty. You can choose to enter the alias manually or browse from a list of alias addresses by touching the BROWSE key. Alternatively, you can select any of the ISSI or TGRP tabs to enter an alternative type of destination address. Entering an Address Manually If you type an address directly without using the BROWSE key, the address you enter is automatically checked for validity when you attempt to send the message. If the check fails, the message INVALID SDM ADDRESS is displayed in the message bar and the Subscriber Search screen is automatically invoked. If the address is in any way ambiguous, the Subscriber Search screen is automatically invoked listing possible destination addresses. Browsing for an Address If you touch the BROWSE key, a new screen is displayed. This allows you to browse for Alias, ISSI or Talkgroup. On exiting the Subscriber Search screen or Talkgroup Selection screen, the destination address field on the Short Data Message screen is automatically completed. 6 -- 91
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Entering Message Text
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The message to be sent is typed into the Message Text field. The message has a maximum length, so as you type in text, a count of remaining characters is shown in the Characters Remaining field. The message text can be deleted by touching the CLEAR key. When a new operator logs on, the text is cleared.
Message Acknowledgements It is possible to request confirmation of the message being delivered to the radio terminal. By touching the MESSAGE ACK key, the Message Ack state can be toggled either on or off, with a tick (on) or cross (off) icon indicating its current state. The default state can be set in the database by the System Manager to be On or Off when operators log on. Message acknowledgements cannot be requested when sending a SDM to a talkgroup. Note: Message acknowledgements are subject to the capabilities of the radio infrastructure.
Sending the Message The message can be sent by touching the SEND key. Note: If the address is invalid the send operation is denied with an error message displayed, and the search screen is activated for you to search for the address. If the address is ambiguous, then the Subscriber Search screen is automatically invoked listing possible destination addresses (see Entering an Address Manually). To abort sending a message, you can touch the main screen QUIT key.
Helpful Hint
Message - Sending Errors Message sending can fail for a number of reasons. These are as follows: Destination not reachable -- The radio may be out of coverage, switched off, or the message queue in the radio may be full. The message
MESSAGE NOT SENT THIS TIME
is displayed in the message area and the message marked as Failed in the Sent message list. Message sending failure -- The message could not be sent due to a network related fault or the system has timed-out waiting for a response. The message
MESSAGE SENDING FAILED
is displayed in the message area and the screen remains as the SDMs.
6 -- 92
DS2000
6.20.3
OPERATOR MANUAL Sent Message List
VOLUME 1 RADIO
The Sent Message list can be invoked by touching the SENT MSGS key. A list is displayed that can show up to the previous 20 sent messages from this operator position. This list is cleared at log on. Each entry in the list contains the Talkgroup, Alias or ISSI to which the message was sent. If the message was addressed to a Talkgroup, then only the Talkgroup is shown. The delivery status of the message is indicated as shown below:
If a message has been primed, touching the NEW SDM activates the SDM screen with the message field cleared, and the address of the primed message populating the address field. If no message has been primed, touching the NEW SDM activates the SDM screen with the message and address fields cleared. The Received Message List can be viewed by touching the RECVD MSGS key. If a message has been primed, touching the MAKE CALL key initiates an individual call to the radio subscriber whom the message was sent. The message can be seen in further detail by priming the entry in the list, then touching the READ SDM key. The Sent Short Data Messages screen is displayed, as shown in the following illustration (Sent Message Details).
6 -- 93
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.20.4 Sent Message Details
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The screen shows the address to which the message was sent, the SDM message, and the date and time the message was sent. The delivery status of the message will be shown as one of the following: NO STATUS: PENDING: DELIVERED: FAILED: When no acknowledgement was requested The message is currently being sent to the address but has not yet reached its destination The message has been successfully delivered The message delivery has failed
The status time is the time when the delivery status was last updated. Touch the UP arrow to display the next message in the list (latest message), and touch the DOWN arrow to retrieve the previous message. Touch the SEND ANTHER key to invoke the SDM page which has the address of this message populating the address field and the message field will be clear. Touch the SENT MSGS or the RECVD MSGS keys to invoke their respective screens. Touch the FRWARD key to invoke the SDM screen with the message that you want to forward displayed in the message field. The message can be edited before sending if required. Touch the SEND AGAIN key to invoke the SDM edit screen. The message and the address can be edited before sending.
6 -- 94
DS2000
6.20.5
OPERATOR MANUAL Received Message List
VOLUME 1 RADIO
The Received Message List can be selected by touching the RECVD MSGS key. A list of Short Data Messages received from subscribers currently affiliated to talkgroups that you have Selected, Monitored or Event Monitored is displayed. Note: Depending on the configuration set by the System Manager, all received messages can be displayed regardless of talkgroup affiliation.
This list will be empty at logon. You will be prevented from logging off if there are unread messages present in the list. You will be presented with a dialog box asking if you wish to see the Short Data Received Message List. You are notified that there are waiting Short Data Messages by the state of the SDM key. If messages are waiting, the key displays an Envelope icon. Entries in the list are held in order of time received. The latest message is placed at the top of the list, and the oldest at the bottom. If a message has been primed, touching the NEW SDM activates the SDM screen with the message field cleared, and the address of the primed message populating the address field. If no message has been primed, touching the NEW SDM activates the SDM screen with the message and address fields cleared. The Sent Message List can be viewed by touching the SENT MSGS key. If a message has been primed, touching the MAKE CALL key initiates an individual call to the radio subscriber to whom the message was sent. Messages that have been read are distinguished from those that have not been read by their colour. 6 -- 95
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The message can be read by priming the entry in the list and touching the READ SDM key. This displays the Received Message details screen.
6.20.6
Received Message Details
This screen shows the senders address, the time the message was received, and the message text. Touch the UP arrow to display the next message in the list (latest message), and the DOWN arrow to retrieve the previous message. Touch the REPLY key to invoke the SDM page, with the address of this message populating the address field; the message field will be clear. Touch the SENT MSGS or the RECVD MSGS keys to invoke their respective screens. Touch the FRWARD key to invoke the SDM screen with the message that the operator wants to forward displayed in the message field. The message can be edited before sending if required. Touch the DELETE key to delete the message.
6 -- 96
DS2000
6.20.7
OPERATOR MANUAL SDM History List
VOLUME 1 RADIO
The SDM History List can be selected by touching the SDM HIST key accessed from the Talkgroup Subscriber List or the Subscriber Profile screen. A list is displayed which contains up to the last 50 Short Data Messages received from the selected subscriber. The number of SDMs returned is a system configurable option. The list contains SDMs that have been deleted from the received SDM list as well as current SDMs. Entries in the SDM History list are displayed in time order, with the latest message received displayed at the top of the list, and the oldest message displayed at the bottom.
Touching the NEW SDM key with a message primed invokes the SDM input screen, with the message box clear, and the address of the primed message in the address box. Touching the NEW SDM key without a message primed invokes the SDM screen with the message box and the address box clear. The Sent Message List can be viewed by touching the SENT MSGS key. The Received Message List can be viewed by touching the RECVD MSGS key. If a message has been primed, touching the MAKE CALL key initiates an individual call to the radio subscriber from whom the message was received. If a new SDM is received from the subscriber while the SDM History screen is displayed the message is not added to the list. A SDM history message can be read by priming an entry in the list and touching the READ SDM key. This displays the SDM History Message details screen. 6 -- 97
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Helpful Hint
The following error report messages are associated with the SDM History function and may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen: If the selected subscriber has no SDMs, the message
NO HISTORY FOR SUBSCRIBER
is generated and an empty history list is displayed. If the selected subscriber is not found, the message
XXXXXX - SUBSCRIBER NOT FOUND -
is generated, where XXXXXX is the ISSI. If any database error is encountered, the message
SDM HISTORY DATABASE ERROR
is generated. If there is an error that does not fall into the above categories, the message
SDM HISTORY FAIL
is generated.
6.20.8
History Message Details
This screen shows the senders address, the time the message was received, and the message text. Touch the UP arrow to display the next message in the list (latest message), and touch the DOWN arrow to retrieve the previous message.
6 -- 98
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Touch the REPLY key to invoke the SDM page with the address of this message populating the address field; the message field will be clear. Touch the SENT MSGS or the RECVD MSGS keys to invoke their respective screens. Touch the FRWARD key to invoke the SDM screen with the message that you want to forward displayed in the message field. The message can be edited before sending if required.
Helpful Hint
When sending a message, the radio may be out of coverage, switched off, or the message queue in the radio may be full. MESSAGE NOT SENT THIS TIME is displayed in the message area and the message in the Sent message list is marked as Failed. A message may not be sent successfully due to a network--related fault. MESSAGE SENDING FAILED is displayed in the message area and the SDM screen contains the data that was to be sent. The following error report messages are associated with the SDM function and may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen: The message
NOT AVAILABLE ON THIS RADIO SYSTEM
is displayed when an attempt is made to send a short data message to a talkgroup whose radio system does not support SDM. The message
is displayed when an attempt is made to send a short data message to a subscriber whose radio system does not support SDM.
6 -- 99
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.21
Predefined Short Data Messages

The predefined SDM functionality provides the means for a user to send a short data message (SDM) by choosing from a predefined list of messages. The list of predefined messages is a System Manager configurable option.
6.21.1
Accessing the Predefined SDM Function

This feature may be accessed in two ways: S A PREDEF SDM key in the general work area (GWA) which when untouched immediately sends a predefined message to a previously primed subscriber or talkgroup, or alternatively presents a scrollable list of predefined messages, from which to choose a message to send to the previously primed subscriber or talkgroup immediately. S A PREDEF SDM key outside of the general work area which when untouched presents a scrollable list of predefined messages for selection. After a message is chosen you are transferred to the standard SDM composition screen.
6.21.2
PREDEF SDM key in the General Work Area

The PREDEF SDM key is available in the function key area of the following GWA screens: Talkgroup list Emergency list Individual History list Call Event list Talkgroup History list ISSI Dial Pad
Before use you are required to prime a subscriber or talkgroup as a target for the SDM message, using the selection method appropriate for the screen displayed in the GWA. The PREDEF SDM key when untouched will either immediately send a predefined message from the database of predefined messages to the target (as configured in the Database), or present the scrollable list of predefined messages. Each line of the list contains a short description of each message. The full text is revealed when the entry is used and displayed in the SDM screen. The following illustration shows information of the previously primed addressee displayed at the top of the list.
Amb_6.21_Predef SDM
6 -- 100
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
If necessary scroll through the list using the scrollbar to find the required message. Touch the required message in the list to prime it, then touch the USE TEXT key to invoke the SDM compose screen. The SDM text box will be populated with the required message text in full. Touch the CANCEL key to return to the previous screen. Note: The type field, as configured in the Predefined SDM database file for the specific key on the specific GWA, determines whether a specific predefined message is sent immediately, or if a list is presented.
6 -- 101
Amb_6.21_Predef SDM
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.21.3 PREDEF SDM key in Main Screen Keys
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
If the PREDEF SDM key is available outside of the GWA it has the following behaviour. This key invokes the scrollable list of predefined messages in the GWA. Information about the previously primed target subscriber ( ISSI 10005) is displayed at the top of the GWA as shown in the following illustration.
If necessary scroll through the list using the scrollbar to find the required message. Touch the required message in the list to prime it then, touch the USE TEXT key to invoke the standard SDM compose screen. The SDM text box will be populated with the required message text in full. The operation is then the same as when using the SDM functionality. Touch the CANCEL key to return to the previous screen.
Amb_6.21_Predef SDM
6 -- 102
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Helpful Hint
The following error report messages are associated with the PREDEF SDM function and may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen: The message
ERROR ON ITEM PRIMED
is displayed when an attempt is made to send a short data message using the GWA PREDEF SDM key, when no target has been primed. The message
is displayed when an attempt is made to send a predefined message to a subscriber whose radio system does not support SDM. The message
NOT AVAILABLE ON THIS RADIO SYSTEM
is displayed when an attempt is made to send a predefined message to a talkgroup whose radio system does not support SDM.
6 -- 103
Amb_6.21_Predef SDM
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.22
Note:
Mute All
Availability and screen position of the MUTE ALL key is dependent on your systems specification.
6.22.1
Introduction
This function allows you to quickly mute all audio except that from any currently selected resources. The system can be configured to do this either for a predetermined time or until manually de--muted.
6.22.2
Muting of Audio
Touching the MUTE ALL key puts all Monitored talkgroups and/or radios into the mute condition. They remain in this condition for either a system defined time or (if the defined time is set to zero), until manually de--muted. When mute is active, the MUTE ALL key changes colour to indicate that there is a mute active and the message
AUDIO MUTED
is displayed on the message bar once the operation has been completed. MUTE is displayed on the Talkgroup or Radio key, and the key colour changes to reflect this. Emergency calls, and talkgroups or radios in an open or closed connect group are excluded from the All Mute facility. Any emergency calls arriving from Airwave on a muted talkgroup result in that talkgroup being de--muted automatically.
6.22.3
De-Muting
It is possible to de--mute in four ways.
Note:
For all the following cases, when there are no more radios or talkgroups muted, the MUTE ALL key then changes to its idle state and the message Audio Demuted is displayed on the message bar.
Individually De-Muting a Radio/Talkgroup A radio or a talkgroup can be individually de--muted by touching the muted radio/talkgroup key. When using this method, the muted key is returns to its original audio monitored state.
De-Muting all Muted Radio/Talkgroups After touching the active MUTE ALL key, all muted radios and talkgroups are returned to their audio monitored state.
Automatic De-Mute Once the system configured time has elapsed, all muted radios and talkgroups are returned to their audio monitored state.
Amb_6.22_All Mute
6 -- 104
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Airwave Emergency on a Muted Talkgroup
VOLUME 1 RADIO
When an emergency call is presented on a muted talkgroup, that talkgroup is automatically de--muted and returned to its audio Monitored state.
Helpful Hint
The message
DE-MUTE FAILED ON TG TTT
is displayed (Where TTT is the three character talkgroup alias) when an unsuccessful attempt has been made to de--mute a talkgroup.
6 -- 105
Amb_6.22_All Mute
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.23
Note:
Alert Tone
Availability and screen position of the ALERT TONE key is dependent on your systems specification.
6.23.1
Introduction
This function allows you to transmit an audio alert tone to a Selected talkgroup. When you press the ALERT TONE key, a tone will sound for a period of time, predetermined by the radio system configuration (not the DS2000), or until the button is released.
6.23.2
Sending An Alert Tone

Touching the ALERT TONE key sends an Alert tone to the selected talkgroup. An operators User Type determines which of three available tones are sent.
When you press and hold the ALERT TONE key the following actions occur: The ALERT TONE key attributes are changed to indicate that Alert Tone is active. The TX key attributes are changed to indicate that Alert Tone is active. The talkgroup key legend and attributes for all other users with the talkgroup key Monitored or Selected are changed to indicate the terminal position of the user keying the talkgroup. When Alert Tone is applied to the Selected talkgroups, initially the legend busy is displayed on all the Selected talkgroup keys. When Alert Tone is granted to the Selected talkgroups, by the radio system, the legend busy is replaced by Tx. The Alert Tone sounds on the Selected talkgroups while the key is pressed subject to a maximum duration configurable on the radio system, after which the tone stops.
When the key is released: The ALERT TONE key attributes are changed to indicate that Alert Tone is inactive. The TX key attributes are changed to indicate that Alert Tone is inactive. The talkgroup key legend and attributes for all other users with the talkgroup key Monitored or Selected are changed back to the Selected state indicating the terminal position of the user keying the talkgroup has stopped.
When the key is being pressed and the tone times out: The ALERT TONE key attributes are changed to indicate that Alert Tone is inactive. The TX key attributes are changed to indicate that Alert Tone is inactive. The talkgroup key legend and attributes for all other users with the talkgroup key Monitored or Selected are changed back to the Selected state indicating the terminal position of the user keying the talkgroup has stopped.
Amb_6.23_Alert Tone
6 -- 106
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
When a talkgroup is simultaneously selected by more than one operator, contention between the operators is resolved in the same way as PTT, i.e., the first operator to activate Alert Tone is routed to, and transmits on, the talkgroup. While the operator routed to the talkgroup holds Alert Tone active, all other operators are disabled from transmitting on the talkgroup, i.e., they are locked out until Alert Tone is released. This feature is dependent on the radio system allowing operators to have priority over radio users. When Alert Tone is released, if another operator has the talkgroup selected and the ALERT TONE key pressed, they are not routed to and therefore cannot transmit on the talkgroup. If the second operator is to successfully transmit on the talkgroup, they have to release and reapply Alert Tone once the first user has released Alert Tone.
Helpful Hint
The following error report messages are associated with the ALERT TONE function and may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen: The message
ALERT TONE ERROR - NO TALKGROUP -
is displayed when there is no talkgroup Selected and the ALERT TONE key is pressed. The message
ALERT TONE ERROR - PTT ACTIVE -
is displayed when PTT is active and the ALERT TONE key is pressed. This could be due to another operator Txing or the the operator having the floorswitch depressed. The message
ALERT TONE ERROR - OUT OF RANGE -
is displayed if the Alert Tone value is out of range. (See System Manger Configurable options.)
6 -- 107
Amb_6.23_Alert Tone
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.24
Communication Control Interface (CCI) Port Usage

The system manager is able to query their local, and any remote, access connected DS2000 sites to display the current usage state of all CCI ports available to that site. This query command is automatically repeated at five second intervals for as long as the CCI Port Usage page is displayed. The CCI Port Usage screen is invoked by touching the CCI USAGE key typically found via the SUPER tab. The system then interrogates the Main SNP (Switch Node Processor) at this and all other Remote Access connected DS2000 sites. Each DS2000 site returns the number of CCI ports potentially accessible by that site and the number that are currently free for usage. If the low availability limit has been reached at that site, then this indication is returned and displayed on the CCI Port Usage screen. Each DS2000 site has a configurable low availability threshold limit defined and if this threshold is exceeded the corresponding entry on the CCI Port Usage screen is displayed in the appropriate warning colour.
CCI Port Usage Screen When the CCI Port Usage screen is displayed it shows the total number of Mode 4 CCI ports and the number of CCI ports currently in use for each site.
The screen is removed from view by touching the main QUIT key. Quitting this screen stops the repeat query commands being issued and any returned results are ignored.
Amb_6.24_CCI_Port_ Usage
6 -- 108
DS2000
6.24.1
OPERATOR MANUAL CCI Summary Display
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Each site on the list can primed. When a site is primed and the summary key is touched, the CCI Port Summary Display screen for that site is invoked. If a site has no usage details, but the site name is displayed, then the list entry for that site cannot be primed.
6.24.2
CCI Port Calculation

Because DS2000 sites can be configured to utilise CCI Ports at other sites, this can result in the sum of the individual CCI Ports available being greater than the total actually in the system. Likewise, the Free figure reflects CCI Ports that are at this and other DS2000 sites. However, as soon as a CCI Port is reserved, the Free figure for all DS2000 sites that have access to it will be updated.
6.24.3
Threshold Exceeded Warning

As CCI ports are being allocated the Tetra Gateways inform any attached DS2000 sites. The low availability threshold calculation is based on the following: S ( Free CCIs/Total CCIs ) * 100
If the result is less than or equal to the low availability threshold then a system fault message is generated in the following format:
LOW CCI PORTS XX
where
XX
indicates the number of the available ports remaining at this
site.
Helpful Hint
If a CCI usage request is made and a DS2000 site does not respond the display still shows the site name but with ------ under the two number totals columns. If a site is displayed like this, you will not be able to invoke the CCI Port Summary display for that site. If you touch the SUMM key without priming a site in the list, the message is displayed.
6 -- 109
Amb_6.24_CCI_Port_ Usage
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.25
CCI Port Summary

This DS2000 function provides operators with information regarding the allocation, usage, condition and availability of Tetra CCI ports at a specified site.
Note:
CCI Port summary displays for other sites may be summoned from the CCI Port Usage list, by priming the site and touching the SUMM key.
Touch the list entry of the site you wish to see the summary of, then touch the SUMM key. The CCI Port Summary screen for the primed site is invoked.
Amb_6.25_CCI_Port_ Summary
6 -- 110
DS2000
6.25.1
OPERATOR MANUAL CCI Port Details
VOLUME 1 RADIO
The icons shown in this manual are intended to represent the default icon set. As part of the Factory Configuration process alternative icons may be used to associate with an appropriate state to conform with a particular organisations request. The display summarises the CCI port activity for the given site, and displays the site name as a heading. Each CCI port display key has the following skeleton format: Icon A CCI Port Ref No Icon B Extra Info
Up to 24 CCI ports are summarised on one screen; if more than 24 ports are configured then a scroll bar may be used to access the remainder (up to 200). This will normally allow you to perceive an immediate site overview without changing pages. The display consists of a matrix of keys, each one describing a single CCI port. Note: The background colour of the CCI port display key can be one of four combinations: S S S S Dark grey - Uninitialised Light grey - Available/Unknown/Unavailable Yellow - Reserved Black - Key primed to view details -
6.25.2
Icon A
When the CCI port is in the base state (unreserved) then icon A and the tile background colour is represented as illustrated in the following table:
Sta te U n initia lise d U n k no w n A va ila b le Re se r ve d fo r Pe rso na l U se A v aila ble N o R e m ote A cc e ss Ca p a bility A v a ila ble b ut loc a l T R IC f ailur e R e se rv ed f or Sh a re d U se N o t A v a ila ble F aile d R e se rv ation In P rog re ss R e le a se In P ro gre ss
D ef au lt B ac kg r ou nd C o lo ur D a rk G re y L ig ht G re y L ig ht G re y Y ellow D a rk D a rk Y ellow L ig ht G re y L ig ht G re y L ig ht G re y L ig ht G re y
D e fa ult Ic o n A
See note below See note below
6 -- 111
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Note:
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
YELLOW CIRCLE - This icon means the CCI Port is available (would be green circle) but at this instant there is no or insufficient Remote Access (RA) capacity to make the port usable. Either there is no RA connection, or there is a connection but without two free telephone lines to route the audio. BLACK CIRCLE - This icon means the CCI Port is available (would be green circle) but its a local CCI Port and the TRIC( or its equivalent function in the TOIC) is marked as having failed, so its unusable (This only applies to local CCI Ports as this site has no knowledge of the TRIC state at a Remote Site. A CCI Summary for a Remote Site however, would obtain the CCI Summary information for that Remote Site).
Note:
6.25.3
Icon B
This icon indicates the currently configured operational mode of that CCI port. Icon
6.25.4
Note:
Reserved for Individual Use Key State - Icon B The background colour for a CCI port reserved for an individual call is as defined by SunGard.
6 -- 112
DS2000
6.25.5
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL Reserved for Group Use Key State - Icon B -
VOLUME 1 RADIO
The background colour for a CCI port reserved for a group call is as defined by SunGard.
Note:
Either the up- -four-to-digits Talkgroup Id or the three alphanumeric character Talkgroup Alias is displayed depending on the factory configurable option.
6.25.6
Summary Area
In addition to individual CCI port information, a summary of all the ports is included within a summary area on the same display; this provides totals of ports in specific states. The summary area remains static when scrolling.
6 -- 113
VOLUME 1 RADIO
The summary areas include the following information: S S S S S S Site Name Local CCI ports available Remote CCI ports available Mode 2 ports available Mode 4 ports available Mode 3/8 ports available
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The illustration below shows the key for CCI port 17 has been primed and information pertaining to this port is displayed in the Details section of the summary area.
Details Area When a particular CCI port key is primed, extra detail regarding the port may be provided within two allocated status areas on the same display. This data depends on the port mode and may consist of: S S S S S S CCI port reference CCI port mode Operator bound to port Role (Functional Area) tied the port Talkgroup tied to the port Migration Group tied to the port
6 -- 114
DS2000
6.25.7
OPERATOR MANUAL Help Area
VOLUME 1 RADIO
This area provides textual data on the state of the port, with a description of what both the icons mean.
Helpful Hint
If you are displaying the CCI port summary for a remote site, and the link between both sites is lost, the operator screen will change to the CCI Usage screen. The list shows the site name with ------ under the two number total columns. You are not able to invoke the CCI Port summary until the link between both sites is resumed.
6 -- 115
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.26
Status Code List

The Status Code list displays status code updates for subscribers (radio users) that are affiliated in talkgroups which are Selected, Monitored or Event Monitored by you. New entries are added to the end of the list when a subscriber changes status. The list can contain up to 500 entries.
Touch the STATUS CODES key to invoke the Status List.
6.26.1
Status Code List

The Status Code list is a scrollable list with the title:
STATUS CODE LIST
The format for an entry in the list is:

TTT is the talkgroup identifier specified in the System Manager configurable talkgroup database (maximum three characters) AAAAAAAAAAAA is the alias of the radio subscriber (maximum 12 characters) HH:MM is the time--stamp of the last status code logged for the radio subscriber SSSSSSSSSSSS is the subscribers current status, derived from their current status code
S S S
The Availability status codes are mapped to text messages according to your System Manager configurable database. List entries are displayed in chronological order, with the oldest status at the top of the list. Entries are only displayed for status events received subsequent to operator log on and will not be persistent through a remote operator session log on and log off.
Amb_6.26_Status Code List
6 -- 116
DS2000
6.26.2
OPERATOR MANUAL Associated Functions
VOLUME 1 RADIO
The SELECT TGRP, MAKE CALL, NEW SDM and the ACCEPT function keys are greyed out until an entry in the list is selected. S Touching the TGRP SELECT key automatically puts the subscribers talkgroup to the selected state and the page that the talkgroup is on is automatically displayed. Any other talkgroups that were monitored or selected are returned to their base state. Any selected radio are automatically changed to the audio monitored state. Touching the MAKE CALL key initiates an individual call to the radio user. Touching the NEW SDM key initiates the short data text entry screen with the details of the selected radio subscriber as the addressee. Touching the PREDEF SDM key initiates the predefined SDM functionality screen with the details of the selected radio subscriber displayed. Touching the ACCEPT key accepts the status code by removing it from the list. An audit log entry is created to indicate that you have accepted the status code. This action removes the status code from your screen.
S S
6.26.3
Refresh List
The status code list contains the list of the current status of subscribers in talkgroups that you have Selected, Monitored or Event Monitored. New Subscriber Statuses are added to the end of the list. If a new status code arrives for a subscriber which is already in the list then the current status will be removed and the new one will be added at the end of the list.
6 -- 117
Amb_6.26_Status Code List
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.27
Note:
Mobile Resource
Availability of this function is dependent on your systems specification. The Mobile Resource screen displays a scrollable list of all of the resource groups which are currently affiliated to any of the Event Monitored, Monitored or Selected talkgroups included in the currently selected functional area. Resource groups will be displayed if the primary or any of the secondaries are currently affiliated to any of these talkgroups. The concept of Radio Resource Groups is based around radios available within a vehicle (Ambulance) and its crew. All these radios are grouped together to form a Radio Resource Group. (Radio Resource Group see section 6.28). From the Mobile Resource screen it is possible to: S Initiate simultaneous point--to--point calls to the members of the resource group, or S S Initiate a single point--to--point calls to one member of the resource group Invoke the Resource Group Configuration screen
6.27.1
List Entries
Each list entry is shown in the following format:
TTT AAAAAAAAAAAA SSSSSSSSSSS HH:MM
EMG
Where: S Note: TTT is the 3 character talkgroup Alias
The list entry may be displayed as a result of one of the secondary members being affiliated to a required talkgroup, the talkgroup Alias of the primary member will display as follows: S TTT -- the talkgroup Alias may be that of a talkgroup which you are not currently using or do not have access to. *** -- the talkgroup Alias may indicate that the primary member is in an unknown talkgroup ....-- the talkgroup Alias may indicate that the primary member is deaffiliated (turned off). AAAAAAAAAAAA is the 12 character resource group SSSSSSSSSSS is the 11 character status code HH:MM is the timestamp of the last status code logged by any subscriber in the resource group EMG is displayed when a resource group member has an active emergency
S S S
The colour for each entry is defined by the status code for the resource entry.
Amb_6.27_Mobile Resource
6 -- 118
DS2000
6.27.2
OPERATOR MANUAL Display Types

There are two different types of screen displays as follows:
VOLUME 1 RADIO
6.27.2.1
Multi Column List

Area Selection Key Sort Selection Key
Event Refresh Key The above list contains three columns of resources.
6 -- 119
VOLUME 1 RADIO
6.27.2.2 Single Column List
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Event Refresh Key
6.27.3
Dropdown Menus
The Mobile Resource Screen has a number of dropdown menus to navigate the screen. These dropdown menus work by touching the menu key. A dropdown menu then appears showing a list of items. You may then select the relevant option by either: S Sliding to the item you wish to select and then un--touching, or S Un--touching the screen (which will leave the menu in place) and then touch the item you wish to select
Each dropdown menu has a Cancel option that, when selected, causes the dropdown list to disappear with no further action being made.
6 -- 120
DS2000
6.27.3.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
Functional Area Dropdown Menu
VOLUME 1 RADIO
By touching the AREA selection key, a drop down list is invoked as shown below. AREA selection key Indicates the currently selected area
The functional areas available in the list are all the functional areas selected by you at logon, or changed during area set up.If o ne of these functional areas is selected, then your terminal position retrieves all resource groups for all talkgroups available on that functional area. Only one functional area may be selected at a time with the previous selection being automatically deselected. If the ALL - TALKGROUPS option is selected, then your terminal position will retrieve the resource groups for all the event monitored, monitored or selected talkgroups available on your operator position. When this option is selected, the selected functional area will be automatically deselected. When the CANCEL option is selected, the drop down list disappears and the resource list remains unchanged.
6.27.3.2
List Ordering Dropdown Menu

The Sort Menu dropdown shows the current sort order. Indicates the currently selected option Shown to indicate Ascending order or Shown to indicate Descending order
SORT selection key
6 -- 121
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The list can be sorted in Ascending or Descending order for the following: S S Talkgroup -- ordered on the alphanumeric Talkgroup Alias Alias -- when this option is selected the sorting that takes place will be determined by the AliasSortOption in the Mobile Resource Data configuration file configured by the system manager. The configuration options are as follows: 1. Option 0 = Normal Sorting: the mobile resource list will be sorted in ascending alpha numeric order 2. Option 1 = the mobile resource list will be sorted Ascending is normal Descending is numeric aliases placed first. 3. Option 2 = the mobile resource list will be sorted Ascending is numeric aliases placed last Descending is normal. 4. Option 3 = the mobile resource list will be sorted Ascending is numeric aliases placed last Descending is numeric aliases placed first.
Status -- each status code is assigned a priority number, and the status code list is ordered according to that priority Time
The descriptive title for each sort option can be changed as a factory configurable option. When a sort order item is first selected, the mobile resource list will be sorted in ascending order by default for that option. If that option is selected again then the list is re--sorted in descending order for that option. An icon is placed next to the sort item to indicate the current sort view. A Cancel option is provided. When this is selected the drop down list disappears and the resource list remains unchanged.
6 -- 122
DS2000
6.27.3.3
OPERATOR MANUAL
Resource Key
VOLUME 1 RADIO
The resource list key can operate in three ways depending on how the key is touched and the configuration of factory settings: a) b) If you instantaneously un--touch the resource key, then simultaneous point--to--point calls are made to the members of the resource group. (Factory seting to -- Call) If you hold down the resource key, then after a configurable time a subscriber drop down menu appears as shown below. (Factory setting to -- Menu)
The heading text of the menu will be either: S S The Alias and ISSI of the resource group primary The Alias and ISSI of the radio (when not a member of a resource group)
The menu options are: S Initiate a single point--to--point call to either the radio (if not a resource group) or the primary member of the resource group Display the Subscriber Profile for the ISSI Display the Alias Update page of the Subscriber Profile
S S
c)
If you hold down the resource key, after a configurable time a drop down menu appears as shown below:
Menu options are: S Configuration -- configure the resource group, as described in the Radio Resource Group section of this manual (see section 6.28). Configuration -- New is displayed if the resource selected is not a member of a 6 -- 123
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
group. Configuration -- Update is displayed when the resource selected is a member of a group. S Resource Member Alias -- initiate a single point--to--point call to any member of the resource group. Cancel option is provided. When this is selected the drop down list disappears with no further action performed.
The options available in the menu are configurable by the System Manager via the User Type database file.
6.27.3.4
List Updates
The list is updated when the following updates are received: S S S S S Talkgroup Events -- Affiliation, Reaffiliation, de--affiliation Alias updates Status Code Updates Emergencies Resource Group updates
When these updates are received, the resource affected by the update is dynamically changed to indicate the new update. If the dynamic update means that the resources position in the list would change, e.g., a status code update when the list is ordered on status code, then the following happens: 1. 2. The Event Refresh key alerts you that the resource list needs to be refreshed to show the new update. After a configurable time the list is automatically refreshed, or you can touch the Event Refresh key to manually refresh the list.
Refresh Key
Helpful Hint
the maximum number of items in the Mobile resource list is 1000. The message
TOO MANY RESOURCE GROUPS TO DISPLAY
is displayed when the amount of resource groups returned is more than 1000.
6 -- 124
DS2000
6.28
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Radio Resource Group

Availability of this function is dependent on your systems specification. The concept of Radio Resource Groups is based around a Primary radio resource (e.g., vehicle) with its associated Secondary radio resources (e.g., hand portables). This section details how Radio Resources can be created, modified and deleted. Certain incoming events such as Status Code updates and Group Calls are deemed to have come from the Resource Group and are presented to you as though they originated from the Primary resource. Other incoming events such as Individual Callbacks or Emergency Alarms are presented from the originating resource whether it be Primary or Secondary. Likewise, certain other requests you require to make such as an Individual Call are targeted at a Resource Group as a whole with both the Primary and Secondary resources being contacted simultaneously, the communication being established with whichever member of the Group responds first.
RESOURCE GROUP
Primary Resource
Secondary Resources
6.28.1
Introduction
Depending on system configuration and your privileges you may have access to a Radio Resource Group configuration screen which will give you the ability to create, modify the membership of, or delete Resource Groups. If you are not privileged to edit the membership of Resource Groups you may use the configuration screen to update the aliases of the Group members.
6 -- 125
Amb_6.28_Radio Resource Group
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.28.2 Resource Group Edit
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The Radio Resource Group configuration screen is displayed when you request the Resource Group details for a Subscriber. If the Subscriber is already part of a Resource Group, be it as the Primary or as one of the Secondary resources, the screen is treated as Modify/Delete. If the selected Subscriber has no existing association with a Resource Group then the screen is treated as Create. The following screen is invoked when creating a new Resource Group:
Note:
The DELETE key is not available (greyed out) as the Resource Group has not been created. The following screen is an example of an existing Resource Group containing three Secondary resources:
6 -- 126
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
The above screen can be divided top to bottom into three logical areas: S S S Information and functions relating to the Resource (vehicle) -- Primary Information and functions relating to the Portables (crew members) -- Secondaries Resource Group functions applicable to the Resource Group as a whole
These areas are described in more detail as follows:
6.28.2.1
Primary Area
The first field is the description for the Resource Group which can be up to 50 characters long. You can type directly into this field or, where a keyboard is unavailable, use the key with the keyboard icon to invoke the on--screen alphanumeric keypad for touch screen text entry. The second field is the Alias for the Primary Subscriber of the Resource Group which can be up to 12 characters long. You can type directly into this field or where a keyboard is unavailable, use the key with the keyboard icon to invoke the on--screen alphanumeric keypad for touch screen text entry.
Subs Prof Key Use this key to invoke the Subscriber Profile screen for the Primary Subscriber, e.g., 10004 Alias.
6 -- 127
VOLUME 1 RADIO
6.28.2.2 Secondary Area
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
This part of the screen is a scrollable list that displays all the Secondary members of the Resource Group. A group may exist with no Secondary members or any number up to a maximum of 26 (this is a factory configurable option). If an existing Resource Group is requested that contains more Secondaries than is allowed by the configured maximum, then only that many Secondaries are displayed and the message
MAX MEMBERS REACHED - NOT ALL SHOWN -
is displayed. The ADD key is also be disabled (greyed out) if this occurs. Each entry in the list has the form:
AAAAAAAAAAAA [*]
Where: S * appears only if an update is attempted and the alias name is not valid. (See 6.28.4.2). AAAAAAAAAAAA is the Alias of the radio subscriber and can be up to 12 characters long.
The position of each Secondary is significant (see Auto Alias function 6.28.3.5) and there may be blank entries between populated entries. Blank entries will contain the text Nth -Empty instead of an Alias where Nth represents the list position number of the blank entry. Note: By default, blank entries will not be displayed at the end of the list, except when a new blank entry is added to the end of an existing list. An example with a blank entry is given in below:
6 -- 128
DS2000
6.28.3
OPERATOR MANUAL Secondary Area - Function Keys -
VOLUME 1 RADIO
The availability of the function keys and their behaviour is dependent on the context, that is, whether an entry in the list is primed or not. In the above screen the KEYBOARD, SEARCH and SUBS PROF keys are greyed out and not available because an entry has not been primed (selected). When in this state, the only function keys available are ADD and AUTO ALIAS. In the following screen the second entry has been primed and the KEYBOARD, SEARCH and SUBS PROF keys have become available. The ADD key changes to become the REMOVE key.
6.28.3.1
Keyboard
This key is only available when an entry is primed. When touched it invokes the on--screen Alphanumeric keypad for touch screen text entry. This keyboard can be used to assign a new Alias or edit an existing Alias for the selected entry.
6.28.3.2
Search
This key is only available when an entry is primed and is used to change an existing Secondarys details. When this key is touched the subscriber search screen is displayed and you are given the choice of searching for a subscriber to replace the primed entry or to make it a blank entry. The selected subscriber will be validated against current members of the Resource Group to ensure a duplicate subscriber is not selected. If the selected subscriber is a duplicate then the message Subscriber Already in Group will be displayed and the Resource Group display will remain unchanged.
6.28.3.3
Add
This key is only available when there is no primed entry and is used to add new Secondaries into the Resource Group. When this key is touched the subscriber search screen is displayed and you are given the choice of searching for a subscriber to add to the list or to add a blank entry. This key is similar to the SEARCH key but adds to the list rather than modifying an existing entry. It always adds the new entry to the end of the list.
6 -- 129
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The number of Secondaries that can be added is restricted to the maximum number of Secondaries allowed by the factory configurable option. If this maximum is reached, then after the last entry is added, the message
MAX MEMBERS REACHED - NO MORE ADDS -
is displayed and the ADD key becomes unavailable. The selected subscriber will be validated against current members of the Resource Group to ensure a duplicate subscriber is not selected. If the selected subscriber is a duplicate then the message Subscriber Already in Group will be displayed and the Resource Group display will remain unchanged
6.28.3.4
Remove
This key is only available when an entry is primed and is used to remove the entry from the portable list. If the entry is not at the end of the list then a blank entry with the text Nth -Empty is inserted in its place instead of the Alias, where Nth represents the list position number of the blank entry.
Note:
To replace a Secondary, use the REMOVE key. This creates a blank entry. The SEARCH key can then be used to find a replacement if required.
6.28.3.5
Auto Alias
This is a toggle key which switches between Auto Alias and Normal modes for Alias naming. The key indicates that Auto Alias mode has been entered via a configurable colour. The default state of the key is configurable by the System Manager When the Auto Alias feature is in Auto mode, the Alias defined for the Primary resource will be used as the basis for the Alias for all the Secondaries. The Alias for each Secondary will be the vehicle Alias plus one or two characters derived from the Resource Suffix (Configurable by System Manager ).
Note:
That if the vehicle Alias is such, that adding the Suffix would create a Secondary Alias that would exceed 12 characters then, the vehicle Alias will be truncated before the suffix is applied. If the Secondaries list is already populated then the Aliases for all existing entries will be modified. If there are no entries, then any that are subsequently added will use the Auto Alias feature until the key is touched again to revert back to Normal Mode. The Resource suffix can be a number or character immediately following the Primary Alias, or with a space or underscore inserted between. The order of the Portables on the screen is significant. Blank entries will affect the suffix of following entries but wont in themselves be allocated an Alias. If a numeric suffix is specified then the Secondaries order will be used to specify a numeric value starting at 1. If an alphabetic suffix is specified then the Secondaries order will be used to specify an alphabetic character starting at A.
6 -- 130
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Examples of the possible combinations are: Alphabetic Alias Example -- three Secondaries If the Primary has an alias of M0017 then the three Secondaries are: S S S M0017A M0017B M0017C
Numeric Alias Example -- three Secondaries If the Primary has an alias of M0017 then the three Secondaries are: S S S M00171 M00172 M00173
Space first and Alphabetic Alias Example -- two non--consecutive Secondaries If the Primary has an alias of M0017 and only the first and third slots have Secondaries assigned then the three Secondaries are: S S S M0017 A 2nd -- Empty M0017 C
Underscore first and Numeric Alias Example -- two non Consecutive Secondaries If the Primary has an alias of M0017 and only the first and third slots have Secondaries assigned then the three Secondaries are: S S S M0017_1 2nd -- Empty M0017_3
6.28.3.6
Subs Prof
This key is only available when an entry is primed and will invoke the Subscriber Profile screen for the primed Secondary Subscriber.
6 -- 131
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.28.4 Resource Group Functions
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The following function keys are applicable to the Resource Group as a whole (Primary and Secondary) and the availability of the function keys and their behaviour is dependent on the context, that is, whether you are creating or updating a Resource Group.
6.28.4.1
OK
This key will either create a new Resource Group or update an existing one according to the data specified on the screen. The following table describes how the editable fields update when the OK key is touched. Field Primary (Vehicle) Alias Primary (Vehicle) Description Add Secondary (Portable) Update Action This is the Alias of the Primary ISSI and will be updated. This free text field is tied to the Resource Group (not the Primary ISSI) and thus will be updated. This will result in the ISSI being deemed a Secondary member of this resource group. If prior to the update it was a Secondary member of another resource group then it will be removed from that group. Removing a portable will result in that slot in the list being empty. The affected ISSI is no longer a Secondary member of this Resource Group, becoming independent instead, but otherwise the ISSIs details are unchanged. If however, the Alias for the Secondary resource is different from its default Alias, then it will revert to its corresponding Default Alias as defined in the Alias database. If the Alias has been changed then the Secondary member ISSI will have its Alias updated to the new value.
Remove Secondary (Portable)
Secondary (Portable) Alias
If the create or update is successful the message

COMMAND SUCCESSFUL - GROUP UPDATED -
is displayed in the message area of your screen and you are returned to the screen that invoked the Resource Group screen. An audit log entry is also created. If the update is not successful then an error message is displayed and the Resource Group screen remains displayed.
6.28.4.2
Updating and Alias Validation

The system may be configured to prevent a subscriber from having the same alias as another subscriber. This is achieved by resetting the old subscribers alias to its default alias (see Vol 2 Chapter 5). For the purpose of the duplicate check comparison, the case is sensitive i.e., A101 and a101 are not treated as duplicates. When a group update is attempted where the alias has changed, and the new alias would become the same as the default alias of another subscriber, the update will fail and the message
ERROR - INVALID ALIAS -
is displayed in the message area and the alias restored to its original value. The Database Management application can be used to identify the subscriber with this default alias and update if necessary.
6 -- 132
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
The Vehicle and Portable alias names are also validated prior to the group update attempt and if this fails the message
is displayed in the message area. The validation will fail if any of the following applies: S S If the alias name is DUPLICATE, in any character case combination If the first three characters of the alias name are UNK (or any character case combination) and the valid ISSI for the associated subscriber does not follow If the first three characters of the alias name are DEF (or any character case combination) and the valid ISSI for the associated subscriber does not follow If any of the secondaries are duplicates of the primary or of each other -- this check is case sensitive so A101 and a101 are different names
If a Vehicle or Portables alias fails, the pre--update validation, an asterisk (* character) will also be displayed next to the alias name of the Vehicle or Portable that failed the validation. Where aliases are the same, this character will be placed against all the duplicate alias names.
6 -- 133
VOLUME 1 RADIO
6.28.4.3 Updating and Multiple Operators
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
It is possible that two operators may have the same Resource Group displayed at the same time. If they both decide to update the Resource Group then inconsistencies could arise. To overcome this problem, if two or more operators are displaying the same Resource Group and one updates the group, all other operators will receive a message dialog informing them of the update. The message dialog provides these operators with a number of options on how to proceed. This dialog may additionally be displayed if a Resource Group update is performed by a TRSI client. The message dialog is shown below:
REFRESH -- returns you to the Resource Group screen and displays the new changes OVERRIDE -- returns you to the Resource Group screen as it was, i.e., new changes are not displayed CANCEL -- returns you to the previous screen
If two or more operators are attempting a Create to the same new group (same Primary), then the operators that receive the above dialog and choose either REFRESH or OVERRIDE are automatically placed into Update mode. This is indicated by the DELETE key becoming available. Similarly if two or more operators are attempting to delete the same new group (same Primary), then the operators that receive the above dialog and choose either REFRESH or OVERRIDE are automatically placed into Create mode. This is indicated by the DELETE key becoming unavailable (greyed out).
6 -- 134
DS2000
6.28.4.4
OPERATOR MANUAL
Delete
VOLUME 1 RADIO
This key is used to delete a Resource Group. The key is not available (greyed out) if you are creating a Resource Group. Deleting a Resource Group results in that group being removed from the Alias Database. The Primary ISSI remains unchanged but becomes independent and is no longer associated with a Resource Group. All the Secondary ISSIs remain unchanged but they also become independent and are no longer associated with a Resource Group. If however, the Alias for the Primary or any of the Secondary resources is different from their default Alias, then those will revert to their corresponding Default Alias as defined in the Alias database. When the DELETE key is touched a confirmation dialog box is displayed as shown below:
S S
CONFIRM -- to continue with the deletion of the Resource Group CANCEL -- returns you to the Resource Group screen
If the deletion is successful then the message

COMMAND SUCCESSFUL - GROUP DELETED -
is displayed in the message area of your screen and the screen displayed prior to the Update Resource Group screen is returned to.
6.28.4.5
Multicall
This key is used to initiate a multi point--to--point call to the Resource Group.
6.28.4.6
Dflt Alias
This key will revert the Alias for the Primary and all Secondary resources to their corresponding Default Alias as defined in the Alias database, if different from that displayed.
6 -- 135
VOLUME 1 RADIO
6.28.4.7 Cancel
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
When this key is touched the screen displayed immediately prior to the Resource Group screen is redisplayed. If any of the fields on the Resource Group screen have been changed and an update has not been performed then a confirmation dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
CONFIRM -- to continue with the cancel command and return you to the previous screen. CANCEL -- returns you to the Resource Group screen
Helpful Hint
If a Create or Update action for a Resource Group fails, one of the following error messages is displayed, depending on the nature of the error:
S
ERROR - SECONDARY IS A PRIMARY -
S S
INVALID OPERATION The message
is displayed for all other errors
6 -- 136
DS2000
6.29
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Group Repeat
Availability of this function is dependent on your systems specification. You may be given the privilege to update the Group Repeat state on a per talkgroup basis. A visual indication of a talkgroups current Group Repeat state is presented on the Talkgroup key if the state differs from the talkgroups configured basestate, and provided you have the talkgroup audio Monitored or Selected.
6.29.1
Introduction
If a talkgroup has the Group Repeat function enabled, any radios which are affiliated to that talkgroup will hear all audio transmissions from you, other operators and other radios. If a talkgroup has Group Repeat disabled then any radios which are affiliated to that talkgroup will only hear audio transmissions from operator positions and will not hear audio transmissions from other radios. You will however hear all audio transmissions from any radio and from other affiliated operators. The Group Repeat state of a talkgroup can be changed either by an operator at this DS2000 Site or externally (either an operator at another DS2000 Site or by another dispatcher terminal on the Tetra radio system). The Group Repeat enable and disable, control the Dimetra System in the same manner as a Motorola Elite Dispatcher terminal.
6.29.2
Group Repeat Key

You can Enable or Disable Group Repeat on a talkgroup via the GROUP REPEAT function key. The GROUP REPEAT key is primed when you touch the key, and the message
CHOOSE A TALKGROUP KEY
is displayed in the message area. Talkgroup keys on radio pages not currently displayed can be accessed as normal via the MORE RADIO key. Touching any key apart from a talkgroup key or the MORE RADIO key will invoke that appropriate function and in the message area, generate the warning
INVALID OPERATION
whilst restoring the Group Repeat key to its unprimed state. Note: The warning message may be overwritten by any messages generated by the invoked function. Touching a talkgroup key when the GROUP REPEAT key is primed will toggle the Group Repeat state of that talkgroup and restore the GROUP REPEAT key to its unprimed state.
6 -- 137
Amb_6.29_Group Repeat
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.29.3 Changing Group Repeat State
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The Group Repeat state may be changed by any operator position that has the GROUP REPEAT key and the appropriate talkgroup audio Monitored or Selected, following the sequence defined above. If you attempt to toggle the Group Repeat state of a talkgroup which is only Preselected or Event Monitored at your terminal, this will fail and a warning message will be displayed. If Group Repeat has been successfully enabled by you, the message
GROUP REPEAT ENABLED
is displayed in the message area and, if the repeat basestate for that talkgroup is Disabled, an RE legend is displayed on the talkgroup key at all operator terminals that have the talkgroup audio Monitored or Selected. If Group Repeat has been successfully disabled by you, the message
GROUP REPEAT DISABLED
is displayed in the message area and, if the repeat basestate for that talkgroup is Enabled, an RD legend is displayed on the talkgroup key at all operator terminals that have the talkgroup audio Monitored or Selected.
6.29.4
External Group Repeat State Change

A talkgroups Group Repeat state may be changed by other DS2000 Sites or within the Airwave system itself. In this case the new Group Repeat state is reported to this DS2000 Site provided that the talkgroup is at least audio Monitored. As defined above, if this results in the talkgroups Group Repeat state differing from its basestate then the appropriate RE or RD legend will be displayed to all operators who have the talkgroup audio Monitored or Selected.
Helpful Hint
If an attempt is made to change the Group Repeat state of a Preselected or Event Monitored talkgroup then the message
INVALID OPERATION
is displayed. If an attempt is made to change the Group Repeats state of a talkgroup while a console transmission is taking place the request will fail and the message
GROUP REPEAT CHANGE FAIL DUE TO TX
is displayed.
Amb_6.29_Group Repeat
6 -- 138
DS2000
6.30
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Radio Revert
Availability, operation and screen position of the RADIO REVERT key is dependent on your systems specification. When you log on you are utilising one or more Functional Areas. Whilst logged on you may add additional radios/talkgroups to, or remove radios/talkgroups from your Radio page. You are also able to rearrange the Radio Page contents such that the Radio/Talkgroups that are specified by their Functional Area are in different positions from the default. This can result in your Radio page varying considerably from what should be available based on your Functional Area selection. The RADIO REVERT key is used to revert the radios and talkgroups on your Radio/Talkgroup Page(s) to only those specified in the assigned Functional Area(s), that is, the baseline radio preselection.
6.30.1
Radio Revert Key

Touching the RADIO REVERT key invokes a dialogue box (as shown below) which asks you to confirm or cancel the action.
Note:
The action described above is the default action; the dialog box can be configured to not appear via the Factory Configuration options, in which case the revert takes place immediately the key is touched.
If you cancel, no action is taken. If you confirm the action, all currently preselected radios and talkgroups that are not members of the functional areas being used by you will be removed, if possible. Radios that are in the preselection state (idle) are removed. Only Talkgroups that are in their base state are removed. This removal takes place irrespective of the un--preselect flag value set in the database.
6 -- 139
Amb_6.30 Radio Revert_1
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
If you have a radio or talkgroup in any of the following states, then it will not be removed: S S S S Event Monitored (talkgroups only), if this is not the base state Audio Monitored Selected In an Open or Closed Connect Group
Radios and/or talkgroups that should be preselected according to the functional areas default setting, but are not, will be restored back onto the Radio Page. It may not always be possible to restore a radio/talkgroup to its original position. This will occur when the position it should be restored to contains an active radio/talkgroup. If this is the case then the radio/talkgroup will be restored to the next available position. This means that once the revert process has been completed, the Radio Page may not look exactly as it was at logon. If the revert completes successfully, that is, all the default radios/talkgroups have been restored and all those that should have been removed have been removed, the message
COMMAND SUCCESSFUL - ALL RESTORED -
is displayed. If all the default radios/talkgroups have been restored but there were active ones that could not be removed, the message
COMMAND SUCCESSFUL - NOT ALL RESTORED -
is displayed.
Helpful Hint
If it is not possible to remove some talkgroups or radios and the functional areas contain their full quota of radios and talkgroups, the Radio Page may become full. In this case the message
COMMAND SUCCESSFUL - NOT ALL RESTORED -
is displayed and as many functional area radios and talkgroups as possible are restored. This restoration takes place in strict functional area list order.
Amb_6.30 Radio Revert_1
6 -- 140
DS2000
6.31
6.31.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Analogue Radio Introduction

Radio Channel Keys
Touch the RADIO key to invoke the Radio pages screen in the General Work Area where up to 15 Radio Base Station and/or talkgroup keys can be displayed as default. There can be several pages of keys to allow you to access up to 40 keys.
If there are more than 15 radios, further pages will be available to accommodate them. If there are additional pages, touching the MORE RADIO key steps the display through the other pages in rotation. Radio keys can also be configured so that they are positioned across several pages, therefore all 15 positions on page one may not be populated and further pages can be accessed as above. Each Radio page has 15 touch--sensitive areas which can be assigned to a preselected Radio. When a Radio is preselected, it shows as a key in the touch--sensitive area and changes its attributes to indicate the state of the radio. The Radio key also shows the channel number (01 to 99) to which the Base Station is tuned, the MASC identity, and other information such as Pip Tones, Talkthrough, Faults, Channel Status. Some Radios may have been preselected as default for you by the System Manager. They will always appear on the preselected radio pages, but they can be rearranged temporarily by using the Radio Setup feature.
Your access to Radio keys and the way in which they are displayed depends on your USER ID. Certain Radio keys may have been configured to be already preselected for you by the System Manager and are automatically displayed when you log on. To access additional radio channels use the Radio Setup feature. Analogue Radio keys have three conditions: Preselected, Monitored and Selected. Preselected Monitored Selected Any Radio keys available to you are initially in this state. Preselected Radio keys are displayed in the idle condition. Monitored radio enables you to hear radio traffic in your headset or via the loudspeaker. Selected radio allows you to take control of the channel and transmit.
Depending on the size of your system and its configuration, you can have a maximum of 40 preselected radios. You can monitor or select up to 10 radios at any one time, with a maximum of five in a Connect Group.
6 -- 141
Amb_6.31_INTRO
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.31.2 Radio Key Description
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Key colours, attributes and identification numbers can be reconfigured by the System Manager. However, for the purposes of key descriptions in the manual, it is assumed that the colours and attributes (flashing, dimming, grey-out, bright-up, etc.) present on delivery and installation of the equipment still apply.
TRN = Quasi Sync training in progressCombined. Tnnn = Talkthrough applied by terminal number nnn. (Number not displayed to you if you have override Talkthrough privileges). COMB = Radio Channel is part of a combine group.
Channel Disabled, can still be used by Disabler, e.g., Engineer or Supervisor. (Letter appears on Disablers and privileged users keys only).
Pip tones Enabled
DP
Channel Identity 2 x 9 characters MASC Id Channel (Frequency) Indication
FLT = I/O card or Line Fault Indication BSF = Base Station Fault ICOM = Radio Intercom
xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxx XXXXXX p xxx Cxxx

Channel Status: Cn = Channel is in a Connect Group at this terminal, where n is the number of the Connect Group. Cxxx = Channel is in a Connect Group at another terminal, where xxx is the teminal number at which the channel is part of a connect group. If the Channel is part of a Remote users group, xxx indicates the site ID, not the terminal number. S = Channel is selected at this terminal or at another terminal (if the talkgroup is enabled for multi--user select). Snnn = Channel is selected at another terminal where nnn is the terminal number of the other user. If the talkgroup is selected by a Remote site user, nnn displays the site ID, not the terminal number. Txnnn = Channel is keyed by another user where nnn is the terminal number of the user keying. If the Channel is keyed by a Remote site user, nnn displays the site ID, not the terminal number.
FLT
Comb
Channel Selection State is: d = Disabled for this user p = Preselected for this user e = Event monitored for this user s = Selected for this user c = In a Connect Group for this user MUTE This radios audio is muted
The function identifiers indicate the state of the channel or the particular function that is active. A user terminal position number is displayed when another operator has selected the channel. FLT is displayed on the top line when the system has detected an I/O card or radio fault. On some systems a code or reference number may be displayed instead of the letters FLT. This is dependent on signals returned to the DS2000 from the radio equipment. Key colours, attributes and identification numbers are set by the System Manager.
Amb_6.31_INTRO
6 -- 142
DS2000
6.32
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Radio Setup
The RADIO SETUP key is used to change the layout of the radio keys, and to display keys not automatically preselected. Touch the RADIO SETUP key to display the list of radio Base Stations. During the process of adding, removing or moving keys the MORE RADIO key can be used to change pages as required.
6.32.1
Radio Setup Table

The Radio Page Setup table is divided into four columns with colour coded entries. Columns: S S S S The first column of the table contains an area code The second column shows the name and location of the Base Station The third column shows the band, U for UHF or V for VHF The fourth column shows the channel number
Typical Colour Coding: S Base Stations that are in use are shown in dark green and cannot be un-preselected (removed), but can be repositioned Base Stations entries that change to dark green after they have been preselected cannot then be un-preselected (removed), but can be repositioned Base Stations shown pale green are available to be preselected (put on a page) Base Stations shown in dark blue can be un--preselected (removed) Base Stations shown in grey are not available
S S S
6 -- 143
Amb_6.32 RADIO SET UP
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.32.2 Adding Radio Channels

a)
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Touch the line of a channel that you wish to add to your display. The message
CHOOSE A BLANK PRESELECTION KEY
is displayed. b) c) d) Touch a blank key space on the Radio page. Repeat the process for each channel you want in your display. Touch the QUIT key to save the selection and return to the Main Screen.
Helpful Hint
When you log off or change to another Functional Area via the Area Setup screen, any channels which you added to the Radio Setup pages are not saved.
6 -- 144
DS2000
6.32.3
OPERATOR MANUAL Removing Radio Channels
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Touch the RADIO SETUP key to view the page showing the list of channels available to you.
a)
Touch the line of the channel in the list that you wish to remove from your display. The colour of the list entry changes to confirm removal and the radio key is removed from the radio page. Repeat the process for each channel you want to remove from your display.
b)
6 -- 145
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.32.4 Rearranging Radio Channel Key Positions
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
You can change the layout of the keys in the Radio pages. Radio keys can be swapped from their current positions to any other position on any page. a) Touch the RADIO SETUP key to view the list of radio channels.
b)
Use the MORE PAGES key to find the page with the key to be repositioned. Touch the key of the radio channel that you wish to move. The message
CHOOSE A PRESELECTION KEY
is displayed. c) d) Choose a second key and touch it. The two keys swap position. Repeat the process for each channel you want to move/reposition.
6 -- 146
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Helpful Hint
The following system report messages are associated with the Radio Setup function and may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen: The message
CHOOSE A RADIO/TALKGROUP OR PRESEL is displayed if
the same radio key is touched twice when trying to swap positions. The message
CHOOSE A RADIO/TALKGROUP OR PRESEL is displayed if a different radio or talkgroup key is touched. The position of the two keys will be swapped.
6 -- 147
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.33
6.33.1
Use of Radio Keys

Introduction
Channels preselected for you as a default will be displayed on the Radio pages. You can preselect additional channels as required up to a maximum of 40. If you touch a preselected radio key, its attributes change to the Monitored state, and its audio is directed to your headset or speaker. The radio pages are displayed in the General Work Area (GWA) of the screen when the RADIO key is touched. Each radio page can display up to 15 radio keys.
6.33.2
Radio Key Access

Touch the MORE RADIO key to step through the radio sub-pages. (To return to your original page, keep touching the MORE RADIO key.) Incoming radio on keys not currently displayed will cause the MORE RADIO key to flash.
6.33.3
Mute Speaker Key (Speaker Mute)

If the loudspeaker is not currently muted, the MUTE SPKR key will display in an idle state. Touching the MUTE SPKR key in this state will cause monitored audio from the loudspeaker to be muted. The MUTE SPKR key will now display in an active state. Loudspeaker audio muted is displayed on the message bar once the operation has been completed. If the loudspeaker is currently muted, the MUTE SPKR key will display in an active state. Touching the MUTE SPKR key in this state will cause audio from the loudspeaker to be restored to its previous level. The MUTE SPKR key will now return to display in an idle state. Loudspeaker audio enabled is displayed on the message bar once the operation has been completed.
Amb_6.33_USE OF RADIO KEYS
6 -- 148
DS2000
6.34
6.34.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Talkthrough
Introduction
Normally, all mobile radios communicate only with the control centre (by way of the hill-top transmitter/receiver). To establish direct communication between radio users, touch T/T to set up Talkthrough.
6.34.2
Setting up Talkthrough (T/T)

To set up Talkthrough, touch the T/T key -- the T/T key will become highlighted. Touch the required radio key.
Note:
In situations where permanent Talkthrough is the normal operating procedure, the actions detailed above will be reversed (and for some installations, if Talkthrough is removed, Pip Tones will automatically be applied ). The key touched will display a T to indicate that Talkthrough is applied and the number of the terminal applying Talkthrough will be displayed on the key at other terminals. To terminate Talkthrough, touch the T/T key again and then the Radio key.
Helpful Hint
Typically, Talkthrough cannot be set on a radio which has been selected by another operator and Talkthrough can only be removed by the operator that applied it (these limitations can be removed by your System Manager). If you attempt to set Talkthrough on a radio which has the function disabled, the message
INVALID OPERATION
is displayed in the message area. Talkthrough can be configured (by the System Manager) with a timeout period. When Talkthrough is not removed before the end of the timeout period, it is automatically removed. The warning message is displayed in the message area. A system error message is also generated and logged. Talkthrough can be applied to only one radio in a Voting Group. Talkthrough will be temporarily removed if you use the TX key or the footswitch.
T/T TIMEOUT
6 -- 149
Amb_6.34_TALKTHROUGH
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6.35
6.35.1
Monitoring and Selecting Radio Channels

Radio Monitor
Touch a preselected radio channel key to monitor it. The key will change colour and an M will be displayed in the border instead of a P. Incoming audio will cause the key to flash. If the monitored Radio key is on a page not currently displayed, the MORE RADIO key will flash instead. Use the MORE RADIO key to find and display the page the flashing Radio key is on.
Helpful Hint
If you are monitoring a channel in a Site Select Voting Group and another channel is voted, you will lose the received audio if you do not have the voted channel monitored or selected. On some systems, when a voted radio is selected by another user, its monitored audio will be reduced at your terminal, other monitored audio remaining unchanged. To return the voted radio audio to full volume select the radio. A radio can only be put into one Automatic Voting Group. You cannot put a Remote radio into a Voting Group. If Adjacent Mute is enabled, you will not be able to hear audio on a monitored channel whilst a user at an adjacent terminal is transmitting on that channel.
6.35.2
Note:
Radio Select
You can only transmit on radio channels which are selected. Touch a monitored radio to select it.
Helpful Hint
Normally, you cannot select a radio which is already selected by another operator. Privileged users can select a radio channel which is already selected by another operator. If you do not deselect (Monitor) the radio, the radio will automatically reset to the Monitored state within a set time, and a system error message will be generated.
Amb_6.35 MONITORING & SELECTING
6 -- 150
DS2000
6.35.3
OPERATOR MANUAL Transmit
VOLUME 1 RADIO
To transmit, select one or more radios then press and hold either the TX key or footswitch. If your system uses Pip Tones, they will be generated when there is no audio present. The TX key changes to its Active state when it is touched or when the footswitch is operated. Your speech will be transmitted simultaneously over all of the selected radios.
Helpful Hint
Even if you are allowed to select a radio which is already selected by another operator, your TX key will not operate whilst the other operator is transmitting. When two operators have the same radio selected, the first to touch the TX key transmits. When a radio in a Voting Group is selected, it is removed from the group temporarily. This enables other users to continue monitoring other Base Stations. If more than one user has a group Base Station in its Select state, it will only be returned to its group after the last user has returned it to the Monitor state. If Adjacent Mute is enabled, you will not be able to hear audio on a selected channel whilst a user at an adjacent terminal is transmitting on that channel.
The Modulation area of the TX key is not touch-sensitive. It flashes to indicate that the audio from your microphone is at a sufficiently high level to provide good signal quality. If it does not light up, move your microphone closer to your mouth.
6 -- 151
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.35.4 Radio Demonitor and Deselect
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The, dual--purpose DEMON DESEL key can be used to return a single Monitored radio channel to the Preselected state, or return all Monitored radios to the Preselected state. Demonitor a Single Radio To demonitor a single radio channel touch the DEMON key. The message
CHOOSE TGRP OR RADIO KEY
is displayed. Touch the appropriate key; the message

RADIO CHANNEL DEMONITORED
is displayed, confirming the action.
Demonitor all Radios To return all Monitored radios to the Preselected state, touch the DEMON key twice in succession, the message
RADIO CHANNELS DEMONITORED
will be displayed. The radios must all be in the Monitored state for this action to work. Note: A warning is normally generated if the channel is not being monitored by anyone.
Deselect a Single Radio To Deselect a single radio channel, touch the appropriate (Selected) Radio key; the message
CHANNEL DESELECTED AND MONITORED
is displayed and the key changes to the Monitored state.
Deselect All Radios This action will only apply to radios in the Selected state. To return all Selected radios to the Monitored state, touch the DESEL ALL key twice in succession, the message
CHANNEL DESELECTED AND MONITORED
is displayed.
6 -- 152
DS2000
6.36
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Combining Channels
The COMB key allows you to group a number of radio channels (Base Stations), talkgroups and Migration Groups so that you can operate them together with single key operation. In this context the term radio means Radio Channel, Talkgroup or Migration Group. Typically up to ten may be combined at a time.
6.36.1
Combine
The COMB key is used to put Radio Channel, Talkgroup and Migration Group keys into, or out of, a Combine Group. Each operator can set up one Combine Group containing up to the maximum number of radios configured for that group. Touch the key to change it to its Active state. The message
CHOOSE A TGRP OR RADIO KEY is
displayed.
Touching any key, other than a valid radio key or the MORE RADIO key while the COMB key is in the Active state, returns the COMB key to the Idle state. Radio keys on Radio pages not currently displayed can be accessed via the MORE RADIO key as normal. The functions available for Combine Groups are: a) b) c) c) d) Monitor/Demonitor Select/Deselect Transmit Talkthrough On/Off -- Radio channels only Event Monitor On/Off -- Talkgroups/Migration groups only
6.36.2
Uncombine
To remove Radio keys or a talkgroup from a Combine Group, repeat the above sequence. As each Combine key is touched, instead of being added, it will be removed from the Combine Group.
6 -- 153
Amb_6.36_COMBINE
VOLUME 1 RADIO 6.36.3

6.36.3.1
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Radio Combine
Combine
When a radio channel is put into a Combine Group it is automatically set to the Preselected state and all other radios already in the group are also automatically set to the Preselected state.
Note:
When a radio joins a Combine group, all talkgroups already in the Combine Group are automatically set to Event Monitored. When a radio channel is put into the Combine Group, the border legends of the Radio key displays COMB and the message CHANNEL INTO COMBINE GROUP is displayed in the message area.
6.36.3.2
Uncombine
The message CHANNEL OUT OF COMBINE GROUP is displayed in the message area and the border legend (COMB) of the radio key is removed when a radio channel is taken out of the Combine Group. The radio channel will be set to the preselected state upon removal.
6.36.4
6.36.4.1
Talkgroup Combine
Combine
When a talkgroup is put into a Combine Group it is set to the Event Monitored state, and all other talkgroups already in the Combine Group are set to the Event Monitored state. All radio channels already in the Combine Group are set to the Preselected state. The message TALKGROUP INTO COMBINE GROUP is displayed in the message area and the border legends of the Radio key displays COMB when a talkgroup is put into the Combine Group.
6.36.4.2
Uncombine
The message TALKGROUP OUT OF COMBINE GROUP is displayed in the message area and the border legends (COMB) of the radio key is removed when a talkgroup is taken out the Combine Group. The talkgroup is set to the Event Monitored state upon removal.
Amb_6.36_COMBINE
6 -- 154
DS2000
6.37
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Remote Radio
Availability of this facility is dependent on your systems specification. Remote Radio access permits operators at a local Control Room site to preselect, monitor and select radio channels that are terminated at a remote Control Room site and normally under the control of the remote site users. User actions, screen messages and restrictions are similar to those described for Remote Terminal, with the proviso that only Radio functionality is available to you.
6.37.1
Preselecting the Remote Radio Channel

Touch the RADIO FNS key, followed by the RADIO SETUP key; the General Work Area will change to display the Radio Directory screen. If your USER ID or User Type allows it, this screen will include both local and remote radio Base Stations. The message
CHOOSE A CHANNEL
is displayed in the message area. Choose the required remote Base Station from the list, as if it were a local Base Station. The message
REMOTE CHANNEL ACCESS:PLEASE WAIT
is displayed in the message area and a delay (typically 1 to 30 seconds, dependent on equipment) occurs whilst the remote access is established. When the remote control links have been established, the relevant Site Select key on both sites changes to indicate that a remote access session is active between those sites.
6.37.2
Using the Remote Radio

Depending on the configuration at your site, you will be able to operate in one of the following modes: a) Single channel capability with more than one user being able to use the channel, or b) Note: Just you on the link and having multi-channel capability.
There may be a slight delay whilst the audio link is established to the remote site.
Use the Remote Radio key as though it were one of your own Local Radio keys. Now that both control and audio links are present, the key behaves normally with minimal delays.
6 -- 155
Amb_6.37_REMOTE RADIO
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Helpful Hint
The maximum number of remote operators for each site is defined at the time of manufacture; see the System Manager for details. You do not have access to the Radio Configuration page for the remote site. Remote radios cannot be included in Voting Groups that contain local radios. You can only preselect radios which are terminated at the remote site after you have logged on, i.e., remote radio channels cannot be associated with a USER ID or User Type to be automatically preselected at logon. If the audio or control link cannot be set up, the Site key is highlighted and the message
REMOTE RADIO TO SITE NOT AVAILABLE
or
REMOTE ACCESS TO SITE NOT AVAILABLE
is displayed in the message area and an entry made in the system faults log. Call logger information on radio channels terminated at the remote site is recorded at the remote site. Your audio is recorded at your own local site, i.e., where you are physically located. A user at the remote site cannot replay your recorded audio, which was (to them) recorded off-site. Any attempt to do so results in the message
OPERATOR REMOTE - ACCESS DENIED -
being displayed in their message area. However, you can use the INST REPL key in the normal way and use it to replay your own audio. The messages or
REMOTE OP TERMINATED TO SITE XXX REMOTE OP TERMINATED FROM SITE XXX
indicate typical breakdowns of the communications between sites. You will normally remain connected to the remote site unless you explicitly sign off. The only exceptions to this are a line or an equipment failure -- indicated by a message similar to the above which is also displayed in the respective supervisors message areas. An entry is also automatically made in the System Faults log.
6 -- 156
DS2000
6.37.3
OPERATOR MANUAL Leaving (Un-preselecting) the Remote Radio
VOLUME 1 RADIO
Un--preselect the radio in the normal way via the RADIO SETUP key to return to your own local Radio screen. Your link to the remote site is discontinued. When you demonitor the Remote Radio, the control links remain and you can quickly re-establish the Monitor state. You need to un-preselect the Remote Radio when you log off.
6 -- 157
VOLUME 1 RADIO
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
6 -- 158
Chapter 7 Conferencing and Internal Intercom
VOLUME 1 CONFERENCING & INTERNAL INTERCOM Amendment Record

Issue A B 1 1A 2 Reason First draft incorporating release V9.11 functionality Text changes First Issue First Draft V 161 Second Issue to Incorporate Changes to reflect V161 Author SS SS JC TS SS Date 25.04.06 24.06.06 11.12.06 18.09.07 01/11/07
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Approved
Part No. 808-Amb-0000- -05A -25E SunGard Public Sector Limited
7 -- 2
Amb_7.0_CONF & INT INTERCOM
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 CONFERENCING & INTERNAL INTERCOM
Contents
7.1 Connect Group Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 5 7.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 5 7.1.2 Connect Conferencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 6 7.1.2.1 Telephone Only Connect Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 6 7.1.2.2 Radio and Telephone Connect Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 7 7.1.2.3 Radio Only Connect Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 8 7.1.2.4 Talkgroup Only Connect Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 8 7.1.2.5 Talkgroup and Telephone Connect Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 9 7.1.2.6 Talkgroup and Radio Connect Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 9 7.1.2.7 Talkgroup, Radio and Telephone Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 10 7.1.2.8 Individual Call and Single Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 10 7.2 Connect Groups - Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11 7.2.1 The Connect Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 11 7.2.2 Opening and Closing Connect Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 11 7.2.2.1 Opening a Connect Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 11 7.2.2.2 Opening a Connect Group (Auto Connect Active Call -- Option) 7 -- 12 7.2.2.3 Closing a Connect Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 13 7.2.3 Adding and Removing Telephones to/from a Connect Group . . . 7 -- 14 7.2.3.1 Adding Telephones to a Group (From held) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 14 7.2.3.2 Adding Telephones to a Group (Auto Connect Dialled Call -- Option) 7 -- 14 7.2.3.3 Removing Telephones from a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 15 7.2.4 Adding and Removing Radios to/from a Connect Group . . . . . . . 7 -- 16 7.2.4.1 Adding Radios to a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 16 7.2.4.2 Removing a Radio from a Connect Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 17 7.2.5 Adding and Removing Talkgroups to/from a Connect Group . . . . 7 -- 18 7.2.5.1 Adding Talkgroups to a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 18 7.2.5.2 Removing a Talkgroup from a Connect Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 19 7.2.6 Select/Deselect and Monitor/Demonitor Radios in Groups . . . . . 7 -- 19 7.2.6.1 Monitor and Select for Closed Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 19 7.2.6.2 Monitor and Select for Open Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 19 7.2.6.3 DEMON/DESEL Function Key Operation and Connect . . . . . . . 7 -- 20 7.2.7 Select/Deselect and Monitor/Demonitor Talkgroups in Groups . . 7 -- 20 7.2.8 Talkthrough and Connect Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 20 7.2.9 Operator Push-To-Talk Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 21 7.2.10 Open Connect Group Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 21 7.2.11 Individual Call Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 21 7.2.12 Connect Group Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 21 7.3 Operator Intercom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 22 7.3.1 Making an Intercom Call to Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 22 7.3.2 Receiving an Internal Intercom Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 23 7.3.3 Clearing an Internal Intercom Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 23 7.3.4 Setting Up An Operator Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 24 7.4 Operator Intercom (Partitioned) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 25 7.4.1 Internal Intercom Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 25 7.4.2 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 26 7.4.3 Making an Internal Intercom Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 26
7 -- 3
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
7.4.4 Cancelling an Internal Intercom Call Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 27 7.4.5 Taking an Internal Intercom Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 27 7.4.6 Cancelling an Internal Intercom Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -- 27
7 -- 4
DS2000
7.1
7.1.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
Connect Group Options

Introduction
The Connect function allows operators to interconnect audio from radio channels, talkgroups, individual calls and telephones, i.e., in conference with all connected parties able to converse with each other. Each Connect Group can contain up to a maximum of five members excluding the operator. There can only be one operator in a Connect Group. Connect conferences in which the operator is participating are termed Open Connect Groups. Connect conferences in which the operator is not participating are termed Closed Connect Groups. Each operator has up to two independent Connect Groups (CONN1 and CONN2) which can be used to interconnect radios, talkgroups, individual calls and/or telephones. Both Connect Groups can be simultaneously active, but only one can be open at a time, i.e., you can only participate in one Connect Group at a time. Certain telephone, radio and talkgroup cross--connect combinations are automatically barred. Conventionally, CONN 1 is used for telephone conferencing and CONN 2 for radio conferencing. When radio, talkgroups and telephone users are in the same conference, either CONN 1 or CONN 2 can be used. To control conference groups, an In Connect box is provided on the Active Telephone page. The On Hold box is also used in conjunction with Connect Groups. Both Connect Groups can be used simultaneously, only the telephone lines in CONN 1 are placed in the In Connect box. The first four telephone lines to be put on Hold are displayed in the adjacent On Hold box prior to being placed in a Connect. There are specific restrictions in mixing telephone and radio users in a conference. Some telephone lines may not be connected to a radio channel/talkgroup, and in all cases connections have to be initially set up by you. These conditions are set in the database by the System Manager.
Note:
When telephones and conventional radios are put into Connect Groups with talkgroups, any possible security implications should be considered.
Helpful Hint
You cannot put a Migration Group into a Connect Group. If the Connect Group contains a mixture of either radios and telephones or both with talkgroups, you cannot leave the Connect Group.
7 -- 5
Amb_7.1_CONNECT GRPS OPTIONS
Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A E SunGard Public Sector Limited
VOLUME 1 CONFERENCING & INTERNAL INTERCOM 7.1.2 Connect Conferencing

There are eight types of connect conference: Telephone only (open or closed group) Radio and telephone (open or closed group) Radio only (open or closed group) Talkgroup only (open group only) Talkgroup and telephone (open group only) Talkgroup and radio (open group only)
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Talkgroup, radio and telephone (open group only) Individual Call and telephone (open group only)
7.1.2.1
Telephone Only Connect Groups

Audio from each telephone line in the Connect Group is routed to all other telephone lines in the group. If the Connect Group is open, audio from all telephone lines in the group is routed to you, and your microphone is routed to all lines. If the Connect Group is closed, no audio from any of the telephone lines in the group is routed to you, and your microphone is not connected to any of the lines in the group.
Note:
When more than three telephone calls are connected in a group, audio quality may be degraded.
7 -- 6
DS2000
7.1.2.2
OPERATOR MANUAL
Radio and Telephone Connect Groups

Audio from all telephone lines in the Connect Group is routed to all telephone lines and radio channels in the group. The audio routing from radios in the Connect Groups can be factory configured to operate in either of the following modes: a) The incoming audio from a radio channel is only routed to the Connect Group when the received call indication for that channel goes active, and if no other incoming radio channel is currently being routed. The first radio to be received has priority. When the received call indication from the currently routed incoming radio goes inactive (i.e., the call terminates), no further incoming radio audio routing takes place until a new received call indication is detected on any radio channel in the connect group. The incoming audio from each radio channel with received call active is routed to all other radio channels and telephones in the group.
b)
The radio channels in the group are transmit VOX keyed (i.e., transmission is enabled when audio is present on the channel output). If the Connect Group is open while PTT is active, your microphone is routed to all talkgroups, all telephone lines and all selected radio channels in the group. Audio from all telephone lines and all Monitored or Selected radio channels in the group is routed to you.
Note:
Due to the introduction of sidetone it may be possible for audio intended for the telephone to be heard at an attenuated level on the radio without you touching the TX key. For this reason it is advisable to remove the radio from the Connect Group if your speech is intended for telephone only. If the Connect Group is closed your microphone is not connected to any of the telephone lines in the group. Your microphone is, however, connected to any Selected radio channels in the group while PTT is active. Audio from any Monitored or Selected radios in the group is routed to you. If any radios are Monitored or Selected in the group, you also hear any telephone line audio, since audio from Monitored radios consists of both received and transmitted audio.
7 -- 7

7.1.2.3 Radio Only Connect Groups
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
The audio routing in radio--only connect groups may be factory configured to operate in either of the following modes: a) The incoming audio from a radio channel is only routed to the Connect Group when the received call indication for that channel goes active, and if no other incoming radio channel is currently being routed. The first radio to be received has priority. When the received call indication from the currently routed incoming radio goes inactive (i.e., the call terminates), no further incoming radio audio routing takes place until a new received call indication is detected on any radio channel in the Connect Group. The incoming audio from each radio channel with received call active is routed to all other radio channels in the group.
b)
If the Connect Group is open while PTT is active, your microphone is routed to all Selected radio channels in the group overriding any active radio call. Audio from all Monitored or Selected radio channels in the group is routed to you. If the Connect Group is closed, your microphone is not connected to any Selected radio channels in the group while PTT is active. Audio from any Monitored radios in the group is routed to you.
7.1.2.4
Talkgroup Only Connect Groups

Audio from each talkgroup in the Connect Group is routed to all other talkgroups within the group. The audio is routed from the Connect Groups in the First Speaks mode. This means that the incoming audio from a talkgroup is only routed (to all other talkgroups) when received call indication goes active, and no other incoming talkgroup is currently routed. The first talkgroup to set up a call has priority (hence First Speaks). When the received call indication from the currently routed talkgroup goes inactive (i.e., call terminates), no further incoming audio routing takes place until a new received call indication is detected on any talkgroup in the Connect Group. A new call (or calls) will be set up to all other talkgroups in the Connect Group as soon as a call on any talkgroup is received. Audio will then be routed from the original call to all other talkgroups. If the Connect Group is open while PTT is active, your microphone is routed to all Selected talkgroups in the group, overriding any active talkgroup call. Audio from all Selected talkgroups in the group is routed to you. If the Connect Group is closed, audio from any Monitored talkgroups in the group is routed to you.
7 -- 8
DS2000
7.1.2.5
OPERATOR MANUAL
Talkgroup and Telephone Connect Groups

Audio from each telephone line in the Connect Group is routed to all other telephone lines and talkgroups in the group. The incoming audio from a talkgroup is only routed (to all other talkgroups and telephones in the group) when received call indication goes active, and if no other incoming talkgroup is currently routed. The first talkgroup to be received has priority. When the received call indication from the currently routed incoming talkgroup goes inactive (i.e., the call terminates), no further incoming talkgroup audio routing takes place until a new received call indication is detected on any talkgroup in the Connect Group. A new call (or calls) will be set up to all other talkgroups in the Connect Group as soon as a call on any talkgroup is received. Audio will then be routed from the original call to all other talkgroups. The talkgroups are transmit VOX keyed by the telephones. When audio is detected outbound to the talkgroups, a new call(s) will be set up to all talkgroups in the Connect Group. In the open Connect Group your microphone is routed, whilst PTT is active, to all telephone lines in the group and to all Selected talkgroups within the group. Audio from all telephone lines and all Selected talkgroups in the group is routed to you.
7.1.2.6
Talkgroup and Radio Connect Groups

The incoming audio from a radio channel/talkgroup is only routed (to all other group members) when received call indication goes active, and if no other incoming radio channel/talkgroup is currently routed. The first radio/talkgroup to be received has priority. When the received call indication from the currently routed incoming source goes inactive (ie the call terminates), no further incoming audio routing takes place until a new received call indication is detected on any radio channel/talkgroup in the Connect Group. A new call (or calls) will be set up to all other talkgroups in the Connect Group, as soon as a call on any talkgroup is received or an incoming audio is detected from the radio channel. Audio will then be routed from the original call/radio to all the other talkgroups. In the open Connect Group your microphone is routed, whilst PTT is active, to all talkgroups in the group and to all Selected radio channels within the group. Audio from all talkgroups and all Monitored or Selected radio channels in the group is routed to you. (You must have the privilege to deselect radio channels in an open Connect Group.)
7 -- 9

7.1.2.7 Talkgroup, Radio and Telephone Groups
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Audio from all telephone lines in the Connect Group is routed to all other telephone lines, all talkgroups and all radio channels in the group. The incoming audio from a radio channel/talkgroup is only routed (to all other radio channels, talkgroups and telephones in the group) when received call indication goes active, and no other incoming radio channel or talkgroup is currently routed. The first radio/talkgroup to be received has priority. When the received call indication from the currently routed incoming source goes inactive (i.e., the call terminates), no further incoming audio routing takes place until a new received call indication is detected on any radio channel/talkgroup in the Connect Group. The radio channels and talkgroups in the group are transmit VOX keyed (i.e., transmission is enabled when audio is present on the channel output). In the open Connect Group your microphone is routed, while PTT is active, to all talkgroups in the group, all telephone lines and all Selected radio channels in the group. Audio from all talkgroups, all telephone lines and all Monitored or Selected radio channels in the group is routed to you.
7.1.2.8
Individual Call and Single Telephone

Audio from the individual call is routed to the telephone line when the individual call is active. The individual call will be VOX keyed when audio from the telephone line is detected on the channel output. In the open Connect Group your microphone is routed, while PTT is active, to both members and audio is routed to you.
7 -- 10
DS2000
7.2
7.2.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
Connect Groups - Connecting The Connect Keys
The connect function allows you to interconnect audio from radio channels, talkgroups and telephones in a conference. Each operator has their own independent connect groups which may be used to interconnect radios, talkgroups and/or telephones. The operator is provided with two independent Connect Groups, controlled by the above keys, both of which operate in an identical manner (except telephone lines in CONN 2 do not get put in the Connect box). In the following descriptions the Connect key refers to either the CONN 1 or CONN 2 key, and its related Connect Group. A connect conference in which you are participating is termed an open connect group and a connect conference in which you are not participating is termed a closed connect group. Both of your connect groups may be simultaneously active, but only one connect group can be open at a time i.e., you can only participate in one connect group conference at a time. After logon all the operators Connect Groups are initially inactive, i.e., empty and closed. The audio routing modes between members of a Connect Group are detailed in Connect Groups (Audio Routing).
7.2.2
7.2.2.1
Opening and Closing Connect Groups

Opening a Connect Group
A closed Connect Group is opened by touching the relevant Connect key.
Opening a Connect Group performs the following actions: Any currently open Connect Group is closed (see closing actions) Open telephones are put on Hold. If the maximum allowable number of telephone lines are already on Hold, the message OPERATION DENIED -- HOLD LIMIT is displayed and the connect operation is barred Selected radio channels are deselected, i.e., they revert to the Monitored state Selected talkgroups are deselected, i.e., they revert to the Monitored state Any unanswered dialled call is cleared Any telephone monitor is cleared
7 -- 11
Amb_7.2_CONNECT GRPS --- CONNECTING

Any inter-operator call transfer is cleared Any intercom call is cleared Solid state recorder replay is stopped Any motorway phone is placed on Hold Eavesdrop is cleared
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Any miscellaneous system audio routing is paused, e.g., external recorder replay
When the Connect Group is opened: Monitored radios in the group are automatically put to the Selected state Any Monitored talkgroups in the group are automatically put to the Selected state An intrusion tone, if enabled, is issued to all parties in the Connect Group if any PSTN lines are part of the group The Connect key attributes are changed to indicate that the Connect Group is now in the Open state
A current closed Connect Group cannot be opened if an individual call is in progress and Auto Hold functionality is not enabled. The message INDIVIDUAL CALL IN PROGRESS is displayed and the operation is barred.
7.2.2.2
Opening a Connect Group (Auto Connect Active Call - Option) This follows the same actions as described above except for the following: If the group is empty and an open telephone call is in progress, then the call is immediately entered into the connect group
Note:
This option is factory configurable.
7 -- 12
DS2000
7.2.2.3
OPERATOR MANUAL
Closing a Connect Group
An open Connect Group is closed by touching the relevant Connect key.
Closing a Connect Group performs the following actions: Selected radios in the Connect Group are deselected, i.e., they revert to the Monitored state Selected talkgroups in the Connect Group are deselected, i.e., they revert to the Monitored state If the Connect Group consists of only one item (radio, telephone or talkgroup), the item is removed from the Connect Group and the message CONNECT GROUP # TERMINATED (where # is the Connect Group number) The Connect key attributes are changed to indicate that the group is now in the Closed state The intrusion tone, if present, is removed and conference tone generation is enabled if any PSTN line is a member of the Connect Group
The Connect Group cannot be closed if an individual call is in progress. The message OPERATION DENIED - CALL IN PROGRESS is displayed and the operation is barred. The Connect Group can be closed if it contains a mixture of talkgroups and other member types, but only under certain CCI port type restrictions. A group may close if: All talkgroups involved in the group reside on shared CCI ports, or Where all talkgroups involved in the group reside on a single CCI port If these restrictions are not met, the message displayed and the operation is barred.
OPERATION DENIED, WRONG PORT TYPES
is
7 -- 13
VOLUME 1 CONFERENCING & INTERNAL INTERCOM 7.2.3

7.2.3.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Adding and Removing Telephones to/from a Connect Group

Adding Telephones to a Group (From held)
Telephones are added to a Connect Group by touching a held Telephone Line key while the Connect Group is open. The line is not added to the group if any of the following conditions are true: The connect group already contains the maximum number of members. The message OPERATION DENIED -- GROUP FULL is displayed and the operation is barred. The cross connection of the telephone line to any other member of the connect group is barred. The message OPERATION DENIED -- ILLEGAL CONNECT is displayed and the operation is barred. The line is not Held. The message the operation is barred.
OPERATION DENIED - LINE BUSY -
is displayed and
The connect group already contains a talkgroup and the option to bar a telephone to connect to a talkgroup has been enabled by the System Manager. The message CONNECT BARRED - TALKGROUP IN GROUP is displayed and the operation is barred.
If the telephone line is successfully added to the Connect Group the message INTO CONNECT GROUP is displayed, and the Telephone Line key attributes and legend are changed to indicate that it is part of the Connect Group. The key attributes and legend for other operators (with that key displayed) change to indicate that the line is in use by the operator applying the connect.
7.2.3.2
Adding Telephones to a Group (Auto Connect Dialled Call - Option) A call can be added to an open telephone connect group by dialling from the dial pad or use of a telephone Hot key while the group is open and contains a single call. Once the call is answered, the call is immediately added to the connect group.
If the telephone line is successfully added to the Connect Group the message INTO CONNECT GROUP is displayed, and the Telephone Line key attributes and legend are changed to indicate that it is part of the Connect Group. The key attributes and legend for other operators (with that key displayed) change to indicate that the line is in use by the operator applying the connect. Note: This option is factory configurable.
7 -- 14
DS2000
7.2.3.3
OPERATOR MANUAL
Removing Telephones from a Group

Telephones are removed from a group by touching the Telephone Line key while the Connect Group is open. If the line is successfully removed from the Connect Group the message OUT OF CONNECT GROUP is displayed, and the Telephone Line key attributes and legend are changed to indicate that it is no longer part of the Connect Group. The system can be factory configured to either: Clear down the telephone line when it is removed from a Connect Group, or Place the telephone line on Hold when it is removed from a Connect Group. If the maximum number of lines is already on Hold, the message OPERATION DENIED - HOLD LIMIT is displayed and the operation is barred. -
When a telephone line in a Connect Group clears down, the line is automatically removed from the Connect Group. The message OUT OF CONNECT GROUP is displayed. In a closed Connect Group, where only a single telephone line remains in the group (caused by other lines within the group clearing down or the operator closing the group), the line is automatically removed from the group (and either placed on Hold or cleared down as defined above). The message CONNECT GROUP TERMINATED is displayed.
7 -- 15

7.2.4.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Adding and Removing Radios to/from a Connect Group

Adding Radios to a Group
Touching a Radio Channel key while a Connect Group is open adds the radio channel to the Connect Group. The radio is not added to the group if any of the following conditions are true: The Connect Group already contains the maximum number of members. The message OPERATION DENIED -- GROUP FULL is displayed and the operation is barred The cross connection of the radio channel to any other member of the Connect Group (radio channel or telephone line), is barred. The message OPERATION DENIED - ILLEGAL CONNECT is displayed and the operation is barred. The radio channel is Selected by any other operator and: The system is not configured to Select channels in another operators Connect, or You are not privileged to Select a channel Selected by other operators. The text OPERATION DENIED -- CHANNEL BUSY is displayed in message area and the operation is barred. The radio channel is part of another operators Connect Group. The message OPERATION DENIED - CHANNEL BUSY is displayed and the operation is barred. The radio channel is part of your other Connect Group. The message OPERATION DENIED - CHANNEL BUSY is displayed and the operation is barred. The radio channel is part of your own Combine Group. The message OPERATION DENIED - CHANNEL BUSY is displayed and the operation is barred. The radio channel has Talkthrough applied by any other operator. The message OPERATION DENIED - CHANNEL BUSY is displayed and the operation is barred. The radio channel is disabled and you are not enabled to access disabled radio channels. The message OPERATION DENIED -- CHANNEL DISABLED is displayed and the operation is barred. The connect group already contains a talkgroup and the option to bar a radio to connect to a talkgroup has been enabled by the System Manager. The message CONNECT BARRED - TALKGROUP IN GROUP is displayed and the operation is barred.
If the radio is successfully added to the Connect Group the radio is Selected, and the message INTO CONNECT GROUP is displayed. The Radio Channel key attributes and legend are also changed to indicate that they are part of the Connect Group. The Radio Channel key attributes and legend for all other operators change to indicate that the channel is busy and part of your Connect Group.
7 -- 16
DS2000
7.2.4.2
OPERATOR MANUAL
Removing a Radio from a Connect Group

Touching a Monitored or Selected Radio Channel key while a Connect Group is open removes the radio from the group. If the radio channel is successfully removed from the Connect Group the message OUT OF CONNECT GROUP is displayed. The Radio Channel key attributes and legend are also changed to indicate that they are no longer part of the group. The radio state is changed to Monitored on removal from the group. The Radio Channel key attributes and legend for all other operators change to indicate that the channel is no longer busy and part of your Connect Group.
7 -- 17

7.2.5.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Adding and Removing Talkgroups to/from a Connect Group

Adding Talkgroups to a Group
Touching a Talkgroup key while the Connect Group is open adds that talkgroup to the Connect Group. The talkgroup is not added to the group if any of the following conditions are true: The Connect Group already contains the maximum number of members. The message OPERATION DENIED -- GROUP FULL is displayed and the operation is barred. The Connect Group already contains a telephone line whose cross connection to this talkgroup is barred. The message OPERATION DENIED -- ILLEGAL CONNECT is displayed and the operation is barred. The Talkgroup key represents a Migration Group. The message is displayed and the operation is barred.
OPERATION DENIED - MIGRATION GROUP -
The
talkgroup
is
Selected
by
OPERATION DENIED - TALKGROUP BUSY -
any other operator. The message is displayed and the operation is barred.
The talkgroup is part of another operators Connect Group. The message OPERATION DENIED - TALKGROUP BUSY is displayed and the operation is barred. The talkgroup is part of your other Connect Group. The message OPERATION DENIED - TALKGROUP BUSY is displayed and the operation is barred. The request is rejected by the radio system (e.g., talkgroup is part of a Remote Data Terminal (RDT) patch group or is configured not to support patch group functionality in the radio system configuration). The operation is barred and the message OPERATION DENIED - TALKGROUP BUSY is displayed. The connect group already contains a telephone and the option to bar a telephone to connect to a talkgroup has been enabled by the System Manager. The message CONNECT BARRED - TELEPHONE IN GROUP is displayed and the operation is barred. The connect group already contains a radio and the option to bar a radio to connect to a talkgroup has been enabled by the System Manager. The message CONNECT BARRED - RADIO IN GROUP is displayed and the operation is barred. -
If the talkgroup is successfully added to the Connect Group, the talkgroup key state is Selected and the message INTO CONNECT GROUP is displayed. The Talkgroup key attributes and legend are also changed to indicate that they are part of the Connect Group. The Talkgroup key attributes and legend for all other operators change to indicate that the talkgroup is busy and part of your Connect Group.
7 -- 18
DS2000
7.2.5.2
OPERATOR MANUAL
Removing a Talkgroup from a Connect Group

Touching a selected Talkgroup key while a Connect Group is open removes the talkgroup from the Connect Group. If the talkgroup is successfully removed from the Connect Group the message OUT OF CONNECT GROUP is displayed, and the talkgroup keys attributes and legend are also changed to indicate that they are no longer part of the group. The talkgroup key state changes to Monitored on removal from the group. The Talkgroup keys attributes and legend for all other operators change to indicate that the talkgroup is no longer busy and part of your Connect Group.
7.2.6
Select/Deselect and Monitor/Demonitor Radios in Groups

A User Type can be enabled by system configuration to Select/Deselect and Monitor/Demonitor radio channels which are part of their Connect Group(s), without removing the channel from the group.
Note:
Availability of this is dependent on your systems specification. The permitted operations depend on the open/closed status of the Connect Group as follows:
7.2.6.1
Monitor and Select for Closed Groups

Radio channels that are part of a closed Connect Group can be Monitored, Selected and Deselected, without removing them from the group, i.e., Touching a Preselected Channel key Monitors the channel Touching a Monitored Channel key Selects the channel Touching a Selected Channel key Deselects the channel (back to Monitored)
7.2.6.2
Monitor and Select for Open Groups

If you are enabled to Demonitor/Deselect radio channels in an open Connect Group, then radio channels that are part of an open Connect Group can be Demonitored, Monitored and Selected without removing them from the group as follows: A Preselected (demonitored) channel that is part of the group can be Selected by touching the Channel key A Monitored channel that is part of the group can be Demonitored by first touching the DEMON/DESEL key followed by the Channel key A Selected channel that is part of the group can be Deselected (monitored) by touching the Channel key
If you are not enabled (by configuration) to Demonitor/Deselect radio channels in an open Connect Group, then touching the DEMON/DESEL followed by the Channel key, while a Connect Group is open is an error, and the message OPERATION DENIED -- CONNECT OPEN is displayed.
7 -- 19

7.2.6.3
DEMON/DESEL Function Key Operation and Connect
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
If you are not enabled to Demonitor/Deselect radio channels in an open Connect Group, touching a Radio Channel key that is part of an open Connect Group while the DEMON/DESEL function key is primed is an error, and the message OPERATION DENIED - CHANNEL BUSY is displayed. If you are enabled to Demonitor/Deselect radio channels in an open Connect Group, touching the DEMON/DESEL function key primes the key as normal, and the message CHOOSE A CHANNEL is displayed. When the DEMON/DESEL key is primed, touching a radio channel key that is part of a Connect Group, initiates the following actions: Channel State Preselected Monitored Selected Open Group Action None Demonitor channel Deselect channel Closed Group Action None Demonitor channel None
If you are enabled to Demonitor radio channels in an open Connect Group, all radio channels in either an open or closed Connect Group can be Demonitored by touching the Connect Group key while the DEMON/DESEL key is primed. If you are enabled to Demonitor radio channels in an open Connect Group, all Selected radio channels (including those in an open or closed Connect Group) can be Deselected by touching the DEMON/DESEL key twice, as normal.
7.2.7
Select/Deselect and Monitor/Demonitor Talkgroups in Groups

In an open Connect Group the only valid talkgroup state is Selected. In a closed Connect Group the only valid talkgroup state is Monitored. Unlike radio channels it is not possible to change the Selected or Monitored state in open or closed Connect Groups.
7.2.8
Talkthrough and Connect Groups

You can apply (System Manager configurable) Talkthrough to any radio channel in your open Connect Group, if Talkthrough is enabled for the channel. You can remove Talkthrough from any channel of your open Connect Group that has Talkthrough applied. Talkthrough can be applied to any number of channels (that have Talkthrough enabled capability) in your open Connect Group. You cannot apply Talkthrough to channels in your closed Connect Group, or channels in any other operators Connect Group (open or closed). The message INVALID OPERATION is displayed, and the function cancelled.
7 -- 20
DS2000
7.2.9
OPERATOR MANUAL
Operator Push-To-Talk Override.

When you activate PTT (either the foot switch or the TX screen key) with an open Connect Group, the conference is temporarily overridden and the operators microphone is routed to all telephones, Selected talkgroups and Selected radios in the group. When you activate PTT with a closed Connect Group, your microphone is only routed to radio channels in the closed Connect Group that have been Selected. Your microphone is not routed to any talkgroups in the Connect Group.
7.2.10
Open Connect Group Restrictions

While you have an open Connect Group, the functions that are accessible are restricted. If a function key that has such a restriction is touched, the message INVALID OPERATION is displayed.
7.2.11
Individual Call Restriction

It is only possible to put a single telephone call into a Connect Group with a single individual call. No other permutations involving individual calls are permitted. It is not possible to close a Connect Group containing a single telephone line and individual call.
7.2.12
Note:
Connect Group Security

Availability of this functionality is dependent on your systems specification (factory configurable option). If you have a talkgroup in a Connect Group with either a radio or a telephone, then communications on that talkgroup could be unsecure. All operators are informed of this by a border text colour change on the unsecure Talkgroup key. The border colour is configurable by the System Manager. The Connect Group legend C is substituted with xsecC.
Helpful Hint
If your terminal fails while you have active Connect Groups, an alarm event is generated. Any telephone lines in your Connect Groups are placed on Hold. Any radio channels or talkgroups in your Connect Groups are returned to the Preselected state. CCI port failure results in the relevant talkgroup(s) being removed from the Connect Group and returned to the Preselected state.
7 -- 21
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
7.3
Operator Intercom
Important: This chapter reflects standard intercom functionality. If your system supports Group Partitioning functionality, refer to Sections 7.4, 8.15 and 8.16.
7.3.1
Making an Intercom Call to Other Users

To talk to another user: a) b) Put any Selected radios/talkgroups to Monitored. Touch the INTERCOM key.
The key changes to its active colour and a page of logged on users is displayed. Use the PREV and NEXT page keys to display other users when there are more than 12 operator terminals at the site.
The status of all logged on users is shown, for example

TALKING
You can select only terminals which are listed as

FREE
7 -- 22
Amb_7.3_STANDARD_INTERCOM
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
c)
Choose an entry on the page using the mouse or by touching the appropriate line. As with the touch keys, the choice is made when you lift your finger from the screen. The line changes colour indicating the choice you have made. After touching the CALL key, the message
INTERCOM CALLING
is displayed. When the call is accepted by that user

INTERCOM CONNECTED
is displayed. You can now talk to them. d) If you wish, you can quit the Intercom selection screen and return to the previous screen by touching the QUIT key.
Helpful Hint
The functions available to you are limited to RADIO ALARM, PAGER, TEL DIR (but not dialling), H/SET SPKR, H/SET VOL and MIC OFF. When you touch the INTERCOM key: Unanswered calls dialled by you are cleared The key of any open telephone line is automatically put into the Hold condition
7.3.2
Receiving an Internal Intercom Call

The INTERCOM key will flash when another user tries to establish an intercom connection with you and the normal incoming call alarm may sound (depending on factory configured options). Touch the key to accept the call.
7.3.3
Note:
Clearing an Internal Intercom Call

If the Intercom screen is not displayed, you will need to touch the INTERCOM key before you can clear an intercom call. Either the calling or called user can terminate the call using the CLR ICOM key. Touch the key to clear any intercom call (or to cancel any call you are setting up). When you cancel or clear a call, the message
INTERCOM DISCONNECTED
7 -- 23
VOLUME 1 CONFERENCING & INTERNAL INTERCOM 7.3.4 Setting Up An Operator Conference

e) f)
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Carry out only steps a) to b) of the procedure for an internal intercom call as described in Section 7.3.1. Select another operator from the list by touching their entry line. This connects the new operator into the group.
Helpful Hint
Simultaneously: Unanswered calls dialled will be cleared The keys of any open telephone line will automatically be put into the Hold condition
No connected lines will be heard in the headset, but all participants in the group will be able to talk to each other. The functions available to operators in the group are limited to RADIO ALARM, PAGER, TEL DIR (but not dialling), H/SET SPKR, H/SET VOL and MIC OFF. Any of the users already in the conference can add another, but users not involved cannot invite themselves in.
7 -- 24
DS2000
7.4
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
Operator Intercom (Partitioned)

Availability and screen position of the Internal Intercom screen keys is dependent on your systems specification. This chapter reflects partitioned intercom functionality. If your system supports Group Partitioning functionality, this chapter should be read in conjunction with Sections 8.15 and 8.16. The Internal Intercom facility provides a conferencing facility for operators connected to the same DS2000 site. Each operators microphone is routed to the headset of each of the other operators in the conference.
7.4.1
Internal Intercom Screen

Touching the INTERCOM key invokes the Internal Intercom screen which displays a list containing an entry line of information for each logged on operator in that group as shown below.
Specific to Internal Intercom is the status range, where ONE status from the following table is displayed on an entry line at one time:--
7 -- 25
Amb_7.4_PARTITIONED_INTERCOM_1

Dispayed Status FREE OFF MAIN TALKING CXX CALLING XXX CALLED BY XXX INTRUDE BY XXX TX BCAST RX BCAST XXX User is available
OPERATOR MANUAL
Status Description
DS2000
The user is logged on but off Main Screen and is therefore unavailable User is in an intercom call, conference number CXX (XX = Conference number) User is calling terminal number XXX and is therefore busy User is being called by terminal XXX and is therefore busy User is being intruded upon by terminal XXX The user is broadcasting to members in the same group The user is being broadcast to by a member in the same group
INTRUDE ON XXX User is intruding upon terminal XXX
7.4.2
Function Keys
When the Internal Intercom screen is invoked and there are no intercom calls being made or received the only enabled function key is the BCAST GRP key. After an operator list entry has been primed the CALL key becomes enabled. Touching the CALL key initiates the call to the chosen operator. Touch the INTRD key to force an audio connection to an operator who does not respond to an intercom call. Touch the CLR ICOM key to clear from an active intercom connection or to cancel calling. Touch the BCAST GRP key to speak to other operators within the same group, without making an intercom call. Operators cannot reply. As other operators log on/log off the REFRESH key will be enabled and flash to indicate this. Touching the active REFRESH key updates your display to include/exclude those entries. Touch the QUIT key to return to the Main (default) screen.
7.4.3
Making an Internal Intercom Call

To connect to an operator, choose the Group the operator is a member of by scrolling through the tabs at the top of the display. (Non logged on terminals are not displayed). Touching the line of the required operator highlights the operator entry and enables the CALL key. To initiate the call, touch the CALL key. The message
INTERCOM CALL SENT
is displayed in your message area. The chosen called operator may be deselected by retouching the line to cancel or by touching another list entry. If the required operator is free, the status display changes and the INTERCOM key at the called position flashes indicating a connection request pending. The caller is displayed as CALLING XXX and the operator being called is displayed as CALLED BY XXX. Should you need to join additional operators to the same intercom call repeat the process of priming the INTERCOM key and then choosing another operator position. Typically a maximum of five operators may be joined in the call.
7 -- 26
DS2000
7.4.4
OPERATOR MANUAL
Cancelling an Internal Intercom Call Request

The CLR ICOM key is enabled when the CALL key is primed and a call request is sent. To cancel the call before it is answered, touch the CLR ICOM key. The INTERCOM key reverts to its idle state and the message
INTERCOM CANCELLED
is displayed at the called terminal.
7.4.5
Taking an Internal Intercom Call

Touch the flashing INTERCOM key to accept the intercom call. The message
INTERCOM CONNECTED
is displayed in your message area. The Internal Intercom screen list entry shows the status as TALKING and CXX where XX is the conference number allocated. If a telephone or individual call is in progress on the called position it is automatically put on Hold when the intercom call is answered. If a radio channel or talkgroup is Selected it will need to be Deselected, although it can still be Monitored, before an intercom call can be accepted.
7.4.6
Cancelling an Internal Intercom Call

An Internal Intercom call is cancelled when any of the following actions are taken: a) To cancel the active call, touch the CLR ICOM key. The audio is disconnected and the INTERCOM key reverts to its idle state and the message
INTERCOM CANCELLED
is displayed to other users in the conference and the status of the diconnected user(s) reverts to FREE b) Accepting a telephone call or removing a call from Hold c) Making an Outgoing telephone call d) Accepting an individual call or taking an individual call from hold e) Making an individual call f) Selecting a radio or talkgroup g) Priming and beginning another function, e.g., Mimic or Telephone Eavesdrop
Note:
The last user in a conference is automatically cleared from the conference when all other parties have cleared their intercom calls.
7 -- 27

OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
7 -- 28
Chapter 8 Miscellaneous
VOLUME 1 MISCELLANEOUS Amendment Record

Issue A B 1 1A 2 Reason First draft incorporating release V9.11 functionality Changes to Local Recording - Instant Replay First Issue First Draft V 161 Second Issue to Incorporate Changes to reflect V161 Author SS SS JC TS SS Date 25.04.06 24.06.06 11.12.06 18.09.07 01/11/07
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Approved
8 -- 2
Amb_8.0_MISC
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 MISCELLANEOUS
Contents
8.1 Local Recording - Instant Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5 8.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 5 8.1.2 Replay Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 5 8.1.3 Accessing Another Operator Terminals Recording . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 6 8.1.4 Types of Call Recorded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 7 8.1.5 Recording Precedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 8 8.1.5.1 Recording Start and Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 8 8.1.5.2 Emergency Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 8 8.1.5.3 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 8 8.1.6 Replaying a Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 10 8.1.6.1 Screen Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 10 8.1.6.2 Screen Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 11 8.1.7 Cancelling a Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 14 8.2 Ancillary Controls and Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15 8.2.1 Ancillary Key Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 16 8.3 New PIN or Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17 8.3.1 Changing Your PIN or Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 17 8.4 Headset and Loudspeaker Volume Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 19 8.5 Call Supervisor (Console Request) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 21 8.5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 21 8.5.2 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 21 8.5.2.1 Making a Call Supervisor Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 21 8.5.2.2 Confirming a Call Supervisor Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 21 8.6 Area Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 23 8.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 23 8.6.2 Selecting Functional Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 23 8.6.3 Rearranging Functional Area Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 24 8.6.4 Deselecting Functional Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 25 8.7 Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 27 8.7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 27 8.7.2 Accessing the Remote Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 27 8.7.3 Leaving (Logging Off) the Remote Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 29 8.8 Alpha Numeric Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 30 8.8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 30 8.8.2 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 30 8.8.3 Alphanumeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 30 8.8.4 Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 32 8.9 Operator Note Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 33 8.9.1 Operator Note Pad List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 33 8.9.1.1 Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 35 8.9.1.2 New Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 35 8.10 System Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 37 8.10.1 Operator Groups Overwiew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 37 8.10.1.1 Operator Terminal Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 37 8.10.1.2 Legacy Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 37 8.10.1.3 Talkgroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 37
8 -- 3
Amb_8.0_MISC
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
38 38 38 38 38
8.10.1.4 Functional Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.10.1.5 ICCS Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.10.1.6 Telephone Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.10.1.7 Telephone Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.10.1.8 Telephone Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.10.2 Operator Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 39 8.10.3 Call Supervisor Segregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 39 8.10.4 Fault Message Segregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 39 8.10.4.1 Critical Fault Log Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.11 Terminal Select with Group Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 40 8.11.1 Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 40 8.11.1.1 Operator Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.11.1.2 Terminal Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.11.1.3 User Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.11.1.4 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.11.1.5 Other Terminal Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.11.1.6 Activity Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.11.2 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 41 8.11.2.1 Refresh Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.11.2.2 Priming an Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -8.12 Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43 8.12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 43 8.12.2 Browser Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -- 43
39
40 40 40 41 41 41 41 42
8 -- 4
Amb_8.0_MISC
DS2000
8.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
Local Recording - Instant Replay -
Important: This section reflects local recording functionality with Group Partitioning. If your system supports Group Partitioning functionality, this section should be read in conjunction with Sections 8.15 and 8.16.
8.1.1
Introduction
This operator recording function allows you to playback your own and other operators recordings (depending on your access rights) made on a secure external audio server. All recordings are available for simultaneous playback at any terminal, subject to configurable permissions, and recordings in progress are available for playback within a few seconds of recording initiation. Playback start location can be specified to within a few seconds. Recording is performed at the operator position and streamed to an audio server. Anything spoken over the Tannoy (if used) is not recorded. During the recording of telephone conversations a Recording Warn Tone, as defined in BS 6305:1982, is routed to all parties.
8.1.2
Replay Keys
The instant replay function can be accessed by either of the following methods:
INST REPL
If you have the access rights to replay recordings from other terminals, touch the INST REPL key.
REPL LAST
If displayed, the REPL LAST (or LAST MSG) key provides an immediate replay of your last recorded message without the need to touch the START/STOP key.
8 -- 5
Amb_8.1_LOCAL RECORDING_3
VOLUME 1 MISCELLANEOUS 8.1.3
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Accessing Another Operator Terminals Recording

If you use the INST REPL key the Terminal Select screen is invoked in the General Work Area as shown below;
Function and chosen group name
Group listing - All chosen -
Operator position chosen
Replay key enabled
To listen to recordings from a specific operator, choose the operator position. If you have the access rights this enables the REPLAY function key. Touching this key will access the Recorder Replay List Screen for that terminal. If access to other terminal local recorders is not allowed then touching the INST REPL key will immediately display the Recorder Replay List Screen for your personal recordings. Touching the LAST MSG key also immediately displays the Recorder Replay List Screen for your personal recordings, and, as with the above, the latest recording will be preselected. Playback of this recording will start immediately. Listening to another operators recordings does not preclude an operator listening to the same recording.
8 -- 6
DS2000
8.1.4
OPERATOR MANUAL Types of Call Recorded

Call recording is triggered by the following actions: a) Emergency Roadside Telephone (VAIU Aux Input) b) Telephone S S S Incoming or outgoing call Call monitored Call taken from being on hold
c) Select Radio or Select Talkgroup S S Radio channel selected Talkgroup selected
d) Intercom (optional) S Intercom call connected
e) Ambient Listen S Start ambient listen
f) Individual Call S S Connected -- incoming or outgoing Call unheld
g) Monitored Radio or Monitored Talkgroup (optional) S S S PTT start (other console user) Channel Rx Audio on Incoming talkgroup call start
Recording ceases when the call type is cleared, held, deselected or demonitored as appropriate. These calls will be identified in the Recorder Replay List screen as follows: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) ERT Telephone Sel Radio Indiv Call Ambient Intercom Mon Radio
8 -- 7
VOLUME 1 MISCELLANEOUS 8.1.5 Recording Precedence
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
If more than one event is generated at an operator terminal the resulting recording will be tagged with the highest precedence call type. The following list shows the order of precedence for these call types, with 1 highest and 6 lowest: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) ERT Telephone Select Radio or select talkgroup Individual Call Ambient Listen Intercom Monitored Radio or Monitored talkgroup
8.1.5.1
Recording Start and Stop

For each of the trigger events listed above, a recording start instruction is generated. If a recording is already in progress when a new start instruction is generated, the following conditions determine whether the current recording continues or if it is stopped and a new recording is started: S Higher precedence call type -- the current recording is stopped and a new recording created with the new call type. Same call type -- the recording will continue, i.e. there will be a single audio record covering more than one trigger event. The recording will continue until all same call type triggers have completed. Lower precedence call type -- the recording will continue with the same call type tag, i.e., there will be a single audio record covering more than one trigger event. If this event ends before the initial trigger event, the recording will continue until the initial trigger event ends. If the higher precedence event ends first, a new recording will be started for the lower precedence event.
8.1.5.2
Emergency Events
Any recordings which start during an emergency, or which are already in progress, will be tagged with an emergency flag. These recordings are indicated on the Recorder Replay List screen using the text EMG in the top right hand corner of the relevant list item.
8.1.5.3
Examples Event Incoming telephone call Operator monitors radio Operator demonitors radio Telephone call ends Audio Recording Starts Continues Continues Stops Tag Telephone Telephone Telephone Telephone
Example 1: Multiple trigger events resulting in a single audio recording

8 -- 8
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Event Incoming telephone call Operator monitors radio Telephone call ends Operator demonitors radio Audio Recording Starts Continues Continues New recording starts Stops
Tag Telephone Telephone Telephone Mon Radio Mon Radio
Example 2: Multiple trigger events resulting in multiple audio recordings
Event Operator monitors radio Incoming telephone call Operator demonitors radio Telephone call ends
Audio Recording Starts New recording starts Continues Stops
Tag Mon Radio Telephone Telephone Telephone
Original recording stops Mon Radio
Example 3: Higher precedence event resulting in multiple audio recordings
Event Emergency Alarm handled by Operator Aux Input switch enabled Aux Input switch disabled Operator demonitors radio Operator deselects and then demonitors Talkgroup
Audio Recording Started
Tag Selected Radio, EMG
Original recording stops Selected Radio, EMG New recording starts ERT (not EMG) Original recording stops ERT (not EMG) New recording starts Selected Radio, EMG Original recording stops Selected Radio, EMG New recording starts Stops Selected Radio Selected Radio
Example 4: ERT takes precedence over Selected Talkgroup
8 -- 9
VOLUME 1 MISCELLANEOUS 8.1.6

8.1.6.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Replaying a Recording
Screen Description
The Recorder Replay List screen occupies the General Work Area and is headed with the operator terminal identity. Below the heading is a list of the recordings available. Each recording is shown with: S S S Call type Time of recording -- in the format DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM:SS Duration -- in the format MM:SS, updated at one second intervals until recording stops Activity indicator -- this consists of an icon indicating the activity, if any, for that entry. Only the selected entry and/or the entry with recording in progress will have an icon displayed. The icons displayed are as follows:
This icon indicates recording in progress. This activity indicator overrides the playback indicator if the same recording is both recording and being played back at the same time.
This icon indicates that recording is selected but playback stopped. The same icon is used on the Stop button and also in the playback status area below the slider bar. N.B., this activity indicator will not be displayed if the entry being played back is still recording (see above). This icon indicates playback in progress. The same icon is used on the Play button and also in the playback status area below the slider bar. N.B., this activity indicator will not be displayed if the entry being played back is still recording (see above). This icon indicates playback paused. The same icon is used on the Play button and also in the playback status area below the slider bar. N.B., this activity indicator will not be displayed if the entry being played back is still recording (see above).
Emergency -- if the recording is flagged as an Emergency this will be indicated by EMG being displayed in the upper right hand corner of the entry
The recordings are ordered chronologically with the most recent first. The selected recording is shown in an alternate colour. When an entry is in playback or paused mode all entries in the list become disabled -- this is to prevent accidental selection of another entry which would result in the termination of the current playback. When a recording is selected, certain functions are available to control playback of the individual recording. These are identified and explained as follows:
8 -- 10
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
This key is used to start the recorder replaying the currently selected message. While replaying it can be used to pause playback. The keys attributes reflect the replay state, i.e., it shows the Play icon while stopped or paused, and the pause icon while replaying.
This key is used to stop playback and return to the start of the recording. It is disabled when playback is stopped and enabled during playback or when paused.
This key moves the replay forwards by a factory configured amount. The elapsed time field updates to reflect the new position in the recording and playback continues from this point. At the end of a selected recording this key will not be enabled. This key moves the replay backwards by a factory configured amount. The elapsed time field updates to reflect the new position in the recording and playback continues from this point. At the start of a selected recording this key will not be enabled. Slider Bar This bar acts as both a display and a position selection mechanism. The horizontal bar is marked with start and end times (in minutes and seconds) to depict the duration of the call. While playing is in progress a cursor on the bar indicates the position within the message presently being heard. If currently replaying, paused or stopped the playback position can be changed by clicking on the slider bar at the required point. The elapsed time field updates to reflect the new position in the recording and playback continues from this point. Playback Status This display--only area indicates the current playback status using an icon (see above) plus text (Stopped, Playing, Paused). Below this is displayed two time values in the format MM:SS/MM:SS; the first value is the elapsed time since playback started, and the second is the duration of the currently selected recording.
8.1.6.2
Screen Function
When the screen is displayed, all recordings available to you are shown in a scrollable list with the most recent at the top. The most recent recording is preselected by default. Recording in progress is indicated by the Recording in Progress icon in the activity indicator column of the list, and the duration value is periodically updated. New recordings will be added to the list shortly after they begin. Recordings in progress can be played back. N.B., if this entry is selected for playback the activity indicator will still indicate recording rather than playback activity. When a recording in the list is selected the Play and Fast Forwards buttons, and the slider bar, will become active. At the same time the slider bar will return to the start position and the Playback Status area will indicate Stopped, elapsed time is initialised to zero and the duration value set to the duration of the selected recording.
8 -- 11
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
The database can be enabled to allow you to only play recordings made on your own recorder since you last logged on. As you may have logged off accidentally or been forced to log off, the time of the last log on will be given as from the time of your first log on. If you select (touch) a recording in the list that is earlier than the last log on time, then all functionality will be disabled for this entry. This option does not prevent you accessing other terminal local recorders if you have the required access rights. The following screen shows the Recorder List with a recording preselected:
Replay is started by touching the PLAY key. During playback the key label changes to the pause icon and Playing is displayed in the Playback Status area. Replay is paused by touching the PLAY key again, whereupon its label changes back to the play icon and Paused is displayed in the Playback Status area. During playback, the slider bar and elapsed time indicators are updated. The playback position of the selected recording can also be adjusted while stopped, paused or during playback using the slider bar or the REWIND and FAST FORWARDS keys; elapsed time will be adjusted accordingly. The REWIND key is not enabled at the start of a recording and only becomes available when the recording playback has advanced past one second. This key will become enabled even if the recording is less than the configurable skip duration. The FAST FORWARDS key becomes disabled at the end of a recording and only becomes enabled again when the recording has been rewound by at least one second. This key will become enabled even if the recording is less than the configurable skip duration.
8 -- 12
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
The following illustrations show the Audio Replay screen during playback and then playback paused:
8 -- 13
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Playback stops automatically at the end of the recording or by use of the STOP key. When playback is stopped, either automatically or by you, the playback position returns to the start of the recording, i.e., the PLAY key shows the play icon, the slider bar cursor returns to the start position, and the elapsed time resets to 00:00. If no recording is selected, i.e., when an empty list is displayed, all playback controls (SLIDER BAR, PLAY, STOP, REWIND and FAST FORWARDS) are unavailable and greyed--out (disabled). The playback status area indicates stopped, with time values zero--ed. The following shows the Recorder Replay list screen with an empty list:
8.1.7
Cancelling a Replay
If the Recorder Replay List screen is exited, e.g., while changing screens, any replay activity is stopped.
8.1.8
Recording State Icon

If, on your system the Main Screen contains a Status Bar then an icon will be displayed showing the current recording state. Two possible states can be displayed Recording or Idle.
8 -- 14
DS2000
8.1.9
OPERATOR MANUAL VAIU Aux Input Recording
The VAIU will detect that external analogue audio is available at the Aux Input socket when a switch connected to this socket is closed. The VAIU will signal that audio is available at Aux Input and the audio will then be routed through and recorded. This recording will have a Call Type of ERT. At the same time all other audio in the VAIU will be de--routed. This means that the ERT recording will contain only audio from the Aux Input. ERT recordings have the highest precedence so when the Aux Input switch is activated any other recording currently in progress will be stopped and a new recording started. If, for example, a Talkgroup is selected either before or during an ERT recording but has not been deselected in the meantime, then when the ERT recording ends a new recording will be started with the appropriate call type, in this case Sel Radio. If, however, the TalkGroup is deselected/demonitored, no new recording will be started when the ERT recording ends. If an Emergency Alarm is handled by the operator either before or during the ERT recording the EMG tag will not be set on the ERT recording. Recordings either side of the ERT recording will have the EMG tag set if the alarm is active at that time. See Example 4 above.
8.1.10
Terminal Override Considerations

During Terminal Override all audio for the overridden OPs headset primary ear is redirected to the overriding OPs terminal position. Similarly, microphone audio at the overriding OPs terminal position is routed to resources selected on the overridden OP.
8.1.10.1
Audio Recording
If audio is being recorded at an overriding operator position it will be stored on the server for that OP and not for the overridden operator position. Eg. if an operator at position three overrides operator position four the recording is labelled for operator position three as that is where the audio is recorded and it will contain operator position threes voice, not the operator at position fours. If audio is being recorded at an operator position when that operator position is overridden the recording is stopped at the overridden operator position and restarted at the overriding operator position. If audio is being recorded at the overriding operator position when Terminal Override is cancelled the recording is stopped at the overriding operator position and restarted at the overridden operator position.
8.1.10.2
Audio Replaying
During Terminal Override audio recordings selected for playback will be redirected to the overriding operator positions headset primary ear. No audio will be routed to the overridden operator position. If audio is being replayed at an operator position when that operator position is overridden the playback is stopped at the overridden operator position. Playback at the overriding operator position will not be restarted unless that operator position requests it. If audio is being replayed at an overriding operator position when that operator position cancels Terminal Override the playback is stopped at the overriding operator position.
8 -- 15
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Playback at the overridden operator positionoperator position will not be restarted unless that operator position requests it.
8.1.10.3
Audio Replay Recording List

If an overriding operator position chooses Inst Repl you will either get the Terminal Selection screen, if the overridden operator position has the appropriate privileges, or you will get a list of recordings created by the yourself. If the overridden operator position has access to other operator positions recordings then the overriding operator position will be able to replay recordings made by themselves or the overridden operator position. This will be the case even if the overriding operator position does not have the appropriate privileges. If the overridden operator position only has access to their own recordings then the overriding operator position will only be able to see recordings made by themselves, i.e. the overriding operator position. This will be the case even if the overriding operator position has the appropriate privilege. Recordings created during Terminal Override will be listed under the overriding operator positions id.
Helpful Hint
The message
INVALID OPERATION - AUDIO ROUTED
is displayed in the message area, and no further action taken if replay is attempted while primary audio is routed. The message
INVALID OPERATION - AUDIO SERVER UNAVAILABLE
is displayed and no futher action taken if replay is attempted and the Audio Server is not available. The message
AUDIO SERVER LOGON FAILURE
is displayed and no further action taken if replay is attempted if the operator has not been configured correctly on the Audio Server.
8 -- 16
DS2000
8.2
OPERATOR MANUAL
Ancillary Controls and Alarm Indications

specification.
Note: Availability and screen position of the ANCIL key is dependent on your systems
Touch the ANCIL key to display the Ancillary Control screen. This allows you to remotely control doors, gates, CCTV cameras, etc, and to accept alarms. Many of the Ancillary keys are non-latching (i.e., they operate only when your finger is on the key). Some of the Ancillary keys may also have been configured to directly access telephone lines. Only one user at a time may access each group of controls. The users terminal number will appear on the keys at the other terminals.
Note:
The ANCIL keys automatically change to the Pending state when there are any unacknowledged ancillary inputs (e.g., Alarms/Inputs from other equipment connected to the Ancillary function, see section 8.2.3).
Important: The Ancillary keys shown in this section are examples and will vary from those available at your site. The System Manager will set up the screen according to the controlled and monitored equipment.
8 -- 17
Amb_8.2_ANCIL CONT & ALARMS
VOLUME 1 MISCELLANEOUS 8.2.1 Ancillary Key Alarms
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
When an ancillary input signal is received (e.g., alarm), the ANCIL key on the Main Screen changes to its Active state. Touch the key to display the Ancillary screen in the General Work Area. Next, touch the ALARM key to display the individual Alarm keys screen.
The relevant key will be in its Pending state; touch the key to acknowledge the alarm. The key will change to its Active state. Follow local site procedures to ensure that appropriate action is taken to deal with the cause of the alarm. The key will return to its Idle state when the Alarm condition has been removed.
Use the PREV LEVEL key to return to the Main Ancillary page.
Use the QUIT key to return to the Main Telephone page.
8 -- 18
Amb_8.2_ANCIL CONT & ALARMS
DS2000
8.3
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
New PIN or Password

Availability of this functionality is dependent on your system. You may have either option or both.
8.3.1
Changing Your PIN or Password

If one of these keys is displayed on the Preselection menu, you can use it to change your PIN or Password. When you touch the appropriate key the Preselection screen is replaced by the Change Pin or Change Password screen. Enter your new PIN/Password by touching the required characters on the keypad. Four or five digits are usually used for a PIN, and six alphanumeric characters for a Password. Check with the System Manager to see if your site has been configured to make use of fewer digits or characters. When you have entered your new PIN/Password correctly, touch the ENTER key for it to be validated. The message
PLEASE ENTER NEW PIN AGAIN
or
PLEASE RE-ENTER NEW PASSWORD
is displayed in the message area. You must enter your new PIN/Password exactly as the first time. The new characters will only be accepted if both entries are identical. Once the new PIN or Password is accepted, the message
PIN ACCEPTED : VALID AT LOG ON
or
PASSWORD OK; VALID AT LOG ON
is displayed and the Preselections menu screen will be displayed. The access authority of your old PIN/Password will be transferred to the new one.
Helpful Hint
If the two entries you made do not match, the message -PIN ENTRIES DO NOT MATCH : RE-ENTER PIN
or
PASSWORDS DO NOT MATCH : RE-ENTER
will be displayed. When a number is displayed on the NEW PIN or NEW PASSWD key, then another user is accessing this facility. You will see the message
ACCESS DENIED - IN USE BY OP XX -
displayed and no further action can be taken until they finish. If the new PIN/Password coincides with another that is already in use, the message
PIN NOT ACCEPTED . RE-ENTER PIN
or
PASSWORD NOT ACCEPTED . RE-ENTER PASSWORD
is displayed. The owner of the compromised PIN/Password will then be prompted to change it when they next log on.
8 -- 19
Amb_8.3_CHANGE PIN_1
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
If you decide not to change your PIN/Password, touch the QUIT key to return to the Preselection screen. Use the BACKSPACE key to delete the last character entered.
Use the CLEAR key to delete all the characters entered.
8 -- 20
Amb_8.3_CHANGE PIN_1
DS2000
8.4
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
Headset and Loudspeaker Volume Levels

Availability and screen position of the H/SET VOL key is dependent on your systems specification. If you do not have a headset volume control on the speaker, the volume level at your terminal automatically sets itself to 75% of the system value. An on-screen headset volume control and loudspeaker control is provided, and is accessed via the H/SET VOL key. Touch the H/SET VOL key and the Volume Control screen is invoked in the General Work Area of the screen; you can set the volume level of the audio in your headset and/or the volume level to the loudspeaker.
Adjust the volume to the required level by touching the coloured slider and dragging your finger to the new setting. When you remove your finger, the level will lock at that setting. Certain installations have dual-purpose double headsets, with radio on one earpiece and telephone in the other. In these cases, two sliders and scales are displayed, one for radio and one for telephone.
8 -- 21
Amb_8.4_H/SET VOL
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Use the PREV DSPLY key to return to the previous screen, or the QUIT key to return to the default Main Screen.
Helpful Hint
The system is set up to prevent you from reducing the audio level below 25%. When a system allows volume adjustment via the VAIU and the on--screen controls, the on--screen settings should be set to 100% and the adjustments made thereafter at the VAIU.
8 -- 22
Amb_8.4_H/SET VOL
DS2000
8.5
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
Call Supervisor (Console Request)

Availability and screen position of the CALL SUP key is dependent on your systems specification.
Important: This chapter reflects standard call supervisor functionality. If your system supports Group Partitioning functionality, this Section should be read in conjunction with sections 8.16 and 8.17.
8.5.1
Introduction
The CALL SUP key calls the Supervisor wherever they are logged on; it is used to alert supervisors that you want their attention. This function does not support speech therefore existing audio links are to be used for speech, e.g., Internal Intercom or Telephone Monitor facility. When you touch this key it causes the equivalent key to flash on the Supervisors screen.
8.5.2
8.5.2.1
Method of Operation
Making a Call Supervisor Request
Touch the CALL SUP key. The corresponding key will flash on the desk(s) nominated by the System Manager to receive CALL SUP request calls. Your terminal number will be displayed on their key to identify the calling terminal. The message is displayed in your message area.
CALL SUPERVISOR ACTIVE
8.5.2.2
Confirming a Call Supervisor Request
If you are a receiver of call requests, i.e., supervisor, when the CALL SUP key flashes, touch it to acknowledge the request. The message
CALL SUPERVISOR ACCEPTED
is displayed in your message area. Unless there is another call waiting, your CALL SUP key will stop flashing, confirming the acknowledgement.
8 -- 23
Amb_8.5_CONSOLE REQUEST
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Helpful Hint
If there is another operator also making a Call Supervisor request call before you, calls are stacked and when the previous call is cleared your request is displayed automatically. If you touch the key before it has been acknowledged, it cancels the request. At the Supervisors console the message
ALERT ALREADY ACCEPTED OR GONE AWAY
indicates that someone else has taken the request, or that the caller has cancelled the request. The CALL SUP key operates in one direction only. It is an outgoing facility for operators and an incoming facility for Supervisor users. The system is configured by the System Manager to determine which User Types are receivers and which are senders.
8 -- 24
Amb_8.5_CONSOLE REQUEST
DS2000
8.6
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
Area Set Up
Availability and screen position of the AREA SETUP key is dependent on your systems specification.
8.6.1
Introduction
The AREA SETUP key is used for accessing different Functional Areas. Functional Areas contains a preconfigured combination of radios, talkgroups, telephone keys and telphone pages that have been set up in the database by the System Manager. The key is also be used for accessing, in order to remove or rearrange Functional Areas.
8.6.2
Selecting Functional Areas

Touch the AREA SETUP key. If your User Type allows it, the General Work Area will change to display the Functional Area Selection screen. The message
CHOOSE A FUNCTIONAL AREA
is displayed in the message area. The NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE keys are provided for those sites having more than one page of Functional Area keys. Select the desired Functional Area(s) by touching the associated area key. The key changes to its Active state and the area is populated in the Selected column. You can add more than one area if required. If you select the wrong area key, you can cancel the selection by touching it again.
When you have made your selection, touch the DONE key. The Preselected Radio keys and Telephone Line keys will appear on their respective pages in the order in which they were selected. When additional Functional Areas give you more than 12 telephone pages, Page 13 and above are not displayed and are ignored. However, if you deselect a Functional Area that includes a telephone page below Page 13, the gap will be closed and the first of the ignored pages will be added at the end. Touch the QUIT key to abandon the Functional Area selection.
8 -- 25
Amb_8.6_FUNC AREA SETUP
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Helpful Hint
If you touch DONE with no Functional Area selected, the message

INVALID - NO FUNCTIONAL AREAS
is displayed and you are not permitted to exit the display. The message
INVALID - TOO MANY RADIO CHANS
is displayed if you select several Functional Areas and the number of preselected radio/talkgroups channels is exceeded.
8.6.3
Rearranging Functional Area Positions

Radio and Telephone pages appear in the order that corresponds to the order in which the Functional Areas were selected. Their positions can be rearranged if necessary. With the Functional Area screen displayed, touch one of the Functional Areas listed in the left--hand Selected column. The message will be displayed.
SELECT DESTINATION POSITION
Next, touch the line containing the Functional Area with which you want to exchange your first selection. Repeat the process as necessary until the order is as you want it. This new order will be retained and stored when you log off. It will be reinstated when you log on again. If you need to abandon a line you have chosen, touch any screen key that is not in the list of Functional Areas. Touch the DONE key when you have finished your selection. The message
FUNCTIONAL AREAS RE-ORDERED
is displayed.
8 -- 26
DS2000
8.6.4
OPERATOR MANUAL Deselecting Functional Areas
Touch the AREA SETUP key. The General Work Area will change to display the Functional Area Selection screen. The message
CHOOSE A FUNCTIONAL AREA
is displayed in the message area. Deselect the Functional Area by touching the active key. This key will change to its Idle state and the message
FUNCTIONAL AREA REMOVED
is displayed.
When you have finished your selection, touch the DONE key. If you touch the DONE key with all the Functional Areas deselected, the message
INVALID NO FUNCTIONAL AREAS
is displayed.
Press QUIT to return to the main screen without saving.
Helpful Hint
If you select a wrong key and activate an inactive Functional Area, you can cancel the selection by touching it again. If you try to cancel a Functional Area selection that has: a) b) c) Radio channels/talkgroups Monitored and/or Radio channels/talkgroups Selected, or Has an active telephone call: the message displayed in the message area will be either
INVALID - RADIO CHANNELS ACTIVE
or
INVALID - PHONE CALLS ACTIVE
If, when a Functional Area is deselected, no other user has it preselected, the message
FN AREA XXXXX NOT PRESELECTED
is generated and displayed at the logged--on Supervisors position. Important: Although a user may have preselected a Functional Area, part of the Functional Area may be hidden due to individual radio and telephone subgroup masks for that user. The Not Preselected alarm takes no account of these masked settings, so some radios and telephones may not be covered.
8 -- 27
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
8.7
8.7.1
Note:
Remote Access
Introduction
This facility may not be available to all users. The Remote Access facility permits you to access a different Control Room. It can be used to support another site when required. It also allows a Control Room to be evacuated and its functions to be handled by other Control Centres. Provided that your access rights permit, and that the intersite link is available for use, remote access enables your terminal to become a virtual terminal at a selected remote site.
8.7.2
Accessing the Remote Site

Touch the REM ACC key to display the Remote Access screen in the General Work Area. The message
CHOOSE A SITE TO ACCESS
is displayed in the message area. Select the site required; there will be a delay of typically from 1 to 30 seconds whilst the remote access session is established, and the message
REMOTE OPERATOR ACCESS, PLEASE WAIT
is displayed in the message area. When the remote control link has been established, the message area changes to show
REMOTE OPERATOR ACCESS CONNECTED
and the General Work Area changes to show the Logon screen. Log on using the User ID and Password allocated to you for the remote site. There may be a delay of up to 70 seconds while your ID is verified and confirmation is returned. When this is received you become an operator with radio channels, talkgroups and telephones listed for the remote site. If required, after logging on enter your User Type. You have all the access rights given to the ID and/or User Type which have been set up for you at the remote site. The Supervisors at your site and the remote site will be advised via the messages
REMOTE OP ESTABLISHED TO SITE XXX
and
REMOTE OP ESTABLISHED FROM SITE XXX
8 -- 28
Amb_8.7_REMOTE ACCESS
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Helpful Hint
If the data link cannot be set up, the Site key will be highlighted and the message
REMOTE TERMINAL UNAVAILABLE
is displayed in the message area. If the site is already being accessed its key will be highlighted, and when you try to select it the message may be displayed in the message area. If it is not available the fact is automatically recorded in the system faults log. The maximum number of remote operators for each site is defined at the time of manufacture; see the System Manager for details. You can only preselect radios/talkgroups which are terminated at the remote site. Call logger information on radio channels, talkgroups, telephone lines and other equipment terminated at the remote site is recorded at the remote site. You will not be able to: a) b) c) d) e) Answer motorway telephones from the remote site. Mimic a user at the remote site. Override the terminal of a user at the remote site. Select Remote again from the remote site. Be mimicked by a user at either the remote site or your own local site. Instant replay audio is recorded at your own site -- use it in the normal manner to replay your own and the remote sites terminals recordings (if permitted). Users at the remote site will not be able to access your recordings, if they try to they will see the message
OPERATOR REMOTE - ACCESS DENIED REMOTE TERMINAL UNAVAILABLE
If you select a PRINT command, the resulting printout appears on the printer at the remote site. The message
PRINTER NOT ATTACHED
indicates that the printer is off line or is out of paper. The message
PRINTER ERROR
means that the printer is not connected. Continued.....
8 -- 29
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
The messages
Helpful Hint
REMOTE AUDIO LINK FAILED (XXX YYY)
and
CONTROL LINK FAILED
indicate typical breakdowns of the communications between sites. You will normally remain logged on at the remote site until you log off. The only exceptions to this are a line or an equipment failure, indicated by a message similar to the above with
REMOTE OP TERMINATED TO SITE XXX
and displayed in the Supervisors message area. If this happens an entry is automatically recorded in the system faults log.
REMOTE OP TERMINATED FROM SITE XXX
8.7.3
Leaving (Logging Off) the Remote Site

To log off, QUIT from the Main Screen to get the Preselections Menu screen and touch QUIT again to return to your own local Remote Access screen. The extra terminal is removed at the remote site and the Supervisors at your site and the remote site will be advised
REMOTE OP TERMINATED TO SITE XXX
and
REMOTE OP TERMINATED FROM SITE XXX
respectively.
8 -- 30
DS2000
8.8
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
Alpha Numeric Keypads

Availability of the keypads is dependent on your systems specification.
8.8.1
Introduction
There will be two styles of keypad, Alphanumeric and Numeric. They are to provide operators with keyboard facilities via the touch screen or mouse. Certain displays which require keyboard input will be configured to summon an on--screen keypad.
8.8.2
Method of Operation
A keypad can be invoked by touching the KEYBOARD key, or automatically, when displaying a screen that contains a text/numeric field requiring data entry.
Two keypads are defined: Alphanumeric keypad -- This keypad can be used to enter text, numbers, characters and symbols. It can be used for input boxes that require any kind of text, i.e., numbers, letters or symbols. Numeric keypad -- This keypad can be used to enter numbers in input boxes that only allow numbers, e.g., the ISSI address input box.
8.8.3
Alphanumeric Keypad
The touch keypad has the same layout as a standard Qwerty keyboard. The following buttons can be used to amend characters entered into a field:
8 -- 31
Amb_8.8_ALPHA NUMERIC KEYPADS_1
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Touch the BACKSPACE key to delete the character to the left of the cursor.
Touch the ERASE key to delete all the characters entered.
Touch the DELETE key to delete the character to the right of the cursor.
Touch the CANCEL key to remove the keypad and return to the screen from which it was invoked.
8.8.4
Numeric Keypad
The touch numeric keypad has the same layout as a standard numeric keypad. The following buttons can be used to amend characters entered into a field:
Touch the BACKSPACE key to delete the character to the left of the cursor.
Touch the ERASE key to delete all the characters entered.
Touch the CANCEL key to remove the keypad and return to the screen from which it was invoked.
8 -- 32
Amb_8.8_ALPHA NUMERIC KEYPADS_1
DS2000
8.9
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
Operator Note Pad

Availability of this function is dependent on your systems specification. The Operator Note Pad is an application that provides a list of notes that can be individually selected, viewed, edited and deleted. There are two different types of notes available: 1. 2. Personal notes which give read/write access to an operator. Global notes that give read access to an operator and read/write access to a supervisor.
Functionality is provided that will allow a supervisor to remove a user and his/her notes from the system. Functionality is also included to allow a System Manager to setup the notes environment. The Notes Application is accessed via the browser integrated into the DS2000 Operator. Notes are always accessed from the local site to which the operator is logged on, even if they log onto another site as a remote operator. Note: The Note Pad function key is accessed through the browser functionality either directly or indirectly by selecting another browser function.
8.9.1
Operator Note Pad List
Touch the OP NOTES key to invoke the Note Pad list.
When the Operator Notepad is invoked the user is presented with a list of notes as shown in the following diagram. The application configuration determines the displayed. It is possible for the initial display to show the personal notes, global notes or personal and global notes. The PERSONAL, GLOBAL, SHOW ALL, ADMIN, NEW NOTE and SEARCH keys change colour when pressed. The colour of the PERSONAL and GLOBAL keys is configured such as to associate the personal key colour with the colour of personal notes and the global key colour with the colour of global notes. This readily identifies which set of notes is being displayed.
8 -- 33
Amb_8.9_OPERATOR_NOTE_PAD_1
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
PERSONAL
Touching the PERSONAL key displays a list of your personal notes.
GLOBAL
Touching the GLOBAL key displays a list of site global notes (global notes are not specific to an individual user).
SHOW ALL
Touching the SHOW ALL key displays a list of all notes that are available to you, i.e., a mix of your personal notes and global notes.
ADMIN
This key is only displayed to a user logged on as an administrator. Touching the ADMIN key displays the administration screen.
NEW NOTE
Touching the NEW NOTE key displays a screen for viewing, creating, editing and deleting an individual note (see the following section on editing).
SEARCH
Touching the SEARCH key after input to the Search field, displays a list of all notes relevant to the search criteria (see the following section on searching).
8 -- 34
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
DETAILS
Touching the DETAILS key displays the information contained in the selected note.
8.9.1.1
Searching
When instigating a search, the titles only are searched. The search criteria is entered in the Search field. Any title field that contains the input text is retrieved. Searches are performed on both global and personal notes, i.e., if the is entered in the search text any notes that contain the in the title is returned. Search text is not case sensitive. Note: Standard wildcards are not used. The search facility just looks at specific entered text. Touching the SEARCH key after input to the Search field, returns a list of notes filtered to the relevant search criteria.
SEARCH
8.9.1.2
New Note
The NEW NOTE key is disabled at all times except: S S NEW NOTE When the personal key is pressed If you have supervisor rights and the global key is pressed
Touching the NEW NOTE key allows you to input new note details as shown in the following screen:
8 -- 35
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
When the DETAILS or NEW NOTE keys are pressed the operator is presented with the screen shown above. This screen is for viewing, creating, editing or deleting individual notes. The PERSONAL, GLOBAL, SHOW ALL, ADMIN, NEW NOTE and SEARCH keys are still available and their functionality is the same as previously described.
SAVE
Touching the SAVE key saves changes to the updated note. This key is enabled when the note is updatable by you, e.g., personal notes to an operator and/or global notes to a supervisor.
DELETE
Touch the DELETE key to delete the viewed note. This key is enabled when the note is updatable by you, e.g., personal notes to an operator and/or global notes to a supervisor.
Helpful Hint
If the web server is inoperative when the Notepad key is touched, the standard browser Page cannot be displayed page is displayed. If data cannot be displayed in the Notepad application, an advisory message detailing the problem is displayed. If the problem persists contact the Administrator. If when trying to invoke the on--screen keyboard, the external keyboard application is not found the message
KEYBOARD APPLICATION NOT FOUND
is displayed.
8 -- 36
DS2000
8.10
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
System Partitioning
Availability of this function is dependent on your systems specification. This facility allows groups of operators attached to the same common equipment to be largely isolated from each other, therefore allowing them to work independently as if they are in virtual control rooms.
8.10.1
Operator Groups Overview

There are 32 groups. Group names are defined within the Operator Groups database file. Each entry defines the short and long name for each group. Resources can be members of any combination of groups or none of the groups. Resources that are not members of any groups are not accessible by any operators and are not reported on to any operators; similarly they are unable to access any other operators. Certain resources are tagged with a group membership mask; these are described in the sub--sections below.
8.10.1.1
Operator Terminal Positions

Operators have their group membership defined by terminal configuration and user configuration. While a terminal is logged off, the terminal assumes the group membership defined in the terminal configuration entry for that position. When the position logs on, the terminals group membership is upgraded to include any additional groups specified in the users configuration. When an operator terminal is logged on, the joint group membership (of terminal and user configuration) is used to define which resources that position has access to and which system fault messages are displayed at that position. When an operator terminal logs off, the group membership reverts to that specified by the appropriate terminal configuration entry.
8.10.1.2
Legacy Radios
Radios have their group membership defined within Radio Channels database file. Each entry includes a group membership mask. An operator terminal position only has access to a radio if the users logged on group membership overlaps that configured for the radio. The group membership for this resource is also used to determine whether a fault message related to this resource is displayed on operator terminal positions.
8.10.1.3
Talkgroups
Talkgroups have their group membership defined by Talkgroup database file. Each entry includes a group membership mask. An operator terminal position only has access to a Talkgroup if the users logged on group membership overlaps that configured for the Talkgroup. The group membership for this resource is also used to determine whether a fault generated to this resource is displayed on operator terminal positions.
8 -- 37
Amb_8.10_SYSTEM_PARTITIONING
8.10.1.4 Functional Areas
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Functional Areas have their group membership defined by FuncArea. Each entry includes a group membership mask. An operator terminal position will only have access to a functional area if the users logged on group membership overlaps that configured for the functional area. The group membership for this resource is also used to determine whether a fault message relating to this resource is displayed on operator terminal positions.
8.10.1.5
ICCS Sites
Sites have their group membership defined by the Remote Access database file. Each entry includes a group membership mask. The group membership for this resource is used to determine whether a fault message relating to this resource is displayed on operator terminal positions.
8.10.1.6
Telephone Lines
Lines have their group membership defined by the Telephone Lines database file. Each entry includes a group membership mask. The group membership for this resource is used to determine whether a fault message relating to this resource is displayed on operator terminal positions.
8.10.1.7
Telephone Extensions
Extensions have their group membership defined by the DPNSS Extensions database file. Each entry includes a group membership mask. The group membership for this resource is used to determine whether a fault message relating to this resource is displayed on operator terminal positions.
8.10.1.8
Telephone Groups
Telephone groups have their group membership defined by the Telephone Groups database file. Each entry includes a group membership mask. The group membership for this resource is used to determine whether a fault message relating to this resource is displayed on operator terminal positions.
8 -- 38
DS2000
8.10.2
OPERATOR MANUAL Operator Selection
Operator Functions that involve choosing another terminal position for action are all filtered according to the current group membership of each operator position. An operator terminal position only has visibility of another position if their group membership overlaps. The following operator functions have other terminal visibility controlled by the operator mask: Intercom Enable & Disable Terminal Eavesdrop (Terminal) Telephone Eavesdrop Local Recorder Replay Call Transfer Mimic Terminal Override
8.10.3
Call Supervisor Segregation

This uses the group membership of each operator to determine which terminals are alerted when a groups member calls a supervisor for assistance. When the system is partitioned, only Supervisors in overlapping groups are alerted when an operator requests assistance.
8.10.4
Fault Message Segregation

This uses group membership associated with each resource to confine Fault Messages so they are only displayed on operator terminal positions to which the fault might be applicable. It uses the group access mask associated with each reportable resource. When a fault report is raised, the reporting node collates and ORs together all group masks for any reported item, e.g., if the SNP reports that an Operator (OpId) has answered a telephone line (LineId) out of sequence and reports a fault, it ORs the groups masks for the OpId and LineId. The group mask is included within the Fault Report and forwarded to all operator terminal positions (where the fault is configured for operator display). Each operator terminal position is able to filter the message by ANDing his group mask with the Fault Message group mask and then only display messages which are applicable to their group(s).
Note:
The Fault Log is currently unfiltered and contains all fault messages whether they apply to the viewing operator or not. Each fault does, however, contain the combined group membership information.
8.10.4.1
Critical Fault Log Filtering

Critical faults shown on the Critical Fault list at an operator terminal position are filtered according to the same rules as for conventional top--line faults.
8 -- 39
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
8.11
Note:
Terminal Select with Group Partitioning

Availability of this functionality is dependent on your systems specification. This section is to be read in conjunction with the section on the specific function you are trying to access, i.e., transfering a call (Trans Call). The Terminal Select screen is used by functions that require the user to prime a terminal position, e.g., MIMIC (Mimic), TELE EAVES (Telephone Eavesdrop), EAVES (Terminal Eavesdrop), INTERCOM (Internal Intercom), TRAN CALL (Transfer Call), INST REPL (Local Recorder), E/D TERM (Enable/Disable Terminal) and TERM OVRD (Terminal Override).
8.11.1
Functional Overview
The Terminal Select screen is displayed in the General Work Area and shows the Operator Groups that are available to you. When a Group has been primed the operators within that Group are listed with an entry line of information per operator. A maximum of 11 operators may be viewed at one time with a vertical scrollbar provided to view additional operators. The following screen shows the layout of a typical Terminal Select screen:
Function Name and long group name Operator group with scrollbars (Pol1 selected) Terminal ID Operator Name Status Other terminal number Activity icons Work area listing up to 11 operators per screen Vertical scrollbar to view additional operators Function keys including Refresh
8.11.1.1
Operator Group
Horizontal tabs along the top of the work area, incorporating arrow keys that are used to navigate to a Group and hence the operator positions listed within that Group.
8.11.1.2
Terminal Identifier
The terminal identifier is a reference to the three digit operator terminal number.
8.11.1.3
User Name
As specified within the database for the user (up to 24 characters). If no user is logged on, the list entry is displayed as <not logged on>.
8 -- 40
Amb_8.11_TERM SEL _WITH_GRP PARTITIONING
DS2000
8.11.1.4
OPERATOR MANUAL
Status
Displays the status of the operator position. This varies depending on the function accessed.
8.11.1.5
Other Terminal Number

This is displayed as appropriate, when one terminal is performing an action on another terminal, e.g., Eavesdrop or terminal override.
8.11.1.6
Activity Icon
Provides additional information as to the current status and activity of each operator. These icons are described in the Dynamic Operator Status section of this book. The following table shows a list of functions with their display charateristics:
Function Key MIMIC TELE EAVES EAVES ICOM TRAN CALL INST REPL E/D TERM TERM OVRD
User Name p p p p p p (b) p (b) p
Status p (a) p (a) p p p p (a)
Other Terminal No. p p p p p
Note:
(a) only when a function is in progress, otherwise this is not displayed (b) only when a terminal is logged on, otherwise this is not displayed
8.11.2
Function Keys
The function keys that are displayed are dependant on the functionality you are accessing, i.e., Mimic. The function keys are greyed--out (disabled) when they are not available.
8.11.2.1
Refresh Key
The REFRESH function key appears on all terminal select screens. The key flashes to indicate pending changes to a terminals Group membership during operation or where an operator has logged on or logged off. Touching the flashing REFRESH key updates the displayed list. For those functions that only list logged on users, i.e., Mimic, Telephone Eavesdrop, Terminal Eavesdrop, Internal Intercom, Transfer Call and Terminal Override, when a group member
8 -- 41
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
logs off, the operator name is changed to <not logged on> and the REFRESH key flashes. Choosing the REFRESH key removes the logged off user from the display. If a group member logs on to the system, the user is added to the end of the list and the REFRESH key flashes. Touching the REFRESH key moves the newly logged on user to their sequential position in the list.
8.11.2.2
Priming an Operator
Touch or click the mouse on the required operator position list entry. An operator position may be deselected by retouching or by priming an alternative operator position.
8 -- 42
DS2000
8.12
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
Browser
Availability, operation, screen position and labelling of the BROWSER key is dependent on your systems specification.
8.12.1
Introduction
The browser facility is customer configurable and can be used to access various Web--based information systems, e.g., your Intranet, CCTV.
8.12.2
Browser Screen
Touching the BROWSER key invokes the browser screen in the GWA of the screen. There may be several keys displayed at the top of the browser screen giving access to specified Web--based systems.
The SIZE key is a toggle key and is used to change the size of the screen from being contained within the GWA to filling the whole screen and vice versa.
The KEYBOARD key is used to invoke the Milosoft on--screen keyboard for editing web--based applications.
8 -- 43
Amb_8.12_BROWSER
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
8 -- 44
Amb_8.12_BROWSER
Chapter 9 Support Functions
VOLUME 1 SUPPORT FUNCTIONS Amendment

Issue A 1 1A 2 Reason First draft incorporating release V9.11 functionality First Issue First Draft V 161 Second Issue to Incorporate Changes to reflect V161 Author SS JC TS SS Date 25.04.06 11.12.06 18.09.07 01/11/07
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Approved
9 -- 2
Amb_9.0_SUP FUNCT
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
Contents
9.1 Terminal Eavesdrop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 5 9.1.1 How to Terminal Eavesdrop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 5 9.2 Mimic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 7 9.2.1 Mimic (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 7 9.2.2 Mimic with Group Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 9 9.2.2.1 Cancelling a Mimic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 10 9.3 Terminal Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11 9.4 System Alarms, Faults and Event Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14 9.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 14 9.4.2 Fault Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 14 9.4.3 System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 17 9.5 Call Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 18 9.6 Dynamic Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 19 9.6.1 Accessing the Dynamic Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 19 9.6.2 Dyn Ops Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 20 9.6.3 Icon Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 21 9.6.4 Operator Logged On Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 22 9.6.5 ACD Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 22 9.6.6 Telephone Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 23 9.6.7 Radio Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 23 9.6.8 Tetra Talkgroup Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 24 9.6.9 Tetra Individual Call Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 24 9.6.10 Internal Intercom Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 25 9.6.11 Instant Replay Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 25 9.6.12 Editing the Dyn Op Screen Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 25 9.6.12.1 Adding a New Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 25 9.6.12.2 Editing/Deleting an Existing Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 26 9.7 Critical Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 27 9.7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 27 9.7.2 Operator Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 27 9.7.3 Displaying the Critical Faults List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 27 9.7.4 Acknowledging Critical Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 29 9.7.5 Clearing Critical Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 29 9.7.6 Adding a Reference Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 29 9.7.7 Customised Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 29 9.8 Web Based Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 30 9.8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 30 9.8.2 HTML Based Help Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 30 9.8.3 HTML Edit Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 31 9.8.4 Help Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 32 9.8.5 HTML Link Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 32
9 -- 3
Amb_9.0_SUP FUNCT

OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
9 -- 4
Amb_9.0_SUP FUNCT
DS2000
9.1
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
Terminal Eavesdrop
Availability and screen position of the Terminal Eavesdrop key is dependent on your systems specification.
Important: This section reflects standard terminal eavesdrop fuctionality. If your system supports Group Partitioning functionality, this section should be read in conjunction with Sections 8.15 and 8.16. The DS2000 system supports either telephone eavesdropping or terminal eavesdropping. This section gives an operational explanation for terminal eavesdrop (for telephone eavesdrop see Chapter 5).
9.1.1
How to Terminal Eavesdrop

Terminal eavesdrop allows you to listen to the primary audio and microphone channels of an operator at another terminal.
Touch the TERM EAVES key to listen to the audio of a user at another terminal. The Terminal Select screen is now displayed and the message
appears in the message area. Up to 11 terminals can be displayed at one time in a list; use the SCROLL to view other entries. Touch your required terminal list entry, then when the EAVES key is touched, the message
EAVESDROP IN PROGRESS
is displayed in the message area. A user being eavesdropped will not know that you are listening unless they have a Terminal Select screen to view. When terminal eavesdropping, your calls in progress are put on Hold and your Selected radio channels and talkgroups change to Monitor; you will hear a mix of the other users headset and microphone audio. Cancel Eavesdrop by touching the CANCEL key; you will see the message
EAVESDROP CANCELLED
displayed in the message area.
The Terminal Eaves facility can also be cancelled by touching the QUIT key.
9 -- 5
Amb_9.1_TERM_EAVESDROP
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Helpful Hint
Remember when you Eavesdrop: a) b) c) d) e) f) Active internal intercom calls are cancelled. Unanswered outgoing calls are cancelled. Your current Eavesdrop is cancelled if you answer an individual call. Eavesdrop is cancelled if a radio is selected. Eavesdrop is cancelled if an incoming telephone call is answered. Eavesdrop is cancelled if an internal intercom call is initiated or answered.
Eavesdropping on an eavesdropper is allowed by the system. The maximum number of users in one eavesdrop is limited -- refer to the System Manager for details.
9 -- 6
Amb_9.1_TERM_EAVESDROP
DS2000
9.2
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
Mimic
Availability and screen position of the MIMIC key is dependent on your systems specification.
Important: This section reflects standard mimic and mimic with Group Partitioning. If your system supports Group Partitioning functionality, this section should be read in conjunction with Sections 8.15 and 8.16.
9.2.1
Mimic (Standard)
The Mimic function is used to view the screen and listen to the headset audio of another logged on terminal within the same control room.
Touch the MIMIC key to mimic the screen of a user at another terminal. The Terminal Select screen is now displayed, and the message
appears in the message area. Up to 11 terminals can be displayed at one time in a list on a page; use the SCROLL to view other entries. Select a terminal by touching the list entry then touch the now active MIMIC key current screen for that terminal will appear and the message
MIMIC IN PROGRESS
will be displayed in the message area. You will hear audio instantly but your screen is updated after apporoximately five seconds. A user being mimicked will have no indication unless they have a Mimic Select screen to view. During Mimic your calls in progress are put on Hold and Selected radio channels change to Monitor. Cancel the Mimic facility by touching anywhere on the screen; the message
MIMIC CANCELLED
9 -- 7
Amb_9.2_MIMIC
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Helpful Hint
Remember when you mimic another terminal: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Any Eavesdrop function you have is cancelled. Active internal intercom calls you have are cancelled. Unanswered outgoing calls you have are cancelled. Mimic is not available to or from detached operators or remote operators. Selected radio channels are put into the Monitored state. Calls in progress are put on Hold. If the mimicked user logs off, Mimic is cancelled and the display returns to the Terminal Select screen. The message
MIMIC CANCELLED
is displayed. h) Attempting to select a terminal not logged on results in the message

TERMINAL NOT LOGGED ON
being displayed. i) Attempting to to select a terminal that is already being mimicked results in the message
ACCESS NOT AVAILABLE
being displayed. If any part of the mimickers screen is touched, the Mimic is cancelled and the display returns to the Terminal Select screen. The message
MIMIC CANCELLED
is displayed. The maximum number of Mimics that can be performed simultaneously is either two or three per site (see the System Manager for details of your installation).
9 -- 8
Amb_9.2_MIMIC
DS2000
9.2.2
OPERATOR MANUAL Mimic with Group Partitioning
The Mimic function is used to view the screen and listen to the headset audio of a logged on terminal, providing the mimicking operator has access to the Group containing the logged on terminal. Touching the MIMIC key invokes the Terminal Select screen. Choose an operator from the Terminal Select screen which enables the MIMIC function key. Touch the key to mimic and and the message appears in the message area and the mimicked screen appears. The status for you as the mimicker changes to MIMICK ON XXX The status for the mimicked operator changes to MIMIC BY XXX (Where XXX is the terminal number). The following actions are taken by the system when you start the Mimic function: a) b) c) d) Selected radio channels and Talkgroups are put into the monitored state. Calls in progress are put on hold. Active internal intercom calls are cancelled. Unanswered outgoing telephone and individual calls are cleared.
MIMICKING
The mimicked operator is not aware that the mimic is in progress from the main screen, (unless the mimicked operator is viewing the Mimic screen). The mimicking terminal will still sound its own audible alarms for Urgent and Normal Telephone calls and for fault conditions, although no visual indication is given if the mimicked terminal does not provide a visual indication itself. If any part of the mimicked screen is touched, with the exception of the title bar, the mimic is cancelled. The screen of the operator being mimicked is always on top of any other program being run by the mimicking operator. Exceptions: a) b) c) d) Mimic is not available to or from remote operators and is not recommended for use over low bandwidth connections to detached operators. Dropdown lists and scrollbar movement are not shown on the mimicking operators screen. Scrolling within an internet browser window is not shown on the mimicking operators screen. Data input fields are updated on the mimicking operators screen only after the mimicked operator moves away from a field.
9 -- 9
Amb_9.2_MIMIC

9.2.2.1 Cancelling a Mimic
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
If any part of the mimicked screen is touched, the mimic is cancelled and the display returns to the Terminal Select screen. Mimic is automatically cancelled by the system if one of the following actions is taken: a) b) c) The mimicked operator logs off. The mimicking operator leaves the mimic selection screen. Scrolling within an internet browser window is not shown on the mimicking operators screen.
Helpful Hint
If the number of mimics in progress at any one time at a site reaches the upper limit, and an operator attempts a further mimic, the message
MIMIC FAILED
is displayed. Mimic will fail if: a) b) c) d) e) f) You attempt mimic and have an open connect group. An attempt to mimic a remote terminal is made. An attempt is made to mimic a terminal which is already mimicking another terminal. The terminal to be mimicked is not logged on. An attempt is made to mimic your own terminal. You attempt to mimic whilst being mimicked by another terminal.
9 -- 10
Amb_9.2_MIMIC
DS2000
9.3
OPERATOR MANUAL
Terminal Override
Important: This section reflects standard terminal override functionality. If your system supports Group Partitioning functionality, this section should be read in conjunction with Sections 8.15 and 8.16. This facility, which is accessed from the Preselections Menu screen, enables you to override an operator at another terminal. Touch the TERM OVRD key to display the Terminal Select screen. The message
appears in the message area. Up to 11 terminals can be displayed at one time in a list; use the SCROLL to view other entries.
Only logged on terminals show an Active key. Select the terminal you wish to override by touching the list entry.
The OVRDE key becomes active. Touch this key to begin the override. terminal you wish to override by touching the list entry
On a successful override, the overridden terminal displays the Terminal Overridden, Please Standby dialog as shown below and their touch screen is disabled. The currently displayed radio and telephone page (if any) continues to reflect the current state of that operator and their activities.
9 -- 11
Amb_9.3_TERMINAL OVERRIDE
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
The overriding terminal is presented with the Main Screen of the overridden terminal with its radio and telephone page configurations. Audio sources routed from the overridden terminals headset primary ear (e.g., individual calls, Monitored, Selected and connected radio channels or talkgroups, open, connected and monitored telephone lines, dependant on audio mix style) are now presented to, and controlled by, the overriding operator. Your microphone is routed to the selected resources of the overridden operator. You can key up those radios, talkgroups and individual calls as normal via the footswitch or TX key on screen. The overridden operator hears identical audio to you but is not able to transmit.
Cancel the Override facility by touching the CANCEL or QUIT key. The message
TERMINAL OVERRIDE CANCELLED
is displayed in the message area of the previously overridden terminal, and the functions that were active on the overriding terminal are re--activated. The display on the overriding terminal returns to the Terminal Select screen.
9 -- 12
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Helpful Hint
Remember when you override another terminal: a) b) c) d) e) f) Any Eavesdrop function you have is cancelled. Active internal intercom calls to the overridden terminal are cancelled. Active hold override to the overridden terminal is cancelled. Unanswered outgoing calls you have are cancelled. Override is not available to or from detached operators or remote operators. If the overridden operator logs off, Override is cancelled and the display returns to the Terminal Select screen. The message is displayed. g)
OVERRIDE CANCELLED
Attempting to select a terminal not logged on results in the message being displayed.
TERMINAL NOT LOGGED ON
h)
A terminal can only be overridden when it is showing its Main Screen. If any other screen is being displayed the message
TERMINAL OVERRIDE NOT AVAILABLE
is displayed.
9 -- 13
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
9.4
9.4.1
System Alarms, Faults and Event Messages

Overview
If a system Alarm, a system Fault or a recordable system Event occurs, a message (usually with a flashing background) is displayed in the message area of a privileged users terminal, and that terminals audible alarm is sounded. When an Alarm, Fault or Event message is displayed, you must act on the message as appropriate and then acknowledge it by touching the message area. Messages are stacked behind one another, so when the first one has been acknowledged and cleared, you need to act, acknowledge and clear any other messages in turn.
Note:
Critical fault entries may also appear in the Fault Log. These can also be viewed via the Critical Faults list which is a separate facility see section 9.9. When required, a list of Fault messages can be viewed (and printed) by using the FAULT LOG (or SYS LOG) key on the Preselection Menu screen; this provides access to the Alarms, Faults and system Event screens. As well as determining the colours and/or flash rate used to draw your attention to the message on the screen, the System Manager can also determine via the database whether an Alarm, Fault or system Event message is directed to the screen, the fault log, event log, or the printer -- or is ignored altogether. This means that a message you see on the screen may not appear in the log. Use of the FAULT LOG, SYS LOG and PRINT keys is described on the following pages.
9.4.2
Fault Log
The system identifies its own faults, alarms and events, and reports them to this log, with the most recent report being entered at the top of the log. When a new message is added the oldest is removed. The fault log, which normally has a capacity of 240 events (10 pages of 24 entries), is accessed from the Preselection Menu screen.
Touching the FAULT LOG key causes the FAULT LOG SITE SELECT screen to be displayed. Where the Remote Site facility is not implemented, the system will go straight to the second screen - shown on the next page. Select the location for the faults you wish to view and/or print out. Not all the sites shown will be accessible from every site. In these instances the display will close up so that there are no gaps between keys.
9 -- 14
Amb_9.4 FAULT LOG_3
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Touch the PRINT key to print the currently displayed page.

PRINT
9 -- 15
Amb_9.4 FAULT LOG_3
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Use the NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE keys to access the other log pages. Under the current system the fault log includes Critical Faults, Faults, Alarms and Events. These are identified in the list by a letter preceding the Code entry and by colour. The letters in the Code column are C, F, A or E respectively.
Touch the appropriate line in the list to view the Help screen for that particular entry. The Help screen is invoked with a more detailed explanation. A text input area is at the top of the Help screen for customer input, as shown below.
If you have the access rights the EDIT key will be visible. This key allows you to edit the top area of the screen, e.g., with a local explanation for clarification, or to put in a prompt to call an engineer. Touch the QUIT key to return to the Fault Log display.
Helpful Hint
The message
FAULT LOG PRINTER NOT AVAILABLE
is displayed in the message area if the printer is not connected.
9 -- 16
Amb_9.4 FAULT LOG_3
DS2000
9.4.3
OPERATOR MANUAL System Log
The system log contains an extra column to identify the site to which a fault refers; it is otherwise similar to the site log. Event messages are not normally sent to the system log.
Use the NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE keys to access the other log pages.
Touch the PRINT key to print the currently displayed page. Touch the appropriate line in the list to view the Help screen for that particular item.
9 -- 17
Amb_9.4 FAULT LOG_3
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
9.5
Call Logger
A call logger may be provided as part of the system at some installations. The call logger logs all telephone and radio traffic. Details of its operation are given in the manufacturers literature. The call logger has its own dedicated printer - it does not use the system printer. Some installations may direct the output signals, normally used to drive the call logger, to drive event recording devices. See the System Manager for details of your installation.
9 -- 18
Amb_9.5_CALL LOGGER
DS2000
9.6
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
Dynamic Operator Screen

Availability and screen position of the DYN OPS key is dependent on your systems specification. The Dynamic Operator screen enables authorised users (Supervisors) to quickly assess all operator activity from their terminals. The operating state of telephone lines, selected radio, intercom and instant replay can all be monitored. Up to 99 user consoles, including remote terminals, can be displayed on the screen. The illustration below shows an example of a typical Dynamic Operator screen. The display can be configured to represent the control room layout. The ability to edit the screen would normally be a System Manager function (see Volume 2).
9.6.1
Accessing the Dynamic Operator Screen

The Dynamic Operator screen replaces the Radio Area and the General Work Area of the Main Screen; the Telephone Call queue and top and bottom row function keys are still displayed. Access to the screen is normally only available to Supervisors and higher access users. Touch the SUPER tab followed by the DYN OP key to access the screen.
9 -- 19
Amb_9.6_DYNAMIC OPs
VOLUME 1 SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 9.6.2 Dyn Ops Display
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Each operator may be represented by a tile positioned within this area. Any operator(s) may be included or excluded from the display. Line, box and text features can be added to the display by System Manager configuration. Remote operators to this site may also be positioned on this display by specifying an operator number in the range of remote operators.
9 -- 20
Amb_9.6_DYNAMIC OPs
DS2000
9.6.3
OPERATOR MANUAL Icon Description
Each terminal position is represented by an icon. The icon is divided into several areas: Main Icon area, ACD area, Held Call area and the Activity area. There are three different icon styles available: Icon Style 1 Activity Area Main Area ACD Activity Area Terminal (Op) ID Main Screen (User) Type Held Calls Area
010 T
Icon Style 2
10 T
Icon Style 3
10
T
On some installations the Held Calls area may be replaced by a Held Telephone symbol; this is a System Manager configurable item.
9 -- 21
Amb_9.6_DYNAMIC OPs
VOLUME 1 SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 9.6.4 Operator Logged On Indication
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
When a terminal is not in use, the only information displayed on the terminal icon is the terminal number. Where a terminal is logged on but has no radios/talkgroups selected or telephone calls in progress, the terminal icon displays the logged on colour. The Main Screen Type field displays the users Main Screen as set in the User Type file (see Volume 2). The options available are: T R S -- Telephone Main Screen -- Radio Main Screen -- Special (Airwave) Main Screen
The icon can be configured to be a different colour to display remote operators (see Volume 2 Other Colours).
9.6.5
ACD Indication
The triangular area at the top right of the key is used to display ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) information (see Chapter 5). There are four possible states: Unavailable Active -- Typically set to purple Suspended -- Typically set to light green Call Active or Wrap-Up -- Typically set to black
ACD state is indicated by the colour and/or flash rate set in the Other Colours file.
9 -- 22
Amb_9.6_DYNAMIC OPs
DS2000
9.6.6
OPERATOR MANUAL Telephone Activity
Telephone activity is indicated by the icon changing colour and a Telephone icon which replaces the flashing square in the Active area whenever a terminal has a telephone line open or on monitor.
Telephone Call in Progress
Monitored Telephone Call Held telephone calls can be indicated by either the Held Call area or the Held Telephone line symbol.
9.6.7
Radio Activity
A selected radio is indicated by the icon changing colour and displaying a radio handset. When the operator transmits, the icon changes colour and displays a radiating radio. Radio Channel Selected
Radio Channel Tx
9 -- 23
Amb_9.6_DYNAMIC OPs
VOLUME 1 SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 9.6.8 Tetra Talkgroup Activity
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
A selected talkgroup is indicated by the icon changing colour and displaying a radio mast. When the operator transmits, the icon colour alternates displaying a radiating mast as shown below. Talkgroup Selected
Talkgroup Tx
alternating to
9.6.9
Tetra Individual Call Activity

An operator with a Tetra individual call in progress is indicated by the icon changing colour and displaying a radio mast with a no entry sign adjacent to it. When the operator transmits, the icon changes colour and displays a radiating mast with a no entry sign adjacent to it. Individual Call in progress
Individual Call transmitting
9 -- 24
Amb_9.6_DYNAMIC OPs
DS2000
9.6.10
OPERATOR MANUAL Internal Intercom Activity
Intercom activity is indicated by the icon changing colour and an icon of two talking heads which appears in the Active area whenever a terminal has an intercom call open or is a member of an intercom conference.
Intercom Call
9.6.11
Instant Replay Activity

Instant replay of a terminals recordings is indicated by the icon changing colour and a Tape Recorder icon which appears in the Active area.
Instant Replay
9.6.12
Editing the Dyn Op Screen Layout

The positioning of local operators on the Dynamic Operator screen can be setup and altered using the touch screen or mouse. To enable the edit mode, touch the DYN OPS key whilst viewing the Dynamic Operator screen. Edit mode is cancelled by touching the DYN OP key again, by selecting another function key, or by quitting the Dynamic Operator screen.
9.6.12.1
Adding a New Position

Select a blank area of the dynamic display where you would like the new terminal icon to be situated (either by touching the screen or left--clicking with the mouse). A new terminal icon will appear with *** to signify the terminal number. Select the terminal ID by using the top scroll bars and then select one of the three styles of tile. Select OK to accept your choices. New icon ID scroll bars
Icon style options
9.6.12.2
Editing/Deleting an Existing Icon

9 -- 25
Amb_9.6_DYNAMIC OPs
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Touch the terminal icon you wish to edit; the following menu is invoked: Exit this menu Open the edit menu Move the icon position Delete the terminal icon
CANCEL EDIT MOVE DELETE
Removes the edit menu Allows you to change the terminal ID using the up and down scroll bars Select this option then indicate the new position on the screen by mouse click or touch Deletes an icon from the layout
Helpful Hint
The following error reports are associated with the Dynamic Operator function and may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen: Adding an operator terminal with the same ID results in the message being generated.
DUPLICATE OPERATOR TILE
If the ID is out of the range of the system, the message is generated.

INVALID OPERATOR TILE
9 -- 26
Amb_9.6_DYNAMIC OPs
DS2000
9.7
Note:
OPERATOR MANUAL
Critical Faults
Availability and screen position of the CRIT FLT key is dependent on your systems specification.
9.7.1
Overview
Faults can have an additional classification to allow specific faults to be specified as Critical. The Critical Fault Logging functionality intercepts faults with this classification and adds them to a system wide Critical Faults list. Operator positions download the Critical Faults list at logon and the list is then maintained via updates received from the DS2000. Privileged operators can view the Critical Fault list, acknowledge and clear faults and add a reference tag to active faults as well as displaying customised help information relating to each type of fault.
Note:
The Critical Fault List is cleared when a full system reset occurs, and relies on faults being re-detected for them to be added to the Critical Faults list again.
9.7.2
Operator Presentation
As part of the logon sequence the Operator position downloads the Critical Faults list from the DS2000 and then receives automatic updates that are used to maintain the local copy of the list. When there are either unacknowledged or acknowledged critical faults outstanding in the system, the CRIT FAULT key is displayed in its active state (with optional audible alarms).
9.7.3
Displaying the Critical Faults List

The key is displayed in one of the following states: Idle -- No faults active in the system Unacknowledged Critical faults present Acked Critical faults present This key shows the count of unacknowledged faults in the bottom left corner and the count of acknowledged faults in the bottom right corner. Touching the CRIT FAULT key invokes the Critical Faults list screen. This displays an ordered list of active faults in the system in the following order: Unacknowledged Critical faults Faults Acknowledged by this operator Faults Acknowledged by other operators
9 -- 27
Amb_9.7_CRITICAL FAULT
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Each line entry in the list includes: < Date > < Time > <Fault Text > < Reference Tag > <Acknowledging Op ID > Note: The <Acknowledging Op ID > is only shown where the fault was acknowledged by another terminal position. The faults list can be scrolled if required using the scroll bar and individual fault entries may be primed (or unprimed). Once an item has been primed the following functions are available using the keys provided, dependent on the operators configuration: Acknowledge Clear Apply a reference tag Display customised Help information
The Critical Faults list display is refreshed when any new fault arrives, but maintains any primed entry. Touching any other Fault Entry or any other function key other than those at the bottom of the Faults List screen causes a primed Fault Entry to be automatically unprimed.
9 -- 28
DS2000
9.7.4
OPERATOR MANUAL Acknowledging Critical Faults
To carry out this action, touch (prime) the desired entry in the list then touch the ACK key.
This action is immediately presented to all other operators who are currently displaying the Critical Faults screen and the Acking Op Id is added to that fault entry. The number of unacknowledged critical faults displayed on the CRIT FAULT key is decreased by one and the acknowledged count is increased by one.
9.7.5
Clearing Critical Faults

To carry out this action, touch (prime) the desired acknowledged fault entry in the list then touch the CLR key. This action is immediately presented to all other operators who are currently displaying the Critical Fault screen and the Acking Op Id is added to that fault entry. The number of acknowledged critical faults displayed on the CRIT FAULT key is decreased by one.
9.7.6
Adding a Reference Tag

An alphanumeric reference tag (up to eight characters) can be attached to a particular list entry, i.e., for audit purposes. The reference can be set up in the Text Field between the APPLY TAG and HELP keys. Text can be entered from either a keyboard (a) or via an on screen keyboard (b). a) b) Enter text into the Text field, then prime the desired list entry. Touch the APPLY TAG key to add the input reference text to that entry Touching the key with the keyboard icon invokes an on screen alphanumeric keyboard. Enter text via this keyboard. Touch the TAG TEXT to automatically populate the Text Field with the reference text. Prime the desired list entry. Touch the APPLY TAG key to add the input reference text to that entry.
Note:
An existing reference can be edited by priming the entry and proceeding in either of the above ways.
9.7.7
Customised Help
When a Critical Faults list entry is primed, customised help information can be displayed in the GWA by pressing the HELP key. The EDIT key is only available to privileged users for local editing of the top area of the screen which relates to that fault. To escape from the help information screen touch the QUIT key; the GWA reverts to the Critical Faults list.
Helpful Hint
If you touch the ACK, CLR, APPLY TAG, or HELP keys without first selecting an entry in the list, the message is displayed in the message area.
9 -- 29
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
9.8
Note:
Web Based Help

Availability and screen position of the Web-based HELP key is dependent on your systems specification.
9.8.1
Overview
Help text regarding a particular function can be viewed by touching the HELP key, followed by the function key for which help information is required. The message
CHOOSE A FUNCTION FOR HELP
is initially displayed in the message area. When a function key is touched, the message then changes to
HELP INFORMATION
The Help information that relates to the function/screen for which help was requested is displayed in a single screen split into two defined areas: one area for SunGard Vivista Help and other area for Customer Help. Touching the QUIT key removes the Help information and returns the user to the previously displayed General Work Area screen.
9.8.2
HTML Based Help Screen
The upper frame displays Customer Help and the bottom frame displays the SunGard Vivista Help. If a Customer Help page is not available a default blank page is displayed.
9 -- 30
Amb_9.8_WEB BASED HELP
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
EDIT
The EDIT key is only displayed to users who have the privilege to edit Help. These users can edit the Customer Help using HTML Edit Tool that is invoked by selecting the EDIT key. The following screen displays the Customer Help edit update screen.
9.8.3
HTML Edit Tool
The HTML tool allows standard features of Word formatting to format selected Help Text. A mouse fitted to the PC can make this easily accessible. However, all functions are supported using the keyboard. Key Combinations Ctrl + B Ctrl + I Ctrl + U Ctrl + K Ctrl + F Ctrl + G Ctrl + L Ctrl + R Ctrl + T Ctrl + J Ctrl + M Ctrl + . Ctrl + Tab Ctrl + Shift + Tab Ctrl + Z Function Toggles the Bold/Regular Font Type on selected text Toggles the Italic/Regular Font Type on selected text Toggles the Underline/Regular Font Type on selected text Toggles Strikethrough property for the selected text Open a Font Dialog for selection of Font and size Insert image Align the selected paragraph to the left Align the selected paragraph to the right Align the selected paragraph to the centre Justify the selected paragraph Toggles the number list Toggles the bullet point Increases the indent Decreases the indent Undo
9 -- 31

Ctrl + Y Ctrl + C Ctrl + X Ctrl + V Ctrl + A Redo Copy the selected text Cut the selected text Paste the previously copied/cut text Select All
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
9.8.4
Help Data
The SunGard Vivista and customer Help data information is stored in separate folders. This capability allows a customer to customize a Help file explanation to suit local requirements or to prompt any local procedures.
9.8.5
HTML Link Error

A default error page as shown below is displayed on the screen when the HTML link to the help files is not found.
9 -- 32
Chapter 10 System Maintenance Engineering Functions
VOLUME 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Amendment Record

Issue A B 1 1A 2 Reason First draft Update to E/D Term for V9.11 functionality First Issue First Draft V 161 Second Issue to Incorporate Changes to reflect V161 Author SS SS JC TS SS Date 25.04.06 24.06.06 11.12.06 18.09.07 01/11/07
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Approved
10 -- 2
Amb_10.0_SYS MAINT
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
VOLUME 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Contents
10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5 10.2 Enable/Disable Terminal Log On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6 10.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 6 10.2.2 To Enable Terminal Logon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 6 10.2.3 To Disable Terminal Logon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 6 10.3 Enable/Disable Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8 10.3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 8 10.3.2 To Disable a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 8 10.3.3 To Enable a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 9 10.4 Enable/Disable Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10 10.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 10 10.4.2 To Disable a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 10 10.4.3 To Enable a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 11 10.5 Route Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12 10.6 Radio Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13 10.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 13 10.6.2 First Level Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 15 10.6.3 Second Level Configuration -- Physical Channels . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 17 10.6.3.1 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -10.6.3.2 Base Station Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -10.6.3.3 Bay and Channel Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -10.6.3.4 Configure Pip Tone Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -10.6.3.5 Configure Talkthrough Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -10.7 Dynamic Operator Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23 10.7.1 To Access the Edit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 23 10.7.2 To Add a Terminal Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 23 10.7.3 To Edit or Delete an Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -- 23 10.8 Calibrate Screen - Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 25
17 18 18 21 22
10 -- 3
Amb_10.0_SYS MAINT

OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
10 -- 4
Amb_10.0_SYS MAINT
DS2000
10.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
Introduction
The System Maintenance functions give access to facilities necessary to ensure the efficient running of the DS2000. The following functions are available to suitably authorised users: Enable or disable terminals Enable or disable radio channels/talkgroups Enable or disable telephone lines Route a test tone to any radio channel (nonTetra) Configure radio channels/talkgroups Adjust screen calibration
10 -- 5
Amb_10.1_INTRO
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
10.2
Enable/Disable Terminal Log On
Important: This chapter reflects standard Enable/Disable Terminal fuctionality. If your system supports Group Partitioning functionality, this Chapter should be read in conjunction with Sections 8.15 and 8.16.
10.2.1
Introduction
The Enable/Disable Terminal key is accessed via the ENG tab. The facility is used to re-enable a terminal where a user has had three Log On failures, or to disable a terminal to prevent unauthorised use.
10.2.2
To Enable Terminal Logon

Touch the E/D TERM key to display the Terminal Select screen. The key now takes on its Active appearance and the message
CHOOSE A TERMINAL TO ENABLE/DISABLE
is displayed in the message area. Touch the key of the appropriate disabled terminal; its status will be toggled to the Enabled state and the message
TERMINAL LOG ON ENABLED
is displayed in the message area of your terminal.
10.2.3
To Disable Terminal Logon

Touch the E/D TERM key to display the Terminal Select screen. The key takes on its Active appearance and the message
CHOOSE A TERMINAL TO ENABLE/DISABLE
is displayed in the message area. Touch the key of the appropriate enabled terminal and its status will be toggled to the Disabled state, the key being highlighted. The message
TERMINAL LOG ON DISABLED
10 -- 6
Amb_10.2_E/D TERM LOG ON
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
Helpful Hint
Disabled terminals cannot be used, even by an engineer. If you touch any key other than an idle or disabled Terminal key, the message
INVALID OPERATION
is displayed in the message area, and the E/D TERM key reverts to its Inactive state. Software interlocks prevent the instant disabling of a terminal which is in use. It will however be disabled when the current user logs off.
10 -- 7
Amb_10.2_E/D TERM LOG ON
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
10.3
10.3.1
Enable/Disable Line
Introduction
The Enable/Disable Line key is accessed via the ENG tab. The facility is used to re-enable a telephone line, or to disable a telephone line to prevent unauthorised use.
10.3.2
To Disable a Line
With the appropriate telephone page displayed, touch the E/D LINE key. It takes on its active appearance and the message
CHOOSE A LINE TO ENABLE/DISABLE
is displayed in the message area. Touch the key of the required line and its status will be toggled to its Disabled state, with a D showing in the lower border of the key. The message
LINE DISABLED
If you touch any key other than an idle, ringing in or disabled line, the message
INVALID OPERATION
will be displayed in the message area and the E/D LINE key will revert to its Inactive state.
PROBLEM?
Engineers still have full access to any disabled line. Should anyone else try to use a disabled line the message
INVALID OPERATION: LINE DISABLED
will be displayed in their message area.
10 -- 8
Amb_10.3_E/D LINE
DS2000
10.3.3
OPERATOR MANUAL To Enable a Line
Touch the E/D LINE key; it takes on its Active appearance and the message
CHOOSE A LINE TO ENABLE/DISABLE
is displayed in the message area. Touch the key of the appropriate disabled line (with D in the lower border of its key) and its status will be toggled to the Enabled state. The message
LINE ENABLED
Helpful Hint
If your PIN does not allow you to use disabled lines, you cannot enable them. The message
LINE DISABLED
is displayed in the message area of your terminal. If you accidentally touch any key other than an idle, ringing in or disabled line, the message is displayed in the message area and the E/D LINE key reverts to its inactive state.
INVALID OPERATION
10 -- 9
Amb_10.3_E/D LINE
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
10.4
10.4.1
Enable/Disable Channel
Introduction
The Enable/Disable Channel key is accessed via the ENG tab. The facility is used to re-enable a radio channel/talkgroup, or to disable a radio channel/talkgroup to prevent unauthorised use.
10.4.2
To Disable a Channel
Touch the E/D CHAN key; it takes on its Active appearance and the message
CHOOSE A CHANNEL TO ENABLE/DISABLE
is displayed in the message area. Touch the key of the required channel and its status will be toggled to its Disabled state, with a D showing in the border of the key. The message
CHANNEL DISABLED
is displayed in the message area of your terminal and the key displays a D at all other logged on terminals.
Helpful Hint
If you touch any key other than an idle, enabled or disabled radio//talkgroup key, the message
INVALID OPERATION
is displayed in the message area and the E/D CHAN key reverts to its Inactive state. Interlocks prevent the disabling of a channel/talkgroup which is in use or which has audio present. Engineers still have full access to any disabled channel/talkgroup. Should anyone else try to use a disabled channel/talkgroup, the message
INVALID OPERATION; CHANNEL DISABLED
is displayed in their message area.
10 -- 10
Amb_10.4_E/D CHAN_1
DS2000
10.4.3
OPERATOR MANUAL To Enable a Channel
Touch the E/D CHAN key; it takes on its Active appearance and the message
CHOOSE A CHANNEL TO ENABLE/DISABLE
is displayed in the message area. Touch the key of the appropriate disabled channel and its status will be toggled to the Enabled state. The message
CHANNEL ENABLED
Helpful Hint
If your PIN does not allow you to use disabled channels, you cannot enable them. If you accidentally touch any key other than an idle, enabled or disabled radio key, the message
PROBLEM?
INVALID OPERATION
will be displayed in the message area and the E/D CHAN key will revert to its Inactive state.
10 -- 11
Amb_10.4_E/D CHAN_1
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
10.5
Route Tone
Route Tone is used to send a continuous 1060Hz5Hz test tone to specific radio channels. The Route Tone facility is accessed via the ENG tab. To use Route Tone, touch ENG then: a) b) Select the radio channels on which you wish to transmit the test tone. Touch and hold the ROUTE TONE key. The transmitters will be keyed and the tone will be sent on these channels for as long as your finger touches the key. The message
TEST TONE TO CHANNEL(S) ON
is displayed in the message area. When you release the key, this message changes to
TEST TONE TO CHANNEL(S) OFF
Helpful Hint
If you touch this key without having selected any radio channels, the message will be displayed in the message area.
INVALID OPERATION
10 -- 12
Amb_10.5_ROUTE TONE
DS2000
10.6
OPERATOR MANUAL
Radio Configuration
The Radio Configuration key is accessed via the ENG tab. The facility is used, among other things, to enable/disable Pip Tones, specify CTSS state, change channel numbers, change bay number.
10.6.1
Introduction
Within this file there is configuration data for two types of radio channels -- Physical and Logical. Physical channels are individual radio Base Stations. Logical channels refer to a number of Physical channels which have been put into a Voting Group. The Logical channel allows the grouped Base Stations to be treated as a single channel for most purposes. The configuration of all radio channels is defined in the relevant file at three levels; the following tables summarise the parameters which can be changed. Your ability to view or change parameters is set by the System Manager. The first level is the same for both Physical and Logical channels as described in Section 10.6.2. The second level configuration parameters for Physical channels are described in Section 10.6.3 and for Logical channels in Section 10.6.4. Radio Configuration - First Level NAME/LOCATION CTCSS STATE TOGGLE PIP TONE TOGGLE TOGGLE DYNAMIC VOTE (This field is not applicable to some installations) Cannot be changed within this facility ON or OFF ON or OFF ENABLE or DISABLE
10 -- 13
Amb_10.6_RADIO CONFIG
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Radio Configuration - Second Level (Physical Channels) Bay and Channel SELECT MODE SELECTED BAY CHANNEL Pip Tone Parameters PIP TONE MODE TONE DURATION (ms) REPETITION PERIOD (ms) SYNC DELAY(ms) T/O MODE TIMEOUT PERIOD Talkthrough MODE TIMEOUT RESET MODE TIMEOUT (s) DISABLED -- LOCAL VOX--REMOTE From 5 to 300 in steps of 5 -LOCAL PIPS SELECTED - RX VOX From 50 to 150 in steps of 10 From 500 to 3000 in steps of 50 From 200 to 2800 in steps of 50 DISABLED -- RX VOX -- TX/RX VOX From 5 to 300 in steps of 5 AUTOMATIC MANUAL 1, MANUAL 2 1 or 2 01 -- 99
DISABLED -- RX VOX -- TX/RX VOX
Radio Configuration - Second Level (Logical Channels) Voting Group VOTE GROUP STATE VOTE GROUP LIST VOTE GROUP TYPE Pip Tone Parameters As for Physical channels Talkthrough As for Physical channels ENABLED -- DISABLED Specify channels in group SITE SELECT --
10 -- 14
DS2000
10.6.2
OPERATOR MANUAL First Level Configuration
The Radio Configuration key is accessed via the ENG tab.
Touch the idle RADIO CONFIG key to configure a radio channel. It will change to the Active state and your own terminal position number will be displayed in the lower left border. This key state will also be displayed at all other terminals. The first page of the first level Radio Configuration file will be displayed in your General Work Area.
This shows the channel name/location with the current state of CTCSS and Pip Tones.
Use the PREV PAGE and NEXT PAGE keys to leaf through the file.
If your PIN allows you to change CTCSS and Pip Tone states, touching the current state field will cause it to toggle to the other state.
Touch the SAVE key to save the parameter. The parameter displayed in the Bay column will revert to its original colour and
PARAMETER UPDATE SAVED
is displayed in the message area. Use the PREV LEVEL key, where applicable, to return to the Main Screen.
10 -- 15
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Helpful Hint
If the radio configuration facility is currently accessed at another operator position or the Radio Channel database update facility is being used, the RADIO CONFG key will be in its Active state and a terminal position number will appear to the left of its lower border. Use the Intercom facility to communicate with the user of that terminal to get clearance. If you touch the PREV LEVEL key before the SAVE key, your changes will not be actioned. If you have changed the parameter and do not wish to save it, touch and untouch the parameter itself to deselect it. It reverts to its original colour.
10 -- 16
DS2000
10.6.3
10.6.3.1
OPERATOR MANUAL
Second Level Configuration - Physical Channels Options

The Radio Channel Options are accessed from the Radio Configuration screen. To reveal the second-level screen Radio Channel Options for any location, place a finger within the Name/Location column of the Radio Configuration screen. The name of the radio station underneath your finger will be highlighted. Slide your finger to the name of the radio location for which you want to reveal second level parameters and lift your finger to select it. The screen below is displayed when you have selected a Physical channel. The TOGGLE DYNAMIC VOTE key is not applicable to all installations and may not be displayed.
The Radio Channels Options screen gives you access to four further screens (or five, depending on system specification) controlling different aspects of the radio. Depending on the facilities enabled for your PIN you may not have access to all of these, or you may be able to view the current state, but not make changes. The descriptions assume full access is available to the user. To view or modify a particular group of parameters, touch one of the four (or five) keys on the screen. Further details for each option are given in the following pages.
10 -- 17

10.6.3.2 Base Station Faults
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
This option allows you to view, acknowledge and reset faults which have been reported for the Base Station. New Base Station faults are reported by the state of the B/STN FAULT key. Touch the key to display a list of the current faults reported by the Base Station. (A list of reportable fault messages for your equipment is given in Chapter 4, when applicable.) The display lists the current faults reported by the Base Station. Three keys are provided:
Touch the ACK FAULT key to acknowledge any unacknowledged (new) faults for the Base Station. This function updates the display state of the individual Base Station faults, the composite channel fault state, the Base Station Site Select keys (if applicable) and the B/STN FAULT key. Touch the FAULT RESET key to reset any latched faults at the Base Station. Touch the PREV LEVEL key to return to the Radio Channels Options screen.
Helpful Hint
Unless the fault condition has been cleared or the fault was a transient condition the fault will not be cleared when you touch the FAULT RESET key. This function does not directly affect the display state of the individual base station faults, composite channel fault state or B/STN FAULT key. The Display states are affected by the base station reporting that the fault condition has cleared.
10.6.3.3
Bay and Channel Selection

Certain radio base stations have two bays which can be used to provide redundancy, whereby if the base station in one bay fails, the other bay can be used. Commands can be transmitted from the ICCS to change bays on the channel. This option allows you to view and change the bay and channel for the Base Station. The illustration shows a typical installation. The parameters displayed will depend on the functionality of the Base Station.
Note:
Instead of the above functionality, a new ALL BAY2 key will change all automatic bay selected radio base stations to bay 2. See section 10.13.
10 -- 18
DS2000
OPERATOR MANUAL
To change a parameter, place your finger on the screen and slide it to the parameter value you wish to change. The parameters passing underneath your finger will be highlighted. When the parameter you wish to change is highlighted, lift your finger to select it. The selected parameter will change colour and the message
CHANGE PARAMETER USING UP/DOWN
is displayed in the message area. Note: If a parameter is not configurable, the fields that refer to it will not be selectable or may not be displayed. Use the UP and DOWN keys below the page to step through the range of available parameters. As soon as you lift your finger from one of these keys, a further change in the colour of the parameter will take place -- keep touching and lifting your finger from the key until the desired value of the parameter is shown. Repeat this procedure as required for the other parameters before saving them.
Touch the SAVE key to save those parameters that have been changed. The parameter values displayed will revert to their original colours and
is displayed in the message area. If you have changed a parameter and do not wish to save it, touch and untouch the parameter itself to deselect it. It will revert to its original colour and
PARAMETER CHANGE CANCELLED
will appear in the message area. Touch the PREV LEVEL key to return to the Radio Channel Options screen.
10 -- 19
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
Helpful Hint
If Bay or Channel Change is not available for the particular Base Station, the fields will be displayed showing the current state, but they will not be touch-sensitive. If Channel Change is not separate for each bay, Bay 2 Channel field will show N/A.
10 -- 20
DS2000
10.6.3.4
OPERATOR MANUAL
Configure Pip Tone Parameters
This option allows you to view and change the Pip Tone parameters.
To change a parameter, place a finger on the screen and slide it to the parameter value you wish to change. The parameters passing underneath your finger will be highlighted. When the parameter you wish to change is highlighted, lift your finger to select it. The selected parameter will change colour and the message
is displayed in the message area. Use the UP and DOWN keys below the page to step through the range of parameters available (these are listed on the first page of this section of the manual). As soon as you lift your finger from one of these keys, a further change in the colour of the parameter will take place -- keep touching and lifting your finger from the key until the desired value of the parameter is shown. Repeat this procedure as required for the other parameters before saving them. Touch the SAVE key to save those parameters that have been changed. The parameter values displayed will revert to their original colours and
10 -- 21

10.6.3.5 Configure Talkthrough Parameters
OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
This option allows you to view and change Talkthrough for the Base Station.
To change a parameter, place a finger on the screen and slide it to the parameter value you wish to change. The parameters passing underneath your finger will be highlighted. When the parameter you wish to change is highlighted, lift your finger to select it. The selected parameter will change colour and the message
is displayed in the message area. Use the UP and DOWN keys below the page to step through the range of parameters available (these are listed on the first page of this section of the manual). As soon as you lift your finger from one of these keys, a further change in the colour of the parameter will take place -- keep touching and lifting your finger from the key until the desired value of the parameter is shown. Repeat this procedure as necessary for other parameters before saving them. Touch the SAVE key to save those parameters that have been changed. The parameter values displayed will revert to their original colours and
10 -- 22
DS2000
10.7
OPERATOR MANUAL
Dynamic Operator Screen Configuration

The Dynamic Operator screen can be configured to represent the layout of the Control Room or can display up to 99 terminals if they are arranged consecutively. Configuration of the screen is achieved when viewing the Dynamic Operator screen. Only authorised users can add, delete and edit the icons on the screen. System Managers can also add lines and text by accessing the Dyn Ops file in the DS2000 database. These operations are dealt with in the relevant sections of the Database Editing Functions manual Volume 2.
10.7.1
To Access the Edit Function

If you have the access rights to amend this screen, touching the DYN OP key a second time gives access to the Edit function and the key changes colour state to indicate this. Now you can add, delete, move or edit terminal icons. After editing, touch the DNY OP key to end the session. The key reverts to its idle state.
10.7.2
To Add a Terminal Icon

a) b) View the Dynamic Operator screen Touch the screen (or use the mouse) where you want to see the icon displayed This invokes an option screen. Select between styles A, B or C.
c) d)
Use the ID up or down key to change/select the required terminal number Touch the OK key to save the changes or the Cancel key to abort
10.7.3
To Edit or Delete an Icon

a) Touch an icon of the terminal to be edited and the following menu appears:
b)
Select the desired option from the menu.

10 -- 23
Amb_10.7_DYN OP SCRN CONFIG_2

OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
10 -- 24
Amb_10.7_DYN OP SCRN CONFIG_2
DS2000
10.8
OPERATOR MANUAL
Calibrate Screen - Adjustment Use the calibration function as described in Chapter 3. Where a user is having difficulty in calibrating the screen, check that the picture width and horizontal shift controls, located under the lower front edge of the VDU, have not been altered. Reducing the width, or moving the display to the left, may cure the problem. If the screen has vertical adjustment controls, these may also be tried. If there is more than one, try the vertical shift control before trying the height control. In both cases, horizontal and vertical, only small adjustments should be made each time and to only one control at a time. If no cure can be effected, contact the System Maintainer or SunGard Vivista Limited.
10 -- 25
Amb_10.8 CALIB

OPERATOR MANUAL
DS2000
10 -- 26
Amb_10.8 CALIB

Vol 1 Op Man 191 Classic Issue 7

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Vol 1 Op Man 191 Classic Issue 7

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

DS2000

INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL SYSTEM

The Ambulance Trusts

Volume 1 - Operator Functions Preface

25.04.06 24.06.06 22.08.06 30.08.06 11.12.06 11.06.07 20.09.07 01/11/07

06/11/07 07/12/07 20/12/07 09/07/08

Ch 5 and Ch 6 amendments DSW DSW

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

OPERATOR MANUAL 5.6

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

OPERATOR MANUAL HTML Link Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -- 32 10 10 10 10 10 ---5 6 6 6 6

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Installations using VoIP contain media from

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

PREFACE Customer Functionality

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Analogue Radio Functions

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

VOLUME 1 INTRODUCTION Amendment record

06/11/07 07/12/07 20/12/07

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

User Positions (Terminals)

Touch-sensitive screen with speakers Mouse (Optional)

Typical Operator Position

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

VOLUME 1 INTRODUCTION 1.4.3 Typical Main Screen

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Audible Indications and Alarms

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Instant Replay Recorder

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Chapter 2 Start Up and DS2000 Log On

VOLUME 1 START UP AND DS2000 LOG ON Amendment record

06/11/07 07/12/07 20/12/07

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

VOLUME 1 START UP AND DS2000 LOG ON

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

VOLUME 1 START UP AND DS2000 LOG ON

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

VOLUME 1 START UP AND DS2000 LOG ON

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

VOLUME 1 START UP AND DS2000 LOG ON

Introduction to DS2000 Log On

The Log On screen

Part No. 808-Amb-0000-025 E SunGard Public Sector Limited